SIEMENS Instructions

-
Local Area Network SINEC LI

Programming
Instructions

Manual Order No. 6ES5998-7LA21

Operating Instructions
COM 530 on the PG 675

Contents Order No.:

GWA
/ Operating Instructions
‘, Instructions 4NEB811 0545-02
COM 530 on the PG 615

Programming GWA
Instructions 4NEB811 0546-02

Operating GWA
Operating Instructions
Instructions 4NEB811 0520-02
COM 530 with S5-DOS

Operating GWA
Instructions 4NEB811 0521-02

Operating GWA
Instructions 4NEB 8110730-02

i,_

SIEMENS AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
I
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S5
SINEC LI Local Area Network
Instructions Order No.: GWA4 NEB 811 0545-02d

Fig. 1-1 SINEC L1 local area network

Contents Page Page

1, Description 1-1 2 Installation 2-1

1,1 Application 1-1 2.1 Packaging and Dimensions 2-1
1.2 Construction of the Communications Processor 1-2 2.2 Installation Guidelines 2-2
1.2.1 Mechanical Design 1-2 3 System Start-up and Troubleshooting 3-1
1.2.2 Controls and Displays 1-3 3.1 Self-Test 3-1
1.2.3 Structure 1-3 3.2 Assigning the Module Parameters 3-2
1.2.4 Memory Submodules 1-4 3.3 COM 530 Diagnostics 3-3
1.2.5 Addressing in the Central Controller 1-4 3.4 Interface Monitoring 3-4
1,2.6 Parameter Assignment 1-4 4 Appendix 4-1
1.3 Construction of the Bus Terminal 1-5 4,1 Interface Pin Assignments 4-1
1.3.1 Mechanical Design 1-5 4.1.1 Backplane Connectors Xl and X2 4-1
1.3.2 General 1-5 4.1.2 User Submodule X3 4-2
1.3.3 Connections 1-6 4.1.3 Serial interfaces X4and X5 4-2
1.3.4 Bus terminal fornon-Siemens nodes 1-7 4.2 Address Assignment on the S5 Bus 4-3
1,3.5 Bus driver 1-7 4.3 Constraintsin Configurations with S5-101U Slaves 4-3
1.3.6 Bus Terminal Selection 1-8 4.4 Spare Parts and Accessories 4-4
1.4 Bus Cable 1-8
1.5 Technical Specifications 1-9
1.5.1 Environmental Conditions 1-9
1.5.2 Technical Specifications of the CP 530 1-9
— 1.5.3 Technical Specifications of the BT777 Bus Terminal 1-9
1.5.4 SINEC LI Bus Data 1-9
1. Description

1.1 Application

The interconnection of programmable controllers for the pur- The BT777 bus terminal constitutes the link between the indivi-
pose of implementing distributed and hierarchical automation dual nodes and the bus.
structures and the resultant enhancement of communications —
between the individual PCs is gaining in significance. Two
SIMATIC S5 local area networks are available for this pur-
pose:

● SINEC HI, for the high-performance range

● SINEC Ll, for the low-performance range

These instructions apply exclusively to the components of the

SINEC LI network.

The SINEC LI bus consists of three different components:

. CP 530 communications processor

. BT777 bus terminal or transceiver (per node)

D
● Bus (4-core, shielded) I PG

The CP 530 communications processor implements all the

central coordination functions for the SINEC LI bus, which n
operates on the master-slave principle. The CP 530, which
—
controls the flow of information, is plugged into the master
PC within the network. The slave PCs can be connected to m
SINEC LI in two ways: ,033

— In the case of the S5-1OOU, S5-1OI U and S5-I15U program- Fig. 1-2 Principle of operation as maater processor
mable controllers, the connection is made via the existing
programmer interface.
N. B.: The 100 CPU cannot act as a slave with the S5-IOOU
Pc.
— If the programmer interface is to be kept in the case of a
slave S5-I15U, a CP 530 can also be plugged into the slot to
assume the slave interfacing function. The S5-135U and S5- flo51cr
150U PCs always communicate with the SINEC L1 bus via
a CP 530 communications processor.

The maximum length of segments between two active BT 777

bus terminals is

— 1 km (0.6 miles) or 2,5 km (1.6 miles), depending on the bus

cable used
— 2,5 km or 4 km, depending on the bus terminal used.

This gives a total bus length of 30 or 50 km (19 or31 miles). The

maximum number of nodes is 31, including the master PC.

The CP 530 as master processor

: controls bus traffic
: interchanges data with the master PC (—)
: passes programming functions on to the nodes ,03’
(-------) Bild 1-3 Principle of oparation aa alave interfaca module

The CP 530 as slave interface module

: exchanges data with its master PC (—)
: responds when referenced by the master
-for bus functions (.......)
–for programming functions (-------)

1-1
 1. LJesctvptlon

1.2 Construction of the Communications Processor

1.2.1 Mechanical Design

There are two versions of the CP 530 communications proces-

sor:

● Block-type module (43 mm or 1.7 in. wide)

(6ES5 530-7 ...) for the S5-I15U programmable controllers.
The module is contained in a rugged plastics holder, which
protects it from environmental influences and permits
simple and vibration-free installation. A fan is not required.

Fig. 1-4 CP 530 as a block-type module

----

. Compact version (20 mm or 0.8 in. wide) \

(6ES5 530-3 ...) The module is a normal PCB and can be -
plugged into the S5-135U and S5-150U central controllers
(also without fans); the module can also be plugged into
the S5-I15U, using an adapter casing.

l—

The frontplate has a receptacle for a memory submodule @

(EPROM, EEPROM or RAM), two serial interface ports each
with a 15-way Cannon socket connector for a programmer
(PG)@, a BT777 bus terminal@, and a number of controls and
displays@. On the rear of the block-type module there is a 48-
way connector of range R2 and on the compact module two
such connectors @.

1-2
I 1. Description

1.2 Construction of the Communications Processor

1.2.2 Controls and Displays

● Green LED: RN = RUN

indicates that the CP 530 is servicing the interfaces and
operating satisfactorily.
The RUN-LED can only light up if the mode selector is in the
“RUN” position.

● Red LED: ST= STOP

indicates that the CP 530 is not servicing the bus interface.
The red STOP LED can also light up in response to a
“STOP” command from the programmer or
“STOP” command from the CP
if the mode selector is at “RUN”

● Red LED: MF = Module fault

indicates a hardware fault of the CP 530.

● Red LED: BF = Bus fault

indicates a fault in the course of bus traffic, e. g.
— wrong parameters assigned
— slave PC failure
—
– bus wiring fault

● Switch: RN/ST = RUN-STOP

This mode selector can put the CP 530 either from “RUN”
to “STOP” (see above) or from “STOP” to “RUN” if no
Fig. 1-6 Displays and controls on the CP 530 (block version shown)
further stop condition applies.

When the CP is switched to STOP, this state becomes effec.

tive at the latest on completion of a current cycle through the
polling list.

1.2.3 Structure

The bus interface drives the SINEC LI bus in keeping with the
I User-
submodule
I
parameters entered by the user in the user submodule. The —
CPU of the master PC can place data on the SINEC LI bus via
the dual-port RAM and fetch data from the bus. The dual-port
RAM is, as it were, a communications window between the re-
levant CPU and the CP 530. The operator can enter parame- E~p}H
ters via the programmer port and observe, control or test the u
bus.
Bus
interface
n

Fig. I-7 Structure of the CP 530

1-3
 1. Description -

1.2 Construction of the Communications Processor

1.2.4 Memory Submodules 1.2.6 Parameter Assignment

The following three types of memory submodules are availa- The CP 530 can be programmed with two lists (analogous to
ble for storing the user program in the CP 530: the programming of a SIMATIC S5 CPU):

EPROM submodule ● a polling list = sequence for

EEPROM submodule (max. 64 Byte) bus cycle
RAM submodule
● a interrupt list = sequence for
The EPROM submodule can be programmed on the PG 615 or (max. 30 Byte) interrupt scanning
PG 675 programmer. A UV erasing facility is necessary for era-
sing the data. ● There is also the SYSID area, which permits the defining of
module functions by parameter assignment.
The EEPROM is also a non-volatile memory which can be pro-
grammed and erased offline in a PG 615 or PG 675 program- If the CP 530 is to be used as a gateway in connection with
mer and online from 6/1986 in the CP 530. programming functions, it must not have a polling list.

The RAM submodule, on the other hand, is mainly used for These lists are generated by the PG 675/PG 615 programmers
checking out the user program during system start-up. It with the support of the COM 530 software package and can
should only be used as a permanent program memory if the be written into an EPROM, EEPROM or, if there is no memory
battery in the PC power supply is replaced at intervals of one submodule plugged in, direct into the internal RAM of the CP
to two years. 530. The programmers are connected to the CP 530 by means
of a cable with 15-way connector (as for the S5-l15U/S5-
Caution: 101 u).
— The RAM loses its data if the CP 530 is taken out of the cen-
tral controller.
— In order to guarantee a safe initial start of the CP 530, the
RAM or EEPROM submodule should first be erased.

Submodule Order No. Remarks

I
EPROM sub-
module
— 8Kbytes 6ES5375-OLA11
16 Kbytes 6ES5375-OLA21
EEPROM sub-

~
module Can only be programmed with
2Kbytes 6ES5375-OLC II programmers using S5-DOS or with c?

L
510

1
a,
4Kbytes 6ES5375-0LC21 COM530/615 . slave

c!
.“
8Kbytes 6ES5375-0LC31 [W 530 ——.————.

16K bytes
RAMsubmodul
8Kbytes
16 Kbytes
32 Kbytes
6ES5375-0LC41

6ES5375-OLD1l
6ES5375-0LD21
6ES5375-0LD31
,,,),~
,0 ,,,
*
,+,..:... 3
R“
0
P.,,. ,,’

/’
~6

Fig. 1-9 Assigning parameters to the CP 530 as master or slave

The ~arameters of the communications Processor reauire a
maxi’mum user memory space of 500 wo~ds. However, ‘all the
above larger submodule types can be used.

1.2.5 Addressing in the Central Controller

The CP 530 can be plugged into a central controller along with

other central processors or intelligent 1/0 modules. The CPU
references the CP 530 via an address, which is set with the
programmer. This is done by way of the “SYSID” function (sy-
stem identification area). Addresses between 1 and 254 can
be set.

1-4
I 1. Description

1.3 Construction of the Bus Terminal

1.3.1 Mechanical Design

The bus terminal is accommodated in a rugged plastic casing —

and can be mounted in three different ways:
● Snapped onto a 35 mm sectional rail (EN 50 022)
. Snapped onto a 75 mm sectional rail, using mounting plate
3TX6 501-...
● Bolted to a flat surface using the fixing holes on the casing
A cable with a 15-way Cannon connector (1 or 2 m long) is
brought out of the bus terminal to establish the connection to
the SINEC LI node.
The four cores and shielding of the bus terminal are connec-
ted to five SIGUT screw-type terminals on either side of the
casing ~.
An external 5V power supply (option) can be connected to an-
other two terminals @. The bus terminal is therefore capable
of operating as a bus driver in a further section of the bus
without having to be connected to the PC:
terminals C = + 5V (5.0 to 5.3 V; 0.3A)
D = OV reference potential (ground)
The two unlabeled screw terminals (bus terminal top left)
must be bridged.

a
Fig. 1-10 BT 777 bus terminal

Master/
I This power supply is not necessary for normal
a~t31ications. I .
~m
Slave
. ,:.

1.3.2 General I 20 mA ( TTY)

The BT 777 bus terminal is used for converting the 20 mA

current loop signal from the serial interface of the module to a SINEC L1 RS 485
signal conforming to the EIA RS 485 standard on the bus.
Fig. 1-11 Function of the BT 777 bus terminal

The bus terminal of each node drives a bus segment. The

potential difference between adjacent slave or master
grounds should not exceed 5 V in the case of bus terminal
6ES5777-OB.00.
With bus terminal 6ES5777-I BCOO, potential differences of Fig. 1-12 Potential differences on the SINEC L1 bus
up to V,ff = 500 V are permissible thanks to the optical isola-
tion of the input.
m

~–––
I
———— ————
4! 1

Fig. 1-13 shows a block diagram of the bus terminal. Each

slave “hears” each signal on the bus with the exception of its
own signal. Since signals can be sent and received from both I
I —-
ends, the master PC can be located at any point on the bus. A L-— –— ——– — — ~o.o+
bus terminator at the extreme left or right-hand node is not
required. Fig. 1-13 Block diagram of the bus terminal

1-5
 ‘1. uescrlpuon -

1.3 Construction of the Bus Terminal

1.3.3 Connections

The BT 777 has terminals for bus cables with up to four cores.
The core pairs for sending and receiving are connected up as
shown opposite (see also cover of bus terminal):

The receiver core pair of the left-hand adjacent node are con-
nected to terminals 1A/2A, while the sending core pair to the
left-hand adjacent node leave at terminal 3A/4A.

The sending core pair to the right-hand adjacent node start at

terminals 1 B/2B and the receiving core pairs from this node
are connected to terminals 3B/4B.

Fig. 1-14 Connecting the bus cable

Caution: When connecting the core pairs, make sure that
they have the correct polarity.
Make connections as shown in Fig. 1-14.
I 5 V from master / s[ave
Terminals OA and OB are for the cable screen. In this connec-
tion, please refer to Section 2.2. Installation guidelines.

The BT777 bus terminal contains a relay with four normally clo-
sed contacts. If the connector on a slave or master is with-
drawn or if the power supply is disconnected, these contacts
bridge the electronics of the bus terminal so that bus traffic
for the other nodes remains unaffected (the bus terminal is a
passive device).

The terminal can drive a bus of up to 2.5 km/4 km (1.5/2.5 mi-

les) in length, i. e. should one of the nodes fail, the length of
the cable between two nodes @ and@ still functioning must
not be greater than 2.5 km/4 km (1.5/2.5 miles). If this length is

—
exceeded, an extra power supply is necessary (see Section
1.3.4).
-s 2“5‘m/4km 1
The connecting cable to the PC/CP can be extended to 25 m
(165 ft). If the necessary cross-sectional area (1.3 mm’ or
16 AWG) is not available for the supply cables, an external
power supply must be provided (C= 5V, D = OV). Fig. 1-15 Bridging a noda that has failed

In this case, the following applies:

Required connections as above

(supply cables necessary, but smaller cross-section possible; 1 51215 3 14 8 6 r----m 7
monitoring to determine whether bus terminal is plugged in) — — ——— i — - — — —
Required connection: t t L
Jumper for
– Signal cores 6,7,9,2 M 5,2 V Mext
— Power supply +5V: 3,14 Total cross-sectional area
‘ext, externa[
z 1.3 mmz (16 AWG) Supply
M : 5,12 Total cross-sectional area 08
Z 1.3 mmz (16 AWG)
- Shield : 1,8
– Open jumper Q 8 on the BT 777
c + 5V
(0,3 A)
Da
T x=
: ,=(,: D OV
A 082 e
Fig. 1-16 Power supply

1-6
I 1. Description

1.3 Construction of the Bus Terminal

1.3.4 Bus terminal for non-Siemens nodes

(No power on DSUB pins 3/5)
—
If the non-Siemens node is switched off or the cable from the
bus terminal unplugged, this simulates a nonconducting inter-
face transistor (20 mA current loop): a sustained line break is
the result.

Remedy:
— Connect external 5Vpower supply to C.
Connect M (OV reference) potential to D.
— Do not open jumper Q8 in the bus terminal.
— Monitor the voltage of the non-Siemens node with a relay;
connect the NC contact via the two terminals at the top 777 GL
(Iabelled x and yin the case of bus terminal BT 777-~xxxx).
Terminal y carries ground potential (like terminal D). The bus G
terminal cable can be unplugged if x and y are shorted. This O-
is done by:
@
* disconnecting the power supply of the non- Siemens
node (k closed)
* or operating a manual switch (h closed)

1.3.5 Bus driver

The bus terminal can also be used without programmable

controller or communications processor as a bus driver or
repeater. The external power can be connected in two ways:
Via 15-pin DSUB: Pin 3 = + 5.OV (0.3A)
Pin 12= OV
lumper pins 6 and 7
Via terminals C/D: C = + 5 V, D = OV
lumper the two terminals (x,y) at the top
left of the BT777.

1-7
 1. Description m

1.3 Design of the Bus Terminal

1.4 Bus Cable

1.3.6 Bus Terminal Selection

Bus terminal I .— ___
6ES5777-OB.00 I -——- . .—BCOO
6ES5777-I ---
IMaximum cable length as per
Section 1.4
– Segment 2.5 km (1.5 miles) 4 km (2.5 miles)
- Complete (BUS) 30 km (19 miles) 50 km (31 miles)

IIsolation if powered
a) via the PC/CP
Input/Output * 5V Veff = 500V
input/Power supply + 5V Veff = 500V
Power supply/Output — —

Ib) externally
Input/Output * 5V Veff = 500 v
input/Power supply PC/CP Veff = 500V1) Veff = 500 Vl)
Power supply PC/C P/Output Veff = 500V1) Veff = 500 Vl)

IImpulse withstand voltage, terminals IAto 4B — 5 kV/50Ps

(BEMA impulse)
I
Display for RXD/RXT(Typ test) — yes
-. I) Iso[ation by TTY-Network in PC/CP

1.4 Bus Cable

a) SIMATIC cable for distances of up to 1 km (0.6 miles) Orders for all cable types to be placed with:
Cable type: AZ1/514 G 5x0.14 mm2 (64912014) ZN-Werkstatt Furth (FSZ Ftirth);
Design: 5 core dia. 0.42 mm/O.14 mmz shielded specify lengths in meters
Outer diameter 5 mm
— Order No.: 6ES5707-IAAO0 Use of customer-specific cables.
Other cables with similar ratings can also be used for SINEC
b) Indoor-type cable for 2.5/4 km (1.5/2.5 miles) (twisted L1. The following technical specifications can be used as an
pairs) aid to selection:
Cable type: 2YSTCY 2x2x0 .6411.5 – Loop impedance < 110 Q/km
Design: 2x 2 core, dia. 0.64 mm/O.32 mm2, (22 AWG) = 50 nF/km
– Capacitance per unit length
shielded
Outer diameter 7.9 mm Where cables of other manufacture are chosen, however, no
Order No.: 6ES5707-2AAO0 functional guarantee can be given for the maximum segment
length (cable distortion).
c) Buried cable for 2.5/4 km (1.5/2.5 miles) (twisted pairs)
Cable type: 2YSTC 2Y 2x2x0 .64/l.5
Design: 2x2 core, dia. 0.64 mm/O.32 mm’, (22 AWG)
shielded
Outer diameter 9.4 mm
Order No.: 6ES5707-3AAO0

d) Buried cable and lightning protection cable for 2.5/4 km

(1.5/2.5 miles) (twisted pairs)
Cable type: 2YSTC2Y CC24 2x2x0 .6411.5
Design: 2x2 core, dia. 0.64 mm/O.32 mm2, (22 AWG)
shielded
Insulated 2xcopper braiding for lightning
protection (16 mmz)
Order No.: 6ES5707-4AAO0

Note:
Increase core cross-sectional area to that required for SIGUT (screw-type) terminals (see 1.5.3).

1-8
1. Description

1.5 Technical Specifications

1.5.1 Environmental Conditions 1.5.3 Technical Specifications of the BT777 Bus Terminal

Degree of protection : 1P 00 (no protection against Casing: 115 mm x 150 mm x 38 mm

—
dust or water) (4.5 in. x5.9 in. x 1.5 in.)
Permissible – for snapping onto 35 mm standard sectional rail
ambient temperature : o to 55°C — with 3TX6-501 mounting 75 mm standard sectional rail
Transport and storage plate on
temperature : –40 to +85°C — screw fixing
Humidity rating (DIN 40040) : = i’SO/O atmospheric Connections:
humidity, annual mean for – to the PCs 15-way Cannon connector with
~ 35”C, no condensation approx. 1 m (3.3 ft)
Mechanical stressing : Installation in stationary or 2 m (6.6 ft) cable
equipment not absolutely (expandable to 50 m)
free of vibrations
: 10...57 Hz 0.15 mm — to the SINEC L1 bus
–Vibrations IEC 68-2-6
: 57...500 Hz 2g incoming line 4 SIGUT terminals 1...2.5 mmz
–Shock IEC 68-2-27 30 g/18 ms, semisinusoidal outgoing line 4 SIG UTterminals (17to 13AWG)
– protective earth (PE) conductor 2 SIGUT terminals solid
Supply voltage 5V, tolerance *5%
1.5.2 Technical Specifications of the CP 530 Current consumption 0.3 A (typ. 0.25 A)

Mechanical Data
Block-type Compact 1.5.4 SINEC L1 Bus Data
modules version
PCB format 160x260 mm 160x233.4 mm ● Baud rate 9600 bitsls
(6,2in.x10.2in.) (6.2in.x9.2in.)
Frontplate width 43 mm(l.7in.) 20,3 mm(O.8in.) ● Bus cycle time, e. g. for 30 nodes:
Casing 203.2x302.6mm — – 2 bytes of nettdata 0.75s
(approx.8in.xll.9 in.) –64 bytes of nett data 5.2s
Weight — —
– General: Tu = (20+ L~ 1,8 + L, 1,8 + t~) n [ins]
Backplane connector l x 2x
Tu= Bus cycle time for n nodes
(ES 902, range 2, 48-way)
with identical message length (m)
Front connector 2x 2x master — slaves
(Cannon socket connector, 15-way) with identical message length (s)
1 1 slaves — master
RUN/STOP mode selector
L~= Number of bytes, master
LED displays 4 4 L, = Number of bytes, slave
RN (RUN) tQ 20 ms, for cross communications only
=

ST (STOP) n = Number of nodes

MF (MODULE FAULT)
BF (BUS FAULT) ● Maximum cable length with conductor cross sectional area
0.32 mmz
Electrical Data
Block-type Compact Bus terminal 6ES5777-OB.00
module version – segment 2.5 km (1.5 miles)
— complete length 30 km (19 miles)
(6ES5530-7LA11) (6ES5530-3LA11)
Power supply: Bus terminal 6ES5 777-1 BCOO
+5V (backplane connector): Tolerance +5% Tolerance *5% – Segment 4 km (2.5 miles)
+5.2V (backplane connector): Tolerance *SYO — — complete iength 50 km (31 miles)
+24V (backplane connector): Tel. +25%/- 15%
+5.2V (front connector) : Tolerance *5% Tolerance +5%
Current rating:
+5V (backplaneconnector): 1.OA(typ.O.6A) 11 A(typ. o,6A)
+5.2V (backplane connector): 1.25A —
+24V (backplane connector): 0.35A
+5.2V (front connector) : 1.25A 1.25A
Power losses : 6.5W 9.OW
Microprocessor : SAB8031 SAB8031

Note
The S5-I15U power supply modules can serve only one com-
pact module (adapter casing):
Power supply module —
6ES5951-7LB12(3A) -
6ES5951-7LB21 (7A) 1 x 530 compact
6ES5951-7LDI 1 (15A) 1 x 530 compact

1-9
I 2. Installation

2.1 Packaging and Dimensions

Block-type CP 530:

The module is hooked into the mounting rack of the S5-I15U

PC and fixed with two screws. (
IJ

186, S
}
Fig. 2-1 Block-type CP 530

CP 530 compact:

The module is plugged into the central rack of the S5-135U

and S5-150U programmable controllers and locked in posi-
tion with the locking bar.

b-
173

Fig. 2-2 Compact-type CP 530

The bus terminal can be attached in three different ways:

– Snapped onto a 35 mm standard sectional rail c

u-
– Snapped onto a 75 mm standard sectional rail
— Bolted, using the two fixing holes for screws 0 max. 5 mm.

Fig. 2-3 BT 777 bus terminal

2-1
 -
2.installation

2.2 Installation Guidelines

The BT 777 bus terminal with its terminals on both sides to the
SINEC LI bus and the connecting cable to the serial interface
on the relevant node should be kept separate from all input
and output cables.
A clearance of at least 10 cm (4 in.) should be observed bet-
ween the SINEC LI bus cable and adjacent power cables.

Immunity to noise can be enhanced if the screen is connected

at both ends to the BT 777 bus terminal and the latter connec-
ted to PE (protective earth or ground). Make sure that the
equalizing currents through the screen cable between the no-
des do not become too high. If necessary, unload the screen
by means of a separate earthing conductor of adequate cross
section.

If the connecting cores have a cross-sectional area of less

than 1 mmz (17 AWG), core end sleeves must be used (e.g. Et-
Iinger & Co., Mtinchen).

2-2
3. System Start-up and Troubleshooting

3.1 Self-Test

When the programmable controller is powered up, all the red

LEDs on the CP 530 first light up and a module self-testis star-
ted. If this test proves successful, the red LEDs darken and the
green RUN-LED indicates the RUN status.
Condition: Mode selector at “RUN”.

If the fault still permits programming functions to be carried

out, the exact cause of the fault can be ascertained with the
aid of the special “Modes” function, this enables the follo-
wing responce: 10 hardware faults n (where n corresponds to
the table opposite).

.—
RUN STOP MF BF Cause Remedy

* * Restart: CP waiting for SYNCH RON SYNCHRON

Operation: Break status on bus Bus connector?

* * Restart: Error in SYSID;k polling list Newsubmodule connector

!nterrupt list; no list Re-write list

Operation: CP in STOP status

Last slave cycle contained error(s)

* CP in STOP-status (mode selector) or

STOP command from programmer or CPU

* Hardware fault Replace hardware

* Error(s) in network traffic

3-1
 a. ays~em alarwup ana Irourxesnooung -

3.2 Assigning the Module Parameters

The CP 530 must always be assigned the necessary parame-

ters (SYSID function A system identification). A CP 530 ac-
ting as a slave interface module only requires the SYSID para-
meter. If used as a bus master, the polling list and, where app-
licable, the interrupt list are also necessary.

The following parameters must be assigned in the SYSID

area:

● CP 530 as master
– Polling list required
– Interrupt list required where applicable
– No SINEC slave no.

CP 530 as slave
– No polling list permitted
– No interrupt list
– Slave no. on SINEC LI required

● Address in rack of the master PC

– 1-254
This is the internal master PC address under which the
. CP 530 is referenced from the CPU.

. Slave no. on the SINEC LI bus: this number is required

when the corresponding slave PC is interfaced to the
SINEC LI bus via CP 530. The number assigned must be
between 1 and 30.

The polling list contains the sequence in which the slave PCs
connected to the bus are polled from the master and is used
at the same time for checking the number of nodes participa-
ting in the bus: if a referenced node does not reply, the red
“Bus fault (BF)” LED on the frontplate of the master indicates
—. a bus fault.

The user can change the sequence of the bus cycle as a func-
tion of process events by entering an interrupt list. In the event
of an interrupt the normal polling is halted and the interrupt list
is accessed. The slave PC triggering the interrupt is then loca-
ted and serviced. The bus cycle is then resumed at the point of
interruption. This list describes

a) the slave PCs from which interrupts are permitted

b) the sequence in which processing takes place when se-

veral slave PCs simultaneously trigger the group interrupt.

No interrupts are lost. If there are no interrupts, the bus

master operates as prescribed by the polling list.

3-2
I s. ayslem alarl-up ana Iroumesnooung

3.3 COM 530 Diagnostics

The CP 530 and all events on the bus can be observed and
controlled by means of the “COM 530” program package.

The “CP status” programmer function enables the operator

to access important dynamic statuses of the CP 530 and its
error buffer (even in the STOP state).

The following statuses are displayed:

● CP in RUN status
● CP in STOP status
● Programmer has priority over CPU, i. e. the CPU can only
read from the CP but no longer write into it
● Errors/no errors have occurred on the CP.
Errors are indicated by the display of one or more error
numbers.

(For more details, please refer to:

COM 530/675 Operating Instructions
Order No.: GWA 4NEB 8110520-02,
Section 3.10) slave 3
I I

7
Moster
The status of a maximum of two slave mailboxes can be se-
I I
I-311ig
lected from the programmer “TEST” function. In the case
of the PG 615 programmer, only one mailbox can be selec-
ted. The next send/receive mailbox on the CP 530 to be
sent to the relevant slave or the one last received by the slave 2
slave is displayed on the programmer.

In the case of cross communications, e. g. slave 2 sending ❑ m

data to slave 3, the send mailbox assigned to slave 2 is dis-
played, but the message received by slave 3 from slave 2
T
appears in the receive mailbox with the reference “Cross ~—~
communications”.
Fig. 3-1 Status of the receive mailbox 2 and send mailbox?)
The time required for this slave cycle is displayed with the
contents of the receive mailbox.

The operator can force a send mailbox for one slave cycle slave 3
with the aid of the “STATUS” function: the STATUS display
is frozen and all data can be modified. The send mailbox is Moster
E,m
brought into the bus cycle once by selecting a programmer
softkey. By setting a “Programmer priority” identifier, the
operator can disable the CPU-CP 530 bus interface so that
the CPU of the master PC can no longer “get in his way”
when he is forcing a send mailbox for one slave cycle.

Selection of the “Bus test” function causes bus traffic to

be automatically halted at the end of the polling list and the
“Programmer priority” identification bit is set.

The operator is now shown the send mailbox of the first u

slave in the polling list and given the opportunity to make Fig. 3-2 Status of send mailbox 2 and receive mailbox 2 for cross commu.
any modifications. The send mailbox is sent to its destina- nications from 2 — 3
tion via the CP 530 by selecting thel%ZR3%oftkey and the
message returned from there is displayed as a receive mail-
box from the destination slave.
Interrupt messages can be incorporated in the bus test if
required.

The CP 530 keeps statistics on the

● longest and
● shortest bus cycle
and displays these statistics with the last current time
Bus cycle time
when requested by the “BUS CYCLE TIME” function.
Current: . ms
Bus cycle = once round the polling list.
Minimum: . ms
Maximum: . ms

3-3
 3. System Start-up and Troubleshooting _

3.4 Interface Monitoring

As an additional diagnostic aid, the PG 675 programmer can

be looped in between the CP/CPU and bus terminal, thus
enabling the operator to observe the bus at character level
(ASCII) and record the traffic on the bus with the aid of the
“FOX-PG” software package.

P
FOX-PG
o

Bus

5 I o ve
n

\ Interface adapter
for FOX- ?!i

S [ ave S I ave
k m
s OL1 e

Fig. 3-3 Using the PG 675 programmer for observing the SINEC L1 network at message level

Ordering data:
Adapter 6ES5321-OAA11 (ZN Werkstatt Furth)
Diskette 6ES5875-OCA11 (GWK, Diskette for the PG 675 programmer)

3-4
I 4. Appendix

4.1 Interface Pin Assignments

The electrical interfaces of the CP 530 are specified in more

detail in the following subsections. These cover the following:
—
● Backplane connector (xl, x2)
● Usersubmodule (x3)
xl
x3
. Serial port for PG (x4)
● Serial port for SINEC LI (x5)

x4
x5

Fig. 4-1 Interface ports on the block-type module

—------x 1
x3

x4
— x 2

x5
4.1.1 Backplane Connectors Xl and X2

The block-type and compact version modules differ in this

case. The block-type module has only one 48-way backplane
connector of range 2 and the compact version two such con- Fig. 4-2 Interface ports on the compact module
nectors. The diff~rent pin assignments can be seen in the fol-
lowing tables.

Compact version: Block-type module:

d b z d b z d b z

2 +5.2V M +5V 2 (5.2V) M +5V 2 M +5V

4 UBATT xl 4 UBATT xl 4 x2
6 AD12 AD O RESET 6 AD12 AD O RESET 6
8 AD13 AD 1 MEMR 8 AD13 AD 1 MEMR 8
10 AD14 AD 2 MEMW 10 AD14 AD 2 MEMW 10
12 AD15 AD 3 RDY 12 AD15 AD 3 RDY 12
14 IRA AD 4 DB O 14 IRA AD 4 DBO 14
16 AD 5 DB 1 16 AD 5 DB 1 16
18 AD 6 DB2 18 AD 6 DB2 18
20 AD 7 DB 3 20 AD 7 DB3 20
22 AD 8 DB4 22 AD 8 DB4 22 TXD
24 AD 9 DB 5 24 AD 9 DB 5 24
26 AD lO DB6 26 AD lO DB6 26 RXD
28 AD I 1 DB 7 28 AD11 DB7 28
30 +24 V M24V 30 30 —
32 M 32 M 32

4-1
 4. Appendix -

4.1 Interface Pin Assignments

4.1.2 User Submodule X3

c b a
— This interface establishes the connection to the memory sub-
1 AD12 M +5V
modules listed in Section 1.2.4 (48-way connector to DIN
41612, Range C). A large number of test signals also use this 2 AD O AD 1 AD 2
interface. 3 AD 3 AD 4 AD 5 x3
4 AD 6 AD 7 AD 8
5 AD 9 AD lO AD I 1
6 AD13 AD14 RD 1
7 WR2 AD15 TEST1
8 PSEN RDYE LIN1
9 ALE TEST3 ADV
10 DB O DB 1 DB 2
11 DB 3 DB 4 DB 5
12 DB 6 DB 7 KI
13 Cs 1 Cs 3 K 2
14 Cs 2 UBATT K 3
15 TEST2 PSW/BUSY K 4
16 5V RD 1 K 5

—
4.1.3 Serial Interfaces X4 and X5

There are two 15-way socket connectors on the frontplate:

I 1 I MEXT (externalOVreferenceorground) I
● for programmers (PG 675 and PG 615) I 2 I TTYIN- (current output) I
● for the SINEC LI bus terminal
3 + 5.2V
The interface can be operated either in active or passive mode 4 + 24 V
(see Figs. 4-1 and 4-2).
The pin assignment of the two connectors is identical as far as 5 M (internal OV reference)
the signal definition is concerned.
I 6 I TTYOUT+ (current input) I
I 7 I TTYOUT - (current output) I
I 8 I MEXT (externalOVreferenceorground) I

I 9 I TTYIN+ (current input) I

10 OV reference for24 V

11 20 mA current source of sender

12 M (internal OVreferenceOrgrOund)

13 20 mA current source of receiver

I 14 I +5.2V I
I 15 I M (internalOVreferenceOrgrOund) I

4-2
I 4. A p p e n d i x
4.2 Adress Assignment on the S5 Bus
4.3 Constraints

The CP 530 has a different address area on the S5 bus, depen-

ding on the type of addressing: c Pu CP 530

r-–l ~;
Page CPU CP530
4K
addressing
I
1 to 254 61 Kto 62 K 1 Kto 254 K

61 K
62 K =<

Page addressing

4.3 Constraints in Configurations with S5-101 U Slaves

(up to and including the Z 05 operating system)

S5-101 U 6ES5 101 -8U..3 Version 1

. The full data length of 2 x 64 bytes per slave cycle cannot

be used. A maximum of 110 bytes may be exchanged bet-
ween master and slave in one cycle.

E. g.: Master to slave: 64 bytes

Slave back to master: 46 bytes

or: Master to slave: 46 bytes

Slave back to master: 64 bytes

. EEPROM can not be used in the following PC.

S5-101 U 6ES5 101 -8U..3 Versions 1 and 2

● Only a limited data Ienth is possible for slave broad-

casting; a maximum of 25 bytes may be transmitted per
slave cycle.

Before Master to slave

broadcast: Slave backto master 25 bytes

Broadcast: Slave to all 25 bytes

After Master to slave

broadcast: Slave backto master 25 bytes

4-3
 4. Appendix -

4.4 Spare Parts and Accessories

CP530 communications processor 6ES5530-7LAII SINEC LI bus cables

(block-type module) Available from: ZN-Werkstatt Furth (FSZ Furth)
-- Cable lengths in meters (plaintext)
CP530 communications processor 6ES5530-3LAII
(compact version) SIMATIC cable 6ES5707-lAAOO
5x 0.14 mm (26AWG)
2

Bus terminal (1 = 1 m or3.3ft)

for2.5 km (1.5 miles) 6ES5777-OBBO0 Indoortype cable 6ES5707-2AAO0
Bus terminal (1 = 2 m or6.6ft) 2x2x 0.32 mmz (22 AWG)
for2.5 km (1.5 miles) 6ES5777-OBCOO
Bus terminal (1 = 2 m or6.6ft) Buried cable 6ES5707-3AAO0
for4 km (2.5 miles) 6ES5 777-1 BCOO 2x2x 0.32 mmz (22 AWG)

Mounting plate for bus terminal 3TX6501 Lightning protection cable 6ES5707-4AAO0
Fuse for bus terminal TR5 F0,5A 2 x 2 x0.32 mmz (22 AWG) + 16 mm 2

(Wickmann & Co.)

Adapter 6ES5321-OAAII
SINEC LI Manual
German 6ES5998-7LAII
English 6ES5998-7LA21
French 6ES5998-7LA31
Spanish 6ES5998-7LA41
—
Italian 6ES5998-7LA51

COM 530/(CP/M-86)for PG675

German 6ES5875-7UAII
English 6ES5875-7UBII
French 6ES5875-7UCII

COM 530/modul for PG615

German 6ES5815-7UAII
English 6ES5815-7UB11
French 6ES5815-7UC11
—
COM 5301S5-DOS for PG 635
German 6ES5835-6SCII
English 6ES5835-6SC21
French 6ES5835-6SC31
Spanish 6ES5835-6SC41
Italian 6ES5835-6SC51

COM 530/S5-DOSfor PG67516851695

German 6ES5895-6SCII
English 6ES5895-6SC21
French 6ES5895-6SC31
Spanish 6ES5895-6SC41
Italian 6ES5895-6SC51

4-4
I

SIEMENS
SIMATIC S5
SINEC LI Local Area Network
Programming Instructions Order No.: GWA 4 NEB 811 0546-02d

—
Contents Page Page

1 Principle of Operation 1-1 2.3.1 General 2-5

1,1 Construction and Application 1-1 2.3.2 Programming Examples 2-7
1.1.1 Establishing a Connection 1-3 2.3.2.1 Sending to a Slave 2-7
1.1.2 Bus Protocol 1-3 2.3.2.2 Receiving from a Slave 2-8
1.1.3 Send and Receive Mailboxes 1-4 2.3.2.3 Complete Example with the S5-150U as Master
1.1.4 Coordination with the User Program 1-4 and the 135U/AG 115U as Slaves 2-9
1.1.4,1 Connecting the Slave PCsvia the Programmer 2.3.2.4 Sending with Interrupt 2-19
Port 1-5 2.3.2.5 Receiving Interrupt Data 2-19
1.1.4.2 Connecting PCsviathe CP530 1-6 2,3,2.6 Send/Receive “Bus Master” Control Byte 2-20
1.2 Normal Operation in the SINEC L1 Network 1-9 2.3.2.7 Sending and Receiving Lists 2-20
1,2.1 Polling List 1-9 2.4 S5-IOIU as Slave 2-22
1.2.2 Master— Slave Traffic 1-1o 2.4.1 initializing the S5-101 U 2-22
1,2.3 Slave— Slave Traffic 1-11 2.4.2 Program Examples 2-22
1.2.4 Broadcasting 1-12 2.4.2.1 Receiving 2-22
1.3 Interrupting Normal Operation for Express 2.4.2,2 Sending 2-23
Messages 1-13 2.5 S5-115U as Slave 2-24
1.3.1 Interrupt Mechanism in the User Program 1-13 2.5.1 Parameter Assignment Using SYSID 2-24
1.3.2 Interrupt List 1-13 2,5,2 Parameter Assignment from OB22 2-25
1.3.3 Time Conditions in Connection with Interrupts 1-13 2.5.2.1 Using the SINEC LI LAN Bus 2-25
1.4 Programming Functions viathe CP530 1-14 2.5.2.2 Parameter Assignment for the SINEC L1 Slave
1.4.1 Bus Selection Configurations 1-14 Firmware 2-27
1.5 Error Messages CP530—Master CPU 1-21 2.5.3 Programming Examples 2-29
1.5,1 General 1-21 2.6 S5-1OO U as Slave 2-30
1.5.2 SYSTATError List 1-23 2.7 Example of Small Parts Plant 2-32
2 Programming 2-1 3 Atmendix 3-1
2,1 Overview 2-1 3.1 Matrix of the Data Nandling Block Numbers in the
2.2 Initializing the CP530 2-2 Varion PCs 3-1
2.2.1 SYSID (System Identification) 2-2 3.2 Standard FBsfor CPU —CP530Traffic 3-2
2.2.2 Polling List 2-3 3.3 User Manipulation of the Condition Codeword 3-6
2.2.3 Interrupt List 2-4 3,4 Length Word 3-7
2.3 Initializing and Programming the S5-CPU with 3.5 PAFE: Condition Code for ParameterAssignment Error 3-7
the CP 530 as Master or slave 2-5

—
I
1. Principle of Operation

1.1 Construction and Application

S5 1 15U

r
SINEC LI is a local area network that enables SIMATIC S5
programmable controllers of the U range to communicate Master PC
with each other (Fig. 1 -1). It operates on the master-slave
principle. Ps CPU CP
A single programmable controller 530
-the Master PC -
coordinates and monitors the entire data traffic in the SINEC T
I
LI network, as well as the routing through and monitoring of .
programming functions via the bus (Section 1.4). The other I
programmable controllers participating in the network are I
automatically BT 777 bus terminal
- the Slave PCs -. S5 101U
The master PC must have a CP 530 communications processor, Slave PC
which assumes the master function and controls the entire
flow of information.

There are two ways of sending data packets in the SINEC LI

network:
O From any SINEC L1 node to another;
O From any SINEC LI node simultaneously to all other nodes S5 1 15U
connected (broadcasting). Slave PC
The data contained in the data packet may be the status of CPU
inputs, outputs (coils) and flags (internal relays) or the con- SINEC L1
tents of data words.
bus
Connection to the LAN bus:
O Master PC (S5-115U, S5-135U, S5-150U):
via the CP 530 communications processor;
‘[
L
O S5-115U as slave:
1
either via the programmer port of the PC or via the CP 530
communications processor;
O S5-135U and S5-150U as slave:
via the CP 530 communications processor; CP
O S5-101 U as slave: 530
via the programmer port of the PC.
O S5-IOOU (from 102 CPU onwards) as slave via the program-
mer port of the PC.
The BT777 bus terminal forms the connecting link between the
programmable controller and the bus. This is the point at
which the signal level is converted to that required for opera-
tion of the SINEC L1 network.
Slave PC
CP
530

S043e
I
Fig. 1-1 A typical SINEC L1 configuration

1-1
 1. Principle of Operation

1.1 Construction and Application

The CP 530 of the master is not allocated an explicit node number, but the logical number “O” or the number “32” as destination
address for sending from the slave to the master.

All slaves must have a slave number through which they can be referenced.
This number must lie between 1 and 30. The slave number cannot be assigned more than once in the network. Slave numbers
allocated more than once or outside the permissible range of 1 to 30 result in network errors.

In the case of a slave with CP 530, the slave number is entered with the COM 530 program package via a programmer and stored
on a memory submodule of the relevant CP 530 (cf. Section 2.2.1).

In the case of slaves without CP 530, the slave number is defined in a function block via the relevant CPU (for S5-101 U cf. Section
2.4.1 and for S5-115U Section 2.5.2.2).

The network can be compared to a post office that receives parcels and distributes them further to the various households. The CP
530 master is the post office, which is supplied with large numbers of parcels for the various households by a mail van (the
master CPU), which, in turn collects parcels that have been delivered from the households to the post office.

.—

Master PC

I I
I i

Fig. 1-2 Comparison between SINEC L1 and a post office model

1-2
1. Principle of Operation

1.1 Construction and Application

1.1.1 Establishing a Connection

In order to exchange data between a master and a slave in the SINEC Ll”network, a connection first has to be established in order
to ensure that the data arrives at the correct partner.

The establishment of a SINEC L1 connection is always introduced by a “Break” (zero signal), which simultaneously clears an ex-
isting connection. After “Break”, the master sends the number of the desired slave PC and expects an acknowledgement with its
own slave number as a reply from the referenced slave.

This connection is thus now established and has exclusive use of the bus. If the slave sends data back to the master, the latter also
acknowledges.
A new connection can only be established again after a “Break” signal.

The driver of the mail van ensures that the parcels are delivered correctly by only delivering them if the recipient is at home.

1.1.2 Bus Protocol

The bus protocol controls the interchange of data in the net-

work. In addition to the purely useful information or data,
User Bus
there is also control and error checking information on the bus
which does not affect the user directly but which can be
evaluated by him and, in certain cases, depending on system-
specific conditions, must be evaluated. Further details are
described where applicable in the following sections.
(See examples in the Appendix)
& & E
The STEP 5 user program communicates with SINEC LI
through coordination bytes and, where data traffic takes
place via the CP 530 as master or slave, also uses data
handling blocks.

The send mailbox may contain:

O the “length” = quantity of data
O the “source”= sender
O up to 64 bytes of data.

The receive mailbox may contain:

O the “length”= quantity of data
O the “source”= sender
O up to 64 bytes of data.
—

P!a. .,.:.:::::::Q:::5’
(Flag
......... . :
byte) ~ :: Protocol f r a m e w o r k !;
.............................. .
::
: :
Status byte :;
: : ::
:
: ; Length ::
Length ::
: i Block check :;
De$t)nalton : characler 1 ::
. ;
So”rce ::
: ; ::
; : ::
. ::
. : :.
Dala ::
::
: : ::
Data ::
: ;
::
: : ::
1: : :E y ::
::
FIag, .rda,e : : ::
: ; Block check :;
: { character2 ;:
5056, : : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 1-3 Bus protocol – Data representation in the SINEC L1 system

1-3
 -
1. Principle of Operation

1.1 Construction and Application

In the post office analogy, the bus protocol corresponds to

s 057
— the packing and Iabelling of the parcel. The packing of the
data and addressing of the parcel is the responsibility of the
customer, i. e. the households, whereas the post office pro- SBR/SBS*
vides the box, the actual labels and the tying string.

Fig. 1-4 Bus protocol in the post office model

1.1.3 Send and Receive Mailboxes

When assigning the initial parameters to a programmable con-

troller that is to be connected to SINEC L1 via the program- Send mailbox Receive mailbox
mer port, the user defines a receive mailbox and a send mail-
box for data exchange via the bus, using the SYSID function. Length Length
The starting addresses of these mailboxes are defined either
by specifying a data block number and a data word number or Destination Source
a flag byte number (see Section 2). In addition to the net or
useful data, both mailboxes contain a length specification of
the destination in the case of the send mailbox or of the
source in the case of the receive mailbox.
. The length of the data should be specified in bytes; the desti-
nation/source is a slave number on the bus. When connecting
a programmable controller to the SINEC LI network via the
CP 530 communications processor, this is defined when
Imax. 64 max. 64
initializing the data handling blocks (see Appendix). bytes
bytes
All data that can be accessed with the STEP 5 operations
available to the CPU, e. g. flags, data, inputs/outputs (byte or
word), timers and counters etc., can be entered in the data
field of the send mailbox. The data can also be fetched from
the receive mailbox in byte or word mode and transferred to
data/fiag or input/output areas or, for instance, interpreted as
times/counts.
Fig. 1-5 Send snd receive mailboxes

1.1.4 Coordination with the User Program

Coordination of bus traffic with the user programs of the master and slave PCs differs depending on whether the PC participates
in bus traffic direct via the programmer port or via a CP.
PCs that are connected direct use coordination bytes exclusively, while PCs connected via the CP 530 employ data handling
blocks.

1-4
I
1. Principle of Operation

1.1 Construction and Application

S 046e
1.1.4.1 Connecting the Slave PCs via the Programmer Port 81t 7 B,t O

The coordination bytes provide the user program with a CBR c—————— ERROR Recewe er?or in last
powerful tool for interchanging data via the bus and partici- transfer with master
pating in the bus control. SLAVEFAlL Atleast one slave onthe
The coordination bytes are defined as a flag byte or left-hand bus has fatted
data byte when initializing an S5-CPU participating direct in 8US RUN BUS is In RuN state
bus traffic: “Receive” coordination byte = CBR, “Send” reserved
coordination byte = CBS.
INTERRuPT Th,s message comes w!th
Interrupt
RECV-PRM Operating system may accept data from
BUS In the rece!ve maolbox

Bft from master PC

❑ ‘itfr0mthesend,”gnr3de

B!? 7 BIt O

CBS

1 I I

L-
I__&
tienderrof!nlas~
transfer w!th master
reserved

INTERRUPT Slave requests bus ,nterr”pt

SE?dD-PRM User releases send rna,lbox for

sending data to the bus

❑ B forrecelver
it

Fig. 1-6 Coordination bytes/PC aa alave

Data Exchange

o After the send mailbox has been filled with the data to be sent, the “Permission to send” coordination bit (CBS, 7) is set via the
user program and invokes the operating system to send the data. The operating system does not reset this bit until it has sent
the data and received the appropriate acknowledgement, and new data can then be sent.

0 The user program invokes the operating system to receive data from the bus and enter it in the receive mailbox by setting the
“Permission ~o receive” coordination b~t (CBR, 7). When the data has arrived, the operating system resets the “Permissi~n to --
receive” bit and the user program can accept the data.

When sending and receiving data, the error bit “O” can be evaluated in order to decide whether, for instance, a transmitted message
containing errors is to be repeated.

The sending of data via the CP 530 as master or slave is analogous: A data or flag area in the PC is defined as the send mailbox by
initializing the SEND block and transferred to the CP 530. The data packet that has been received is transferred to the PC by the
RECEIVE call and the packet specified in the initialization parameters written into the data or flag area. The “Condition code word”
of the data handling blocks also has coordination bits; these are described in the Appendix.

1-5
 m
1. Principle of Operation

1.1 Construction and Application

Bus Control

The user programs of all slaves can trace and influence the sequences on the bus via coordination flags. When the “Permission to
receive” bit (CBR, 7) is reset (i. e.: = data arrived), the operating system copies a number of bits from the bus status byte into the
SBR; these bits can be evaluated by the user program:

o Interrupt (CBR, 4)
The data just received is express data (see Section 1.3)

O (CBR, 3) is reserved

o BUS RUN (CBR, 2)

SINEC LI is in the RUN mode and will also remain in this mode after data exchange

o SLAVE FAIL (CBR, 1)

At least one slave on the bus has failed.

In addition, the operating system of the slave sets the “Error” bit (CBR, O) to indicate whether the last data transfer took place
without error.

The coordination information of the bits in CBR 1/2/3/4 is also transferred from the bus to the user program of the PC via the
RECEIVE data handling block; bits 6 and 7 are sent in addition to the user program of a master PC (CP 530 = master): the sender is
in the STOP or RUN mode.

When the “Permission to send” bit (SBS, 7) has been set, the user program can also send bit messages to the bus master or to the
receiver:

o Interrupt (CBS, 4)
This data is to reach the receiver as express data (see Section 1.3)

O (CBS, 3) is reserved

O Error (CBS, O)
—
During the last data transmission, an error has occurred from the point of view of this slave

The coordination information of bit CBS 4 is also transmitted from the user program to the bus via the SEND data handling block;
in addition, bits 6 and 7 are sent to the bus controller from the user program of a master PC (CP 530 as master): the addressee is to
enter the STOP or RUN mode.
RUN and STOP are only possible with slave PCs connected direct via the PG (programmer) interface.

1.1.4.2 Connecting PCs via the CP 530

Send mailbox
When using the CP 530, the transfer of data is achieved by the 1
SEND and RECEIVE data handling blocks. SBS Not used ~ Header*
The user can program the status byte for sending ( S6S) in the
first byte of the send mailbox and the coordination informa- Data byte 1 Data byte 2
II
tion for receiving in the first byte of the receive mailbox.

r
~} D a t a
The user specifies the number of bytes to be sent (from the
send mailbox) with the parameter QLAE from the SEND data Data byte61 D a t a byte62
handling block. Data byte63 Data byte64
The value of QLAE is obtained as follows:
QLAE = length + 2 bytes header
where length = the number of bytes of net data. Receive mailbox

The user defines the number of bytes of data received by the I SBR Length
parameter ZLAE in the RECEIVE data handling block. ~1 Header
Source Not used ~J
The value of ZLAE is as follows:
ZLAE = length + 4 bytes header Data byte 1 Data byte 2
where length = the number of bytes of net data.
Data
.— ‘Caution: The header of the send request must always be re-
set (OOOOH). Exception: Direct slaves communicating via the Data byte 61 Data byte 62
CPU should be switched to STOP or RUN (cf. description of
SBS). Data byte 63 Data byte 64

1-6
1. Principle of Operation

1.1 Construction and Application

Coordination information:
.
PC with CP 530 as master Bit 7 Bit O

The “Permission to receive and send” and “Receive error” SBR

flag bits are not used.
wrved
Their function is replaced by information in the data handling
blocks and can be evaluated by the CONTROL block (see Ap- IL BUS-RUN Bus is in RUN state

pendix). reserved

INTERRUPT This message comes with an interrupt

The master PC can use bit 7 of the S6S to put the addressed
slave to the STOP mode and bit 6 for putting it into the RUN reserved
mode.
PC RUN Slave PC is in RUN state*
Bit 7 in the SBR, which the master PC receives from the slave, PC STOP Slave PC is in the STOP state*
indicates whether the slave is in the STOP mode and bit 6
specifies whether it is in the RUN mode.

This RUN/STOP setting and acknowledgement is only

❑ Bit from master PC

possible in the case of slaves connected direct via the pro-

grammer interface.

Caution:
Even if only the S6S (status byte, send) is sent, at least two by- Bit 7 Bit O
tes must be transferred to the CP 530 by the send request
(data handling blocks) (e.g. to switch directly connected
SBS I I I
CPUS to the STOP mode). These are the SBR (status byte, reserved
receive) and a meaningless slack byte (see table on p. 1 -6).
reserved

reserved

reserved

1111 INTERRUPT Slave requests but interrupt

L
PC STOP
Slave PC is to enter the RUN state*

Slave PC is to enter the STOP state*

❑ Bit for master PC

❑ Bit for receiver

● Effective only with slave PCs connected direct via the

programmer interface

Fig. 1-7 Statua bytea j CP 530 aa mastar

1-7
 m
1. Principle of Operation

1.1 Construction and Application

Coordination information:

Pc with CP 530 as slave

81t 7 Blt O
The “Permission to receive and send” and “Receive error”
flag bits are not used.
‘BR~
Their function is replaced by information from the data hand- SLAV’ E$AIL A slave on the bus
ling blocks and may be evaluated by the CONTROL block has fal led
(see Appendix).

Led
BUS-RLJN B u s IS n R U N state

INTERRUPT This message comes with

an Interrupt

Blt from master PC

❑ Bit from sending mode

Blt 7 B1t o

“ ST
II
INTERRUPT Slave
Reserved

requests BUS
Interrupt

❑ Blt for rece(ver

Fig, 1-8 Status bytes/ CP 530 as slave

1-8
I
1. Principle of Operation

1.2 Normal Operation in the SINEC LI Network

1.2.1 Polling List

-
The bus master (CP 530) requires a polling list for operating the SINEC LI network. This list contains the numbers of all slave PCs
participating in the bus traffic and enables the master to detect and indicate failures (e. g.: via “BUS FAILURE” LED on the frontplate
and network-wide by the setting of the “Slave failed” bit in the receive coordination byte (CBR, 1).

The user defines the bus cycle by specifying the number and sequence of the slaves in the list, i. e. the order in which the slaves are
referenced by the master. The polling list contains a maximum of 64 slave numbers, which need not all be reserved; the bus cycle
terminates with the last slave number entered and begins again from the beginning.

Priorities can be assigned by specifying a slave number more

than once (slave 3 in the example). Normal case without priorities:
1 64
1 2 3 4 free

Priority for slave 3

1 6 64
1 3 2 3 4 3 free

At the post office, there is a timetable tellingthe driver of the van the Order in Which the households are to be visited during a shift. –
Normally, all are visited once; however, it may also happen, for example, that a small business concern (with the slave number “3”)
has to receive a better service.

1-9
 1. Principle of Operation

1.2 Normal Operation in the SINEC L1 Network

1.2.2 Master —— Slave Traffic

.—
A slave cycle on the SINEC L1 network consists of the process-

-1
ing of one entry in the polling list; i. e. establishing a connec- Master Slave
tion with this slave and exchanging status information and
data. Since SINEC LI operates cyclically and completely
asynchronously with the user program of the master and slave
PCs, it may happen under certain circumstances that there is
no data on the bus. On the other hand, data packets can also
be sent in response to an input status (i. e. process-con-
trolled). In this case, only the status bytes are sent. Data
o 1 No data
BUS state
*
traffic takes place between the slave and master if the user Slave state
program enters bus address “O” (direct) or “32” (request +
number for SEND block) as the data destination (bus master).

o 2 Only master has data for slave

BUS state

I Data
>
Slave state
< With acknowledgement

o3 Only slave has data for master

BUS state

Slave state
4

Data I

acknowledgement
*

o4 Both have data

BUS state
*

I Data
>

At the post office, these combinations have the following

+ Slave state
meaning: With acknowledgement

Q) The mail van runs to and from the post office without par-
cels.
@ The van brings a parcel to the recipient, but does not take
a parcel back to the post office. acknowledgement
@ The van sets off for the receiver without parcels and brings *
a full parcel back to the post office.
@ The van delivers a parcel to the recipient and takes one Fig. 1-9 Schematic of master — slave traffic
back with it to the post office.

1-1o
1. Principle of Operation

1.2 Normal Operation in the SINEC LI Network

1.2.3 Slave — Slave Traffic

If the user program of the slave PC enters a destination num-

Elm
ber between 1 and 30 in the send mailbox, the bus auto-
matically carries out slave-to-slave data traffic when the num- Master
ber in the polling list arrives at this slave in the course of the
bus cycle. Slave-to-slave traffic is carried out without direct
participation of the master.
(Polling list) (Destination of
The latter only performs monitoring functions.
i nterslave
traffic)

n 5 Master has no data for slave 1 but slave 1 has

-
data for slave 2

1 1 !
I I
I
1 BUS state I 1
1 * ! 1
1 I 1
I + I
Slave state I I
I
t I I
I I t
1 I I
t I I
t 1 1
t 1 1
I
1
1
1
- 1
I
I I I
1 1 acknowledgement 1
I I I
I 1 1
1 1 I
1 1 t
I 1

0
1

6 Master has data for slave 1 and slave 1 data

for slave 2
! 1 I
I BUS state 1 I
1 > 1 !
I I t
1 1
1 1
1 1
I I
I I
I I
I I
1 1
WI acknowledgement I 1
I I
I I
1
1 I
t 1
I 1
I I
I I
1 1 I
I t acknowledgement I
+ I
1 1
1 I 1

Fig. 1-10 Schematic of slave-slave traffic

1-11
 m
1. Principle of Operation

1.2 Normal Operation in the SINEC LI Network

Using the post office analogy:

— The mail van heads for household 1, which is the next customer in the round.
@ Household 1 wishes to send a parcel direct to household 2. The van takes care of this immediately.
@ Inthiscase, thevandeliversa parcel to household 1 before being requested, asin@, todelivera parcel directly tohousehold2.

+ d
R

LLJ E@
4
1- 1
2153 2
3 3m
4 4

.— S 049e

I 1
Fig. 1-11 Slave-to-slave traffic in the post office model

1.2.4 Broadcasting

Each bus participant (master or slave PC) can send a message “to all” (broadcast) by using slave no. 31. In the case of the
master, this message either consists only of the status byte (including STOP/RUN request to the PC) or of a status byte and
data.
The slave can only broadcast if there is data to broadcast. Broadcasts are not acknowledged.

In the post office analogy, this is the equivalent of the post office or individual customers sending a circular to all other house-
holds including the post office.

1-12
1. Principle of Operation

1.3 Interrupting Normal Operation for Express Messages

1.3.1 Interrupt Mechanism in the User Program

During normal cyclic operation on the SINEC LI network, situations can arise where the user programs wish to send data immedi-
ately. ~his entails interrupting normal operation, i. e. an interrupt mechanism.
This is done with the “Interrupt” coordination bit (Section 1.1.4.4): In the event of an interrupt, the S5 program fills a send mailbox
with data and sets interrupt bit CBS, 4 and the “Permission to send” bit. From this moment onwards, the operating system keeps
trying to log this express message on with the bus master and thus send the message. As soon as the master recognizes this bid
for the bus, it grants the slave requesting the interrupt an interrupt cycle and then resumes the interrupted bus cycle. The “Interrupt”
information is sent along with the interrupt message and transmitted to the receiver as additional information in coordination byte
CBR, 4. When an interrupt message reaches a CP 530 communications processor (master or slave), the CP 530 initiates a group
interrupt on the internal PC interrupt line INTA and this interrupt can be handled in the interrupt organization block OB2 (S5-115/135
PCS),

1.3.2 Interrupt List

Should several interrupt requests be made simultaneously, the user specifies the order in which the interrupts are to be serviced by
the bus master in an interrupt list on the CP 530. Only slaves whose numbers are in the interrupt list are allowed to place interrupt
messages on the bus. The interrupt list contains up to 30 slave numbers and each slave may only be entered once.
Example:
Polling list: 1,2,3,4
Interrupt list:3, 1
Explanation: Slaves 1 to 4 are connected to the bus. If an interrupt request occurs, it can only be accepted if it comes from slave
1 or 3. Slave 3 has priority over slave 1.
Caution:
If data from the bus master and interrupt data of the slave total more than 100 bytes, the interrupt list should contain only 16 entries.
In the post office analogy, an alarm bell rings; the van driver calls the customers who are in his alarm list one after the other and goes
to the customer wishing to send the express message.

Slave 5 050e
1.3.3Time Conditions in Connection with Interrupts addressing
1 2 3 4
Interrupts are requested by the slave operating system during I I I *
the addressing phase, i.e. interrupts are possible at each
I + + +
transition from the current slave to the next slave in the polling
list, but not during ongoing slave data traffic.
(Fig. 1-12) 0000 I *
I
o 400 ms Tme

Fig. 1-12 Possible interrupt points: o

Slave
addressl ng
Interrupt cycles are executed immediately they are recognized
I 2 2 3 4
by the master and displace the bus cycle by the time required Int 3
for the interrupt cycle. ,0, I I *
(Fig. 1-13).
I + +

00000
0 500 ms Time

Fig. 1-13 Interrupt cycle with slave 3

Slave
addressing

If a number of interrupt requests are made simultaneously, ‘ 21H; ;H; ;

an interrupt cycle is inserted (in the order specified by the *
interrupt list) and the bus cycle is extended accordingly. After
dealing with the next slave in the polling list, the next interrupt
cycle is inserted and the bus cycle once more extended
accordingly (Fig. 1 -14) i.e. when several interrupts are
000000
requested simultaneously, the slaves in the polling list and I I *
interrupt list are processed alternately, keeping to the order in I
which they appear in the two lists. o 600 ms Time

Fig. 1-14 Multiple interrupt requests at the same time

1-13
 m
1. Principle of Operation

1.4 Programming Functions via the CP 530

It is not only possible to exchange data with other nodes on the SINEC L1 LAN, but also to download programming functions in the
other nodes.
.
Fig. 1 -15a gives a concise overview of the various configurations– ranging from the source programmer or PG/536 to the end node.
These configurations can only be implemented with S5-DOS pro.grammers. The PG 615 programmer is capable of handling the PG
- CP 530- END configuration only.

Conditions:

When implementing programmer functions, the CP 530 master on which they are to be executed must be in the STOP mode.

Addressing:

a) CP 530 master without polling list (gateway); only programmer functions can be downloaded.

b) CP 53o master with polling list (L1 bus master); In the RUN mode, normal LI data traffic is carried out; In the STOP mode, pro:
grammer functions can be-implemented.

Constraints regarding the S5-135U and S5-150U:

—
Programmer functions are only possible in conjunction with an MUX; LI data traffic is only possible with the CP 530 as slave.

1.4.1 Bus Selection Configurations

SINECH1
I I

I
nPG/536

‘Ux +
m
535

n
.ux4)~ .ux4)~1)Mux4z’1)Mux4)+
-. END

“NECL’62):n3=3): ’33) “’ c’ JND”) END

2)

n
END
2)

1) This CP 530 need not have a polling list (GATEWAY); the CP 530 is always in the STOP mode.
2) In the case of the S5-150 U and S5-135 U (single-processor mode), an MUX must be connected.
3) With this CP 530 master, the programmer bus address must be defined in line 7 of the SYSID.
4) MUX possible, but not mandatory.
Fig. l-15a Configurations for implementing programming functions on the CP 530

Caution: All nodes connected to the programmer bus must have programmer bus capability.

1-14
I
1. Principle of Operation

1.4 Programming Functions via the CP 530

CONFIGURATION No. 1 Programmer and Data Bus via One Bus Cable

MASTER a) SLAVE 1 SLAVE 2

J- L
r CP
530
:Pu

@
b)
CP
530
CPU

@
b)
CP
530

L_--: -
PG

L1 L1 L1

PG685 ~ —

.
—
1!“ L
Fig. 1 -15b Programmer/data bus via one bus cable

a) Master programmed with polling list

b) CPUS (e.g. 941/942) programmed as PROGR. BUS SLAVES, e. g. @ / @ /@ (see Programming Example for programming of the
CPUS as PROGR. BUS SLAVES).

Function: In normal LAN operation (L1 data bus), only slaves 1 and 2 are serviced by the MASTER. In programmer bus operation
(master CP at STOP), programmer functions can be implemented on CPUS (SLAVES 3 to 5) after making the necessary
bus selection in the menue.

1-15
 -
1. Principle of Operation

1.4 Programming Functions via the CP 530

CONFIGURATION No. 2 Programmer and Data Bus via Two Separate Bus Cables
—.
MASTER

PG-BUS-MASTER ~) SLAVE 1 SLAVE 2

CPU CP
11 CP CPU CP
1
CPU CP
1
b) 530 530 b) 530 b) 530
@ @ @
‘PG

L1 L1 L1 L1

PG 685 ~ —

LI Data Bus

r1
~ ~ ~ -
Fig. 1 -15c Programmer/Data bus via two separate bus cables

a) CP 530 as PROGR. BUS MASTER

—
The CP 530 is always in the STOP mode and does not require a polling list or SYNCH RON CALL if AUTO COLD RESTART “Y” is
specified in the SYSID. In this case, the CP also does not require a page frame number (SSNR).

Caution: When programming the CP with the ON-LINE function (RAM/EEPROM), the CP must perform a defined start before
carrying out any programmer functions. This is done either by putting the mode selector “- RUN - STOP” or
automatically on each power recovery.

b) CPUS (e.g. 941/942) programmed as PROGR. BUS SLAVES, e.g.@)/@/@ (see Programming Example for programming the
CPUS as PROGR. BUS SLAVES).

1-16
I
1. Principle of Operation

1.4 Programming Functions via the CP 530

CONFIGURATION No. 3 Programmer and Data Bus via Two Separate Cables with the 943 CPU

MASTER

I
CPU as data and
PG-BUS-MASTER a) progr. bus Slave 1(2)

1 i
CPU CP CP CPU CPU
943 530 530 943 943
941 b) b)
942 _PG
b) Ss Ss
51 L1 L1 2 1 2 1

PG 685

L1 Data Bus

HI

u u u
1
Fig. l-15d Programmer/Data bus via two separate bus cables with the 943 CPU

a) CP 530 as PROGR. BUS MASTER

The CP 530 is always in the STOP mode, and does not require a polling list or SYNCHRON CALL if AUTO COLD RESTART “Y”
is specified in the SYSID. In this case, the CP also does not require a page frame number (SSNR).

Caution:When programming the CP with the ON-LINE function (RAM/EEPROM), the CP must perform a defined start before
carrying out any programmer functions. This is done either by putting the mode selector “- RUN - STOP” or
automatically on each power recovery.

b) The 943 CPU is assigned a SINEC LI DATA SLAVE address and programmer bus address with the aid of the “L1-PG/DA” FB (see
Programming Example).

Advantage: During normal data bus operation, programmer functions can be implemented on the CPU after making the
necessary bus selection in the menue. —

1-17
 -
1. Principle of Operation

1.4 Programming Functions via the CP 530

CONFIGURATION No. 4 Programmer and Data Bus with the S5-150U and S5-135U.

Master CP 530 SLAVE 1 SLAVE 2

I Gateway
I Gateway
I Gateway

— — -i- L 1+ -L
T
150U 5 EP P K R R CP CP R CP
1
CPU
1
530 30 o Proz Proz. 530 530 Proz 530
0

J-Ii11
PG R PG

L1 L1 L1

—
~“,:+
,-II
tt -t L “ _ “ I
I . . . .
Ivlu,x
lti”v’~tiu’’’’uc’’u’!l –
PG685~
I

u u
x I
1~
I
L1 Data Bus I ‘L

Fig. l-15e Programmer/Data bus with S5-150 U and S5-135 U.

The S5-150 U and S5-135 U programmable controllers can only be connected to the LI Progr. Bus via a CP 530 in conjunction with
an MUX (single-processor mode).

Since the CP 530 used fulfills the functions of a gateway, make sure that the bus cable is plugged into the programmer connector
of the CP 530.

1-18
I
1. Principle of Operation

1.4 Programming Functions via the CP 530

Example for Programming the CP 530 as a Gateway

—
SYSID CP530
00 SUBMODULE IDENTIFIER:
01 MODULE IDENTIFIER: CP530
02 FIRMWARE VERSION IDENTIFIER: V2.O
03 PLANT DESIGNATION CODE: EXAMPLE 530 GATEWAY
04 USER SOFTWARE GENERATION DATE: Xx.xx.xx
07 SLAVE NUMBER ON PROGR. BUS/SINEC L1 : IMASTER
12 PAGE FRAME NUMBER (SSNR)
13 AUTO, COLD RESTART: Y(YES = Y, NO = N)
BAUD RATE:

Programming Example

Programming an S5-I15U CPU to be connected to the SINEC L1 local area network as a programmer bus node only

FBI

Segment 1
Name : PG-ADR
ID : PGAD I / Q / D / B I T / C : D KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KC/KG: K Y

:L RS 57 Load SD 57

: LW =PGAD OR SD 57 and programmer

:Ow bus address and write back
:TRS 57 into SD 57
:BE

OB21 IOB22 Call FBs to specify progr. bus address in the initial start OBS

IU FB1
NAME : PG-ADR
PGAD : KY 1,0 Progr. bus address= 1

1-19
 1. Principle of Operation

1.4 Programming Functions via the CP 530

Examole for FB 255: S~ecifvinq Programmer bus and data slave addresses for S5-115 U CPUS on which data and
. programmer functions are to-be~osskle (called in OBS 21/22).

FB255 SPRM-A Meaning of the FB 255 parameters:

Segment 1
NAME : L1-PG/DA PGDA: Programmer bus address/data slave address
ID : PGDA l/Q/DIBIT/C : D KMIKHIKYIKSIKFIKTIKCIKG : KY KY a, b
ID : TCBR l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KM/KH/KY/KS/KFIKT/KCIKG : KS a) Programmer bus address
ID : NCBR l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KC/KG : KY b) Data slave number
ID : TCBS l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KM/KH/KY/KS/KFIKT/KC/KG : KS TCBR/TCBS: Type of coordination byte RECEIVE/SEND
ID : NCBS l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KM/KH/KY/KS/KFIKT/KC/KG : KY KS 4 possible identifier
ID : TSM l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KM/KH/KY/KS/KFIKT/KCIKG : KS FY A flag byte
ID : NSM l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KM/KHIKY/KSIKF/KT/KC/KG : KY DW A left-hand data byte
ID : TRM l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KM/KH/KY/KSIKF/KT/KC/KG : KS NCBR/NCBS: Number or address of coordination byte
ID : NRM l/QID/B/T/C : D KMIKHIKYIKSIKFIKTIKCIKG : KY RECEIVE/ SEND
0044: LW = PGDA LI PROGR. BUS/ LI KYa, b
DATA BUS SLAVE NR. a) For type FY Q number of flag byte
: T FW200 For type DW Q number of data block
UMW= FW b) For type FYA “O”
0040 : LW = PGDA L1 -PROGR. BUS/Ll -DATA BUS-SLAVE-NO. For type DW4 number of data word (left-
0042 :T FW200 hand data byte)
0044 TSM/TRM: Type of SEND/RECEIVE mailbox
0046 KS: FY Q flag byte and
0048 : L W =TCBR Type of coordination byte “R” DB 4 data byte
O04A :T FW202 (Receive) are possible
O04C NSM/NRM: Number of SEND/RECEIVE mailbox
O04E : L W =NCBR Address of CBR KYa, b
0050 :T FW203 DB or FB number/DW number a) Type FYs number of flag byte at which the
0052 Send/Receive mailbox begins.
0054 : LW =TCBS Type of coordination byte “S” Type DB Q number of data block
0056 :T FW205 (Send) b)Type FY A “O”
0058 Type DB Q number of data word at which the
O05A : LW =NCBS Address of CBS Send/Receive mailbox begins.
O05C :T FW206 DB or FB number/DWnumber
O05E
0060 : LW =TSM Type of send mailbox
0062 :T FW208
0064 : LW =NSM Address of send mailbox
0066 :T FW209
0068 : L W =TRM Type of receive mailbox
O06A :T FW211
O06C LW =NRM Address of receive mailbox
O06E ;T FW212
0070
0072 :L KHEED5 Transfer from F area into SD (system
0076 :L KHEA7F data area)
O07A :TNB 14
O07C
O07E :L KHOOOO Erase working flag words
0082 :T FW200
0084 :T FW202
0086 :T FW204
0088 :T FW206
O08A :T FW208
O08C :T FW210
O08E :T FW212
0090
0092 : BE

1-20
1. Principle of Operation

1.5 Error Messages CP 530— Master CPU

1.5.1 General
By using the RECEIVE 200 data handling block to read the
SYSAT area, errors detected by the operating system of the m-
CP 530 can be passed to the S5 user program.

d SINEC Ll

a 1-----1
E Nr nn
E Nr nn
E Nr nn

d-l

) PG
—

A RECEIVE 221 maybe used at anytime to read the full SYSTAT

area, or the RECEIVE 200 may be used to read only that error
area which has a maximum of three error numbers. Each error
0
7 6 5
Qnn’ul
——
——
4 3 2 1

RUN STOP
0

message has two bytes – the error number and the supple- MOOE MODE
mentary error code; both are binary values.
If an error occurs, a call to RECEIVE 200 will cause the “Hand-
1
shake meaningful” bit to be set.
After reacting to the new error, a call to RESET 200 may be
used to cancel the error (or errors) in the SYSTAT area. 2 READY BYTE

The RECEIVE 221 can be called at any time and the “Hand-
shake meaningful” bit is always set. PG
3 PRIO

4 unassigned

5 Error No. 1

6 Suppl. error code (1)

7 Error No. 2

8 Suppl. error code (2)

9 Error No. 3

10 Suppl. error code (3)

Fig. 1-16 Layout of the SYSTAT area

1-21
I m
1. Principle of Operation

1.5 Error Messages CP 530— PC

The error numbers may be broadly grouped in four classes, and most are accompanied by a supplementary error code to further
define the problem (see the table “Error List”).
.
a) Description of a group error number in more detail, e. g. the result of the self-test produces class 1 errors and these can only be
eliminated b exchanging or repairing the module.
Example: 10,7
b: Hardware error 7

b) Description relating to a request number containing an error.

Example: m : Request 177 not defined

c) Description@ slave with which the problem occurred.

Example: m : Slave 3 not in polling list.

1. Error Classes:

Division into error classes:

— Error types can be represented in compressed form.
— The class provides the user with information on how to eliminate the error.

In addition to the errors described below, there are also a number of non-recoverable errors, which cannot be reported via SYSTAT
— since those parts of the system necessary to report the error, for instance, are faulted or missing.

Error Class

Class Error No. General Operator Level of

Description reaction service

1 10-29 Possible hardware Check HW 1. Operatol

fault Replace HW 2. Service
Repair HW
2 30-49 Operational errors Check Operator
— Replace
switch program
submodule
3 50-69 Parameter assign- Diagnostics by Program-
ment/programming PG necessary mer
error S5-SWchanges Syst.
start-up
engineer

4 70-90 Status messages Record Operator

.- 1 2 3
Byte O
., I 1 1 (
RECEIVE 201 can be used to obtain a read-out ot all slaves
that are recorded in the polling list but have not responded to
the last call of the CP 530 master (“Slave failed”).
This list is updated on every cycle as follows:
— “1” for slave has failed
– “O” for slave is OK
The data transmitted is four bytes long.
RECEIVE 201 is possible on the master CP only.
k
Slave 1 Slave7

List: Failed slaves

L1 Slave 16.. Slave 30

1-22
I
1. Principle of Operation

1.5 Error Messages CP 530— CP

1.5.2 SYSTAT Error List

Class Error Description

No. Suppl.
Decimal

I 10 Error 10: Hardware Error No. XX

11 i; Error 11: Internal error message No. XX

II 30 0 Error 30: Waiting for SYNCH RON

31 0 Error 31: Wrong CP module
32 0 Error 32: PG priority active
33 0 Error 33: PC is in Stop: noslavesend is possible
34 0 Error 34: CPis not in the STOP mode.
35 0 Error 35: CP RUN not possible: switch is set to STOP

Ill 50 0 Error 50: SYSID error

51 0 Error 51: Polling list error
52 0 Error 52: Interrupt list error
—
53 xxx Error 53: Request XXX not defined
54 xxx Error 54: Request identifier XXX unknown
55 xxx Error 55: Request No. XXXonlyfor receive
56 xxx Error 56: Request No. XXXonlyforsend
57 xxx Error 57: Request No. XXXonlycompatible with master
58 xxx Error 58: Request No. XXXonlycompatible with slave
59 xxx Error 59: Request too long
60 xxx Error 60: Slave XXX not in polling list
61 xxx Error 61: Request number XXX uses undefined list
62 xxx Error 62: Request number XXX SBS not allowed

Iv 70 0 Error 70: Bus error

71 xxx Error 71: Connection to slave faulted
72 xxx Error 72: The wrong slave (No. XXX) has replied
73 xxx Error 73: Slave No. XXX has failed

1-23
 -
2. Programming

2.1 Overview

There are two activities involved when programming in the

— SINEC LI network:
wame,, ra$,,g”m,n,.
: cP. Ma,,,r
a) Assigning the initial parameters to the CP 530 communica- S5b., addre,,

L!,,,
tions module(s) (SYSID) , %11!. 911,,
:1., er,. p, l,,,

b) Programming the messages (Send/receive/gate with the

rest of the STEP 5 user program).
Parmw,
:cP. slwe
era, ,ign”l,nt,
Programming is possible either with the PG 615 or PG 675 pro- :55 bu, addr,,s
: Sla”eno. o” b”,
grammer. In the case of the PG 615, the activities under a) are
carried out with a special COM 530/PG 615 operating system
submodule and the activities under b) with the standard
operating system of the PG 615.
With the PG 675, the activity under a) involves a “COM 530/
PG 675” diskette, while the activity under b) takes place with

m
the standard LAD/CSF/STL package and the programs and
{ PWame,,, a,,,y, nen,
parameters can be stored on a data diskette. When pro- :Slaveo.. o”b.s
add, e,, of
.6 !Olu .Coord, na,,on{lq,
gramming the CP 530 off-line with the PG 675 programmer, a ,“
.Sendma,lbo,
.R, ce,vema,, box
program name must be entered; the parameter set for a CP is .

I 1
stored under this name on diskette and can be read back in -,..
.:: ,,
I
when required. L–––––+ H ‘=
d
I
Both programmers can be used off-line and on-line. s5-
Pmm,,,ra,,ig.,”e”,
Siav, no. on b”,
C P U : addr,,, o f
.Coord, na,, on flay
— Off-line: After they have been generated (e.g. on diskette), ,.~
.Sendm, !lbo,
.R, ce, ”ema,, box

I
programs/ parameters are transferred to memory submod- II
f ::?. ,,
ules, which are plugged into the receptacles on the corre- s.,,.
I ?
R
..,..* ,
1- ————-+ “-’
sponding modules. A memory space of 1 K bytes (max.) is D
a“

required on the submodule for the CP 530.

Fig. 2-1 Assigning the SINEC L1 parameters

— On-line: Once they have been generated, programs/para-

— meters are transferred directly to the user memory of the
modules.
Condition: There must not be a user EPROM submodule plugged into the corresponding module.
Diagnostic functions on the CP 530 are also possible in on-line mode. The operating mode is set in the basic menu of the pro-
grammer.
A distinction must be made between four typical cases when programming the SINEC LI system (see Fig. 2-l).

1) Initialization of the CP 53o as master/slave

2) Programming the CPU of the master PC (S5-115U/S5-135 U/S5-150U)

3) Programming the CPU of a slave PC with the CP 530 as slave (S5-115U/S5-135 U/S5-150U)

4) Programming a PC as directly connected slave (S5-115U or S5-10IU)

These four cases will be described below by way of example of a simple interconnected system.

2-1
I
2. Programming

2.2 Initializing the CP 530

2.2.1 SYSID (System Identification)

—
Initializing the CP 530 as master in the SINEC LI system.
Configuration
The user defines the system characteristics by defining the
SYSID parameters (system identification), proceeding as m
shown in the flowchart opposite (for COM 530). v

Since the SYSID area has system-wide validity, not all the pa-
rameters are relevant for the CP 530. Input
An overview of the parameters is given in the table below.
@) Mandatory parameter for SINEC L1 m
n Optional parameter v

SYSID

m
Fig. 2-2 Entry sequence on the programmer
-.

a) b) c) d)
max.
Field Definition Examples Formats length
1 Module identifier CP-530 ace. to. MLFB 8
(ordering code)
2 Firmware version identifier v-1 .2 free 8
3 Plant designation Shop I PLNT4-AG7 free 19
4 Generation date 1—10/83 free 8

@ Slave No. on PG-/SlNEC LI —/1 o P G PG/— 5

–8/–4 Mini—/mm
–71— PG/Mini:
—l— PG/mm

o Page No. (SSNR) 23 1-254 3

13 Automatic cold restart Y Y = automat. 1
(a) cold restart
18 Baud rate on the SINEC LI bus* 9600 baud 5
300 baud
‘ not yet implemented
Table 2-1 SYSID for the CP 530

Meaning of the parameters (circled parameters are mandatory).

1) “CP 530” is entered as the module identifier; in this way, the user submodule can be easily identified as belonging to the SINEC
LI system.
When reading the SYSID in the “on-line” mode, the identifier is output from the firmware of the CP.

2) The user can enter the firmware status applying when his program was generated. When reading on-line, the version identifier
is read out of the CP firmware.

3) Freely selectable (ASCII) characters

4) Freely selectable (ASCII) characters

@ O The CP 530 maybe a participant in a common programmer bus (PG bus); the number under which it can be referenced with
programming functions via the programmer interface is between 1 and 30. “Blank” is entered if the programmer is
connected directly to the CP 530.

2-2
 m
2. Programming

2.2 Initializing the CP 530

0 The CP can be a participant or node in the SINEC L1 network.

— The master must not be assigned a number (“Blank”)
— A slave must be assigned a number between 1 and 30;

@ Page frame No.: The dual-port RAM of the CP 530 has a width of 1 K bytes; its location in the address area of the CPU is defined
by entering the page frame number.
Area 1-255 e. g.:
Page frame No. Base adress Addr. range
1 IK 400 H - 7FF H
2 2K 800 H - BFF H
3 3K COO H - FFF H

13 The cold restart characteristics define the behaviour of the CP 530 on recovery of the power supply:
O If “Y” is entered, the CP performs a cold restart and assumes bus operations (e. g. if there is no connection to the master
Pc)
O If “N” is entered, the CP waits for a “SYNCHRON” command of the master PC before starting.

18 The baud rate for SINEC LI specifies the transmission speed on the bus; in this case, all slaves must be connected via the
CP 530 communications processor and the same baud rate set (not yet effective; only 9600 baud possible at present).

Exam~le:
Small’ parts are manufactured in a number of sections in a
factory shop. On 30 April 1985, initializing parameters are SYSID: 1 CP530
defined for the CP 530 bus master of plant section 1, The CP 2 .....,
is plugged into the rack of an S5-115U and is addressed there 3 Small parts plant 1
with the Page No. 1. The CP is to start simultaneously with the 430.04.85
CPU.
12 : 1
13 : N
—

2.2.2 Polling List

The user can program the polling list by proceeding as shown

in the flowchart opposite (for COM 530).
(see COM 530 Operating Instructions).
m
Configuration

m Input

mPolling list

2-3
I
2. Programming

2.2 Initializing the CP 530

Five slaves on a bus are to be called in their natural sequence.

Slave 2 is to have a higher priority. This can be done by calling

it more often than the other slaves in the bus cycle.
Polling list
=> 1 — 2 — 3 — 2 - 4 -
2 — 5 — 2 =>

2.2.3 Interrupt List

The user can program the interrupt list by proceeding as

shown in the flowchart opposite (for COM 530)
(see COM 530 Operating Instructions) Configuration

m
v

Input

Of the five slaves in the polling list, slaves 3 and 4 are allowed
to send interrupt messages.
If both wish to send at the same time, slave 4 is to have priority.
3
Interrupt list

Interrupt list
The interrupt list may contain slaves that are not in the polling => 4 — 3 =>
list,

Advantage: These slaves can participate in bus traffic

without loading the bus cycle if there is no
need for cyclic data interchange. Polling list
Disadvantage: These slaves can fail without being noticed => 1 — 2-3 -4—5 =>
since they are not referenced cyclically by the
master.

Interrupt list
=>3— 6=>

2-4
 m
2. Programming

2.3 Initializing and Programming the S5-CPU with the CP 530 as Master or Slave

2.3.1 General :Pu Request ?equest Type of

number dentifier request
This section describes data interchange between a CPU and
a CP 530 plugged into the same rack as master or as bus Nrites 1 ;END Slave 1
slave.

The CPU can

● write 30 Slave30
● read 31 to all slaves
● trace request states 51 Interrupt to slave 1
● reset all requests 80 Interrupt to slave
● initiate a cold restart 30
on the CP 530. 81 Interrupt to
all slaves
For these activities the CPU uses function blocks – referred to 222 SYS ID CP
as data handling blocks – which are integrated in the opera- 42 Control byte,
ting system in the case of the CPU of the S5-I15U. The func- bus master
tion blocks are described in the Appendix. 43 Polling list
In order to specify the request for the CP 530, the block is 44 Interrupt list
given request numbers defined according to Fig. 2-3. Only a ‘cads 101 RECEIVE Slave 1
subset of the requests is possible on the CP 530 acting as
slave (Fig. 2-4).

130 Slave 30
100 Interrupt data
200 Error list from
SYSTAT
201 List of failed slave:
221 SYSTATCP
223 SYS ID CP
142 Control byte,
bus master
.— 143 Polling list
—144 Interrupt list
erases I 200 RESET Error list in SYSTAT
erases 0 RESET All requests on the
CP (resetting of
the CP)
Fig. 2-3 CPU as master

2-5
I
2. Programming

2.3 Initializing and Programming the S5-CPU with the CP 530 as Master or Slave

With requests 1 to 30 (51 -80) data is transferred to the CP 530 CPU Request Request Type of request
which the latter passes on to the slaves: .
number identifier

– Data from request no. 1 to slave 1 writes 1 SEND Slave 1

— Data from request no. 2 to slave 2
etc.

The SYSID, polling list and interrupt list can be transferred to 30 Slave30
the CP with requests 222,43 and 44. 31 to all nodes
32 to master
Caution: 51 Interrupt to slave 1
The CP must be in the “STOP” mode for these requests.

The bus can be started or stopped with request no. 42

The system identification of the CP can be written with re- 80 Interrupt to

quest no. 222. slave 30
81 Interrupt to all
By analogy, data can be fetched from nodes
slave no. 1 with request no. 101 and from 82 Interrupt to master
slave no. 2 with request no. 102 —.
etc. 222 SYSID CP
reads 101 RECEIVE Slaves 1-30, mastel
Arbitrary interrupt data can be copied to the CPU from any of 100 Interrupt data
the slaves with request no. 100. 200 Error list in SYSTAT
221 SYSTAT CP
The polling and interrupt lists can be transferred from the CP 223 SYS ID CP
to the S5-CPU with requests nos. 143 and 144.
erases 200 RESET Error list in SYSTAT
The system identification and CP status (SYSID and SYSTAT) erases o RESET All requests on the
can be transferred to the S5-CPU with requests nos. 223/221. CP (resetting of
the CP)
Before the first data requests (SEND/RECEIVE) are executed,
the CP 530 must be synchronized with the CPU (see SYN- Fig. 2-4 CPU as slave
CHRON).

The request RECEIVE 200 may be used to read the error list
from the SYSTAT area, and request RESET 200 maybe used to
reset the current errors.

In the master, the list of failed slaves can be read with request
number 201.

2-6
 2. Programming

2.3 Initializing and Programming the S5-CPU with the CP 530 as Master or Slave

2.3.2 Programming Examples

2.3.2.1 Sending to a Slave

If input 14.0 changes its status from O to 1, a data word (net data) is to be sent from DB 11 (data = DW2) to slave 23.

FB2 SPRM-A 0044

0046
Segment 1 0048 :
Name :S-Slave 23 O04A
O04C
OOOA Send to slave 23 O04E
Oooc 0050 A F 11.2 Evaluate positive-going edge
OOOE This block isscannedcyclically 0052 : A N F1,7 of the “Transmission completed
0010 : without error” message
0012 0054 := F 1.6 “Transmission completed without
0014 :C DBIO Call DB1O error” edge
0016 : This block is for storing the 0056 ;A F 1,2
0018 condition code words 0058 := F .7
OOIA O05A
Oolc Input pulse edge evaluation O05C : AN F 82.0 No PAFE in last send request
OOIE A 14,0 O05E A F .6 “Transmission completed without
0020 : AN F2,1 error” flag
0022 := F2.O Edge flag 0060 R F ,1 Reset send request
0024 :A 14.0 0062 :
0026 := F2. I 0064 : A N F1l.1 No request pending
0028 0066 A F 1.1 Send initiation flag
O02A 0068 :R F 1.7 Auxiliary edge flag
O02C A F2.O Set flag for send initiation O06A : IC FB244 Call function block FB244
O02E :s F 1.1 O06CNAME : SEND
0030 O06E SSNR : KYO, I Page frame number of the CP530
0032 :JU FB247 0070 ANR : KY0,23 Send to slave 23
0034 NAME : CONTROL 0072 ANZW : DW4 DW4and DW5in DBIO
0036 SSNR : KYO, I Page frame number of the CP530 0074 QTYP : KSDB Send mailbox is in DB area
0038 A-NR : KY0,23 Send to slave 23 0076 DBNR : KYO, I 1 DB 11
O03AANZW : DW2 0078 QANF : KF+l From DW1
O03CPAFE : FY181 O07AQLAE : KF+2 2 words (net data = 1 word)
O03E O07CPAFE : FY182 Flag byte 182
0040 :L DW2 Relocate condition codeword O07E
0042 :T FWIO 0080 The first net data byte to be sent is
0082 in DBI 1, DL2
0084
0086 : BE

2-7
I
2. Programming

2.3 Initializing and Programming the S5-CPU with the CP 530 as Master or Slave

2.3.2.2 Receiving from a Slave

FBI SPRM-A 0044 should be scanned in the example

0046 only if new data have been received
Segment 1 0048
Name : RECEIVE O04A The first byte received (SBR)
O04C in the preamble of the receive data
OOOA : Receive data from slave 23 O04E is used for this purpose in the
Oooc in the master 0050 example.
OOOE This block is scanned cyclically 0052 This byte is written by the CP
0010 ; IU FB247 0054 every time data is received.
0012 NAME : CONTROL 0056
0014 SSNR : KYO,l Page frame number of the CP530 0058 :C DBI 1
0016 A-NR : KY0,123 Receive from slave 23 O05A
0018 ANZW : FW20 O05C :L DL1O
OOIAPAFE : FY183 Flag byte 183 O05E :L KBO
Oolc 0060 ; !=F
OOIE : 0062 : BEC Program end, if no data have
0020 0064 been received
0022 0066
0024 A F21 .0 Data available(bit Oof the ANZW) 0068 w Evaluate data received w
0026 O06A
0028 : IC FB245 Function block FB245 O06C The first net data byte received
O02ANAME : RECEIVE O06E is in DB1 1, DL12 (left-hand byte)
O02CSSNR : KYO, I Page frame number of the CP530 0070
O02E A-NR : KY0,123 Receive data from slave 23 0072
0030 ANZW : FW24 0074 Display (evaluate) data received
0032 ZTYP : KSDB Receive mailbox in DB area 0076
0034 DBNR : KYO, I 1 DB 11 0078 :L DL12
0036 ZANF : KF+ 10 From DWIO O07A :T QB8
0038 ZLAE : KF+3 3 words (net data from DW12) O07C
O03APAFE : FY184 Flag byte 184 O07E
O03C 0080 :L KBO
O03E 0082 :T DL1O Data have been evaluated
0040 : The program section 0084 (Delete SBR)
0042 : “Evaluate data received” 0086
0088 : BE

2-8
 m
2. Programming

2.3 initializing and Programming the S5-CPU with the CP 530 as Master or Slave

2.3.2.3 Complete Example with the 150U as Master and the 135U/AG I15U as Slave

Programming examples for the I15U PC as slave via the CP 530

OB22 SPRM-A 115U Pc OB21 SPRM-A 115U Pc

Segment 1 Segment 1
0000 OB for power recovery 0000 OB for cold restart
0002 0 0 0 2
0004 A F255.7 ldentifierfor FBl 11 0004 ; A N F225,7 Identifier for FBI 11
0006 R F255.7 Call from OB22 0006 :s F225.7 Call from OB21
0008 0008 :
OOOA OOOA : IU FB111 Call function block FBI 11
Oooc : OOOCNAME : START
OOOE : IU FB111 Call function block FBI 11 OOOE
0010 NAME : START 0010 : BE
0012
0014 : BE

FBI 11 SPRM-A 115U Pc

OB1 SPRM-A 115U Pc
Segment 1 Segment 1
Name: Initial Start
0000
OOOA : 0002 : A N F99.O Send request in the clock pulse
Oooc 115U PC with the CP 530 0004 :L KTIOO.O example via flag 99.0
OOOE 0008 : SE T1
0010 :A F225.7 Identifier for entry OOOA :A TI Call function block FB111
0012 : IC = MOOI lump if from OB21 Oooc : = F99.O
0014 OOOE
0016 0010
0018 * 0012 : IU FB32 Send tomaster(function block FB32)
—
OOIA :L KHIFFF Time loop executed onlyon warm 0014 NAME : S-MASTER
OOIE MO03 : L KF+I restart after power recovery 0016 :
0022 : -F (aprox. 5secswiththe941 CPU) 0018 : IU FBIOI Data receive (function block FBIOI)
0024 :L KF+O Time required for CP hardware to OOIA NAME : RECEIVE
0028 ; !=F restart program Oolc
O02A : IC =MO02 001 E
O02C : TAK 0020 Program section for changing
O02E : IU =MO03 0022 send data
0030 MO02 : 0024 : A N F99.O
0032 0026 : BEC
0034 MOO1 ; 0028 :C DB32
. 0036 : O02A :L DL2
0038 : IU FB249 Call function block 249 O02C :L KBI
O03ANAME : SYNCHRON O02E +F
O03CSSNR : KYO,l Interface number 1 0030 :T DL2
O03E BLGR : KY0,5 Block size 256 bytes 0032 : BE
0040 PAFE : FY180 Initializing error byte
0042
0044 :
0046 **
0048 :L KHOIOO Waiting time until CP
O04CMO05 : L KF+l completes restart Synchron
0050 : -F
0052 :L KF+O
0056 ; !=F
0058 : IC =MO04
O05A : TAK
O05C : IU =MO05
O05E MO04 :
0060
0062 : BE
—

‘ LKH 7500 with the 942 CPU and the943 CPU

“ LKH 0500 with the 942 CPU and the 943 CPU

2-9
I
2. Programming

2.3 Initializing and Programming the S5-CPU with the CP 530 as Master or Slave

FB32 SPRM-A 115U Pc FB1OI SPRM-A 115U Pc

Segment 1 Segment 1
Name: S Master Name: Receive

OOOA Send to master OOOA Receive

Oooc Oooc
OOOE A F99.O Start send flag OOOE : IU FY247 Call function block FB247
0010 :s F 1.1 0010 NAME : CONTROL
0012 0012 SSNR : KYO, I
0014 : IU FY247 Call function block FB247 0014 A-NR : KYO,1O1
0016 NAME : CONTROL 0016 ANZW : FW20
0018 SSNR : KYO, I 0018 PAFE : FY183 Flag byte 183
OOIAA-NR : KY0,32 Send to master OOIA
OOICANZW : FW1O Oolc
OOIE PAFE : FY181 Flag byte 181 OOIE :
0020 0020
0022 0022 :A F21 .0 Data available
0024 0024 : IC FY245 Call function block FY245
0026 : 0026 NAME : RECEIVE
0028 0028 SSNR : KYO, I
–
O02A O02AA-NR : KYO,1O1 Receive (always No. 101 in case of
O02C :A F 11,2 Positive-going edge evaluation of O02CANZW : FW24 slave)
O02E :AN F I . 7 the “Transmission completed with- O02E ZTYP : KSDB Data receive mailbox in DB area
0030 := F 1.6 out error” message 0030 DBNR : KYO,1OI DB 101
0032 A F 11.2 “Transmission completed without 0032 ZANF : KF+l From DWI
0034 := F 1.7 error” edge 0034 ZLAE KF+3
0036 0036 PAFE FY184 Flag byte 184
0038 :AN F182.O No PAFE in last send request 0038
O03A A F 1.6 “Transmission completed without O03A
error” flag O03C The program section
O03C :R F 1.1 Reset send request O03E “Evaluate data received”
O03E 0040 is only to be processed
0040 :AN F1l.1 No request pending 0042 in the example when new data
0042 A F 1.1 Set flag for send initiation 0044 have been received.
0044 :R F 1.7 Auxiliary edge flag 0046 The first byte received (SBR)
0046 :IC FY244 Call function block FB244 0048 in the preamble of the receive data
0048 NAME : SEND O04A is used for this purpose in the
O04ASSNR : KYO,O O04C example,
O04CA-NR : KY0,32 Send to master O04E This byte is written by the CP
O04E ANZW : FW14 0050 every time data is received.
0050 QTYP : KSDB Send mailbox is in DB area 0052
0052 DBNR : KY0,32 DB32 0054 :C DBIOI
0054 QANE : KF+l From DW1 0056
0056 QLAE : KF+2 2 words 0058 :L DL1
0058 PAFE : FY182 Flag byte 182 O05A :L KBO
O05A O05C ; !=F
O05C The first net data byte to be O05E : BEC Program end if no data have been
O05E sent is in DB32, DL2 0060 received
0060 0062
0062 : BE 0064 w Evaluate data receivedxx
0066
0068 The first net data byte received is in
O06A DBIOI DL3
O06C
O06E
0070 Display (evaluate) data received
0072
0074 :L DL3
0076 :T AB8
0078
O07A
O07C :L KBO
O07E :T DLI Data have been evaluated
0080 (Delete SBR)
0082
0084 : BE

2-1o
 m
2. Programming

2.3 Initializing and Programming the S5-CPU with the CP 530 as Master or Slave

Programming example for the 135U PC (S processor) as slave via the CP

530

OB20 SPRM-B 135U Pc

Segment 1
0000
0001 : A N F255.7 ldentifierfor FBl 11
0002 :s F255.7 Call from OB20
0003
0004
0005 : IU FBI 11 Call function block FBl 11
0006 NAME : START
0007
0008 : BE

OB21 SPRM-B 135U Pc

Segment 1
0000 :
0 0 0 1
0002 ; A N F255.7 ldentifierfor FBl 11
0003 :s F255.7 Call from OB21
0004
0005
0006 : IU FBI 11 Call function block FBl 11
0007 NAME : START
0008
0009 Delete the condition codewords
OOOA of the send and receive requests
OOOB :L KBO
Oooc :T FWIO
OOOD :T FW14
OOOE :T FW20
OOOF :T FW24
0010
0011 : BE

OB22 SPRM-B 135U Pc

Segment 1
— 0000
0001 :A F255.7 ldentifierfor FBl 11
0002 :R F255.7 Call from OB22
0003
0004
0005 :JU FBIII Call function block FBl 11
0006 NAME : START
0007
0008 Delete the condition codewords
0009 of the send and receive requests
OOOA :L KBO
OOOB :T FWIO
Oooc :T FW14
OOOD :T FW20
OOOE :T FW24
OOOF :
0010 : BE

2-11
2. Programming

2.3 Initializing and Programming the S5-CPU with the CP 530 as Master or Slave

FBI 11 SPRM-B 135U Pc OB1 SPRM-B 135U Pc

Segment 1 Segment 1
Name: Initial Start 0000
0001 :
0005 : 0002
0006 : 0003 A F99.7
0007 : 0004 : I C FB126 Remove from queue (function blockFB126)
0008 :A F255,7 Entry identifier 0005 NAME : ACTIVE
0009 : IC =MOOI lum~ if from OB200r OB21 0006 SSDB : DB1O
OOOA 0007
OOOB :L KH3000 Time loop only executed after 0008 :
OOODMO03 : L KF+l power recovery 0009
OOOF : -F (approx. 5secs) OOOA : A N F99.O Send request initiation in clock
0010 :L KF+O Time taken for CP hardware OOOB :L KTIOO.O pulse example via flag 99.0
0012 ; !=F to execute initial start program OOOD : SE T1
0013 : IC =MO02 OOOE :A T1
0014 : TAK OOOF := F99.O
0015 : IU =MO03 0010
0016 MO02 : 0011 :
0017 0012
–
0 0 1 8 MOOI ; 0013 : IU FB32 Sendtomaster(function b l o c k FB32)
0019 0014 NAME : S-MASTER
OOIA : IU FE1125 Call function block FB125 0015
OOIB NAME : SYNCHRON 0016 :A F99.7
OOICSSDB : DBIO Queues DB (DB 10) 0017 :IC FB126 Remove from queue (function blockFB126)
OOIDSSNR : KYO,l Interface number 1 0018 NAME : ACTIVE
001 E ANZW : KYO,1O Condition codeword FW 10 0019 SSDB : DB1O
OOIF PAFE : FO.5 Initializing error BIT F 0,5 OOIA
0020 OOIB :
0021 :A FO.5 Oolc : IU FB101 Data receive (function block FBIOl)
0022 :R F99.7 001 DNAME : RECEIVE
0023” : IC =END lump if PAFEerrorreported when OOIE :
0024 calling the FB Synchron 001 F
0025 0020 : A N F99.O Change send data
0026 : Interlock flag 0021 : BEC
0027 is reset 0022 :C DB32
0028 0023 :L DL2
0029 0024 :L KBI
O 0 2 A Start 0025 : +F
O 0 2 B L O O P ;IU FB126 Remove Synchron from queue 0026 :T DL2
O02CNAME : ACTIVE 0027 : BE
O02DSSDB : DB1O
O02E A F 10.6
O02F : IC = LOOP lump till FB Synchron executed
0030
0031 :
0032 :
0033 :L KH0400 Wait time till CP completes
0035 MO05 : L KF+l initial start
0037 : -F
0038 :L KF+O
O03A ; !=F
O03B : IC =MO04
O03C : TAK
O03D : IU =MO05
O03E MO04 :
O03F
0040 : FB Synchron executed without
0041 : AN F 10.4 error?
0042 :AN F1O.5
0043 :s F99.7 Userinterlockflag
0044 :
0045
0046
0047 END : BE

2-12
 -

2. Programming

2.3 Initializing and Programming the S5-CPU with the CP 530 as Master or Slave

FB32 SPRM-B 135U Pc FBIOI SPRM-B 135U Pc

—.
Segment 1 Segment 1
Name: S Master Name: Receive

0005 Send to master 0005 Data receive

0006 0006
0007 :A F99.O Set flag for send initiation 0007 A F99.7 Interlock if error in FB Synchron
0008 :s F 1.1 0008 :IC FB123 Function block FB123
0009 0009 NAME : CONTROL
OOOA :A F99.7 Interlock if error in FB Synchron OOOASSNR : KYO,l
OOOB : IC FB123 Function block FB123 OOOB A-NR : KYO, IO I Receive
OOOCNAME : CONTROL OOOCANZW : KY0,20 FW20
OOODSSNR : KYO, I OOODPAFE : F0,3
OOOE A-NR : KY0,32 Send request to master OOOE
OOOF ANZW : KY0,32 FW 10 OOOF :
0010 PAFE : FO. I 0010 :A F99.7 Interlock if error in FB Synchron
0011 0011 : AN F24.6 No queue entry
0012 0012 A F21.O Data available
0013 ;A F 11.2 Positive-going edge evaluation of 0013
0014 :AN F I . 7 the “Completed without error” 0014 :Ic FB121 Function block FB121
0015 := F 1.6 message, “Completed without 0015 NAME : RECEIVE
0016 A F 11.2 error’’edge 0016 SSDB : DBIO
0017 := F 1.7 0017 A-NR : KYO, IO I Receive
0018 0018 ANZW : KY0,24 FW24
0019 :AN F 1 O . 4 No error 0019 ZTYP : KCDM Receive mailbox in DB area
OOIA : AN F 10.5 No error OOIADBNR : KYO, IOI DBIOI
OOIB :AN FO.2 No UELAerrorwhen sending OOIBZANF : KF+I From DWI
Oolc :A F 1,6 “Completed without error” flag OOICZLAE : KF+3 3words
OOID :R F 1,1 Reset send request OOIDUELA : FO.4
OOIE : OOIE
001 F OOIF
— 0020 :A F99.7 Interlock if error in FB Synchron 0020
0021 : AN F 14.6 No queue entry 0021 The program section
0022 : AN F 11.1 No request pending 0022 “Evaluatedata received”
0023 IA F 1.1 Send request 0023 is only to be processed in the
0024 l? F 1.7 Reset auxiliary edge flag 0024 example if new data have been
0025 :Ic FB120 Function block FB120 0025 received.
0026 NAME : SEND 0026 The first byte received (SBR)
0027 SSNB : DBIO 0027 in the preamble of the
0028 A-NR : KY0,32 Send to master 0028 receive data is used for this
0029 ANZW : KY0,14 FW 14 0029 purpose in the example.
O02AQTYP : KSDB Send mailbox in DB area O02A This byte is written by the CP
O02B DBNR : KY0,32 DB32 O02B whenever data is received.
oo2cClANF : KF+I From DW1 O02C
O02DQLAE : KF+2 2words O02D
OOZE UELA : FO.2 O02E :C DBIOI
O02F O02F :L DLI
0030 : BE 0030 :L KBO
0031 ; !=F
0032 : BEC Program end if no new data have
0033 been received
0034
0035 “Evaluate data received”
0036
0037 The first net data byte is in
0038 DL30f DBIO1
0039 :L DL3
O03A :T QBO
O03B
O03C
O03D :L KBO
O03E :T DLI Data have been evaluated
— O03F (Delete SBR)
0040
0041 : BE

2-13
I
2. Programming

2.3 Initializing and Programming the S5-CPU with the CP 530 as Master or Slave

Programming example for the 150U PC as master via the CP 530

OB20 SPRM-B 150U Pc OBI SPRM-B 150U Pc

Seament 1 Segment 1
0060 OB for initial start 0000 Generate send criteria
0001 0001 (Example: send in clocked mode)
0002 : A N F255.7 ldentifierfor FBlll 0002
0003 :s F255.7 Call from OB20 0003 : AN F99.O
0004 0004 :L KT050.O
0005 0006 : SR T1
0006 : IU FBIII Function block FB1ll 0007 A TI
0007 : START 0008 :s F99.O Set flag for send initiation
0008 : BE 0009 := F99. I
OOOA :A F99.O
OOOB :L KT050.O
OB21 SPRM-B 150U Pc OOOD : SR T2
OOOE A T2
Segment 1 OOOF :R F99.O
0000 OBfor manual warm restart 0010
0001 0011 FB Cycflag call for
–
0002 : A N F255.7 ldentifierfor FB 0012 distributing the data handling block
0003 :s F255.7 Call from OB21 0013 calls (time base)
0004 0014 (not required if calls are
0005 0015 distributed in the existing
0006 : IU FBIII Function block FB1lI 0016 user program)
0007 NAME : START 0017 : JU FBIOO Function block FBIOO
0008 : BE 0018 NAME : CYKFLAGS
0019
OOIA
OB22 SPRM-B 150U Pc OOIB ;A F 112.2
Oolc :IC FB1l Send to slave 1
Segment 1 001 DNAME : S-SLAVE I
0000 OBforwarm restart after power recovery OOIE
0001 OOIF :A F 112,4
0002 A F255.7 FB identifier 0020 :Ic F B 1 2 Send to slave2
0003 R F255.7 Call from OB22 0021 NAME : S-SLAVE2
0004 0022
0005 0023 :A F 112,6
0006 :JU FB” 11 Function block FB 11 0024 :Ic F B 2 1 Receive from slave 1
0007 NAME : ANLAUF 0025 NAME : R-SLAVE I
0008 0026
0 0 0 9 0027 A F 111.0
OOOA ; BE 0028 :Ic F B 2 2 Receive from slave2
0029 NAME : R-SLAVE2
O02A
O02B :
O02C
O02D : AN F99.1 Program section for changing
O02E : BEC send data
O02F :C DBI 1
0030 :L DL2 For slave 1
0031 :L KF+I
0033 : +F
0034 :T DL2
0035 :C DB12
0036 :T DL2 For slave 2
0037 : BE

2-14
 m
2. Programming

2.3 Initializing and Programming the S5-CPU with the CP 530 as Master or Slave

FBI 11 SPRM-B 150U Pc

. Segment 1
Name: Restart

0005 Block for calling the

0006 Synchron F8forthe CP530
0007
0008
0009 A F255.7 Evaluation of the entry identifier
OOOA : IC =MOOI lump, if from 0820 and OB21
OOOB
Oooc
OOOD :
OOOE
OOOF :L KB5 Time loop isonlyexecuted on warm
0010 MO05 : L KBI restart after power recovery
0011 : -F (approx. 5secs)
0012 :T FY255 Time elapsed until the CP
0013 :L KHFFFF hardware has executed the
0015 MO03 : L KB1 restart program
0016 : -F
—
0017 :L KBO
0018 ; !=F
0019 : IC =MO02
OOIA : TAK
OOIB : IU =MO03
OOICMO02 : L FY255
OOID :L KBO
OOIE ; !=F
OOIF : IC =MO04
0020 : TAK
0021 : IU =MO05
— 0022 MO04 :
0023
0 0 2 4 MOOI :
0025
0026 : IU FB185 Function block FB185
0027 NAME : SYNCHRON
0028 SSNR : KYO, IO Interface No. 10
0029 BLGR : KY0,5 Block size 256 bytes
O02APAFE : FY180 Initializing error (flag byte 180)
O02B
O02C
O02D
— O02E
O02F :L KH2FFF Time elapsed until CPfinished with
0031 MO07 : L KF+l Synchron
0033 : -F
0034 :L KHOOOO
0036 ; !=F
0037
0038 : IC =MO06
0039 : TAK
O03A : IU =MO07
O03B MO06 :
O03C :
O03D
O03E
O03F : BE

2-15
I
2. Programming

2.3 Initializing and Programming the S5-CPU with the CP 530 as Master or Slave

FBI 1 SPRM-B 150U Pc FB12 SPRM-B 150U Pc

Segment 1 Segment 1
Name: S Slave 1 Name: S Slave 2

0005 Send to slave 1 0005 Send to slave 2

0006 : 0006
0007 A F99.O Set flag for send initiation 0007 :A F99.O Set flag for send initiation
0008 :s F 1.1 0008 :s F2. I
0009 : 0009
OOOA : IU FB184 Function block FB184 OOOA :IU FB184 Function block FB184
OOOB NAME : CONTROL OOOB NAME : CONTROL
OOOCSSNR : KYO, IO OOOCSSNR : KYO, IO
OOODA-NR : KYO,l OOODA-NR : KY0,2
OOOE ANZW : FW1O OOOE ANZW : FW20
OOOF PAFE : FY181 OOOF PAFE : FY183 Flag byte 183
0010 0010
0011 : 0011
0012 0012
0013 0013 :
0014 0014
0 0 1 5 0015
0016 ;A F 11.2 Positive-going edge evaluation of 0016 :A F21 .2 Positive-going evaluation of the
0017 :AN F 1 . 7 the “Completed without error” 0017 :AN F 2 . 7 “Completed without error” message
0018 : = F 1.6 message, “Completed without 0018 := F2.6 “Completed without error” edge
0019 :A F 11.2 error” edge 0019 :A F21 .2
OOIA := F 1.7 OOIA := F2.7
OOIB OOIB
Oolc :AN F182.O No PAFE with the last send Oolc : AN F 184.0 No PAFE in last send request
OOID A F 1.6 “Completed without error” 001 D A F2.6 “Completed without error” flag
OOIE :R F 1.1 flag OOIE :R F2. I Reset send request
OOIF Reset send request 001 F
0020 :AN F1l.1 No request pending 0020 :AN F21.1 No request pending
0021 :A F 1,1 Send request pending 0021 A F2. I Send request pending
0022 R F 1.7 Reset auxiliary edge flag 0022 :R F2.7 Reset auxiliary edge flag
0023 :Ic FB180 Function block FB180 0023 : IC FB180 Function block FBI 80
0024 NAME : SEND 0024 NAME : SEND
0025 SSNR : KYO, IO 0025 SSNR : KYO, IO
0026 A-NR : KYO, I Send to slave 1 0026 A-NR : KY0,2 Send to slave2
0027 ANZW : FW14 0027 ANZW : FW24
0028 QTYP : KSDB Send mailbox is in the DB area 0028 QTYP : KSDB Send mailbox is in the DB area
0029 DBNR : KYO, I 1 DB number 11 0029 DBNR : KY0,12 DB number 12
O02AQANF : KF+I From DW1 O02AQANF : KF+ 1 From DWI
O02B QLAE : KF+2 Send 2 words O02B QLAE : KF+2 Send 2 words
O02CPAFE : FY182 Flag byte 182 O02CPAFE : FY184 Flag byte 184
O02D O02D
O02E The first net data byte to be OOZE The first net data byte to be
O02F sent is in DBI 1. DL 2 O02F sent is in DB12, DL2
0030 0030
0031 0031 : BE
0032 : BE

2-16
 2. Programming

2.3 Initializing and Programming the S5-CPU with the CP 530 as Master or Slave

FB21 SPRM-B 150U Pc FB22 SPRM-B 150U Pc

Segment 1 Segment 1
Name: E Slave 1 Name: E Slave 2

0005 Receive from slave 1 0005 Receive from slave 2

0006 0006 :
0007 : IU FB184 Function block FB184 0007 : IU FB184 Function block FB184
0008 NAME : CONTROL 0008 NAME : CONTROL
0009 SSNR : KYO, IO 0009 SSNR : KYO,1O
OOOAA-NR : KYO, IO I OOOAA-NR : KY0,102
OOOB ANZW : FW30 OOOB ANZW : FW40
OOOCPAFE : FY185 Flag byte 185 OOOCPAFE : FY187 Flag byte 187
OOOD OOOD :
OOOE OOOE :
OOOF : OOOF
0010 0010
0011 :A F31 .0 0011 A F41 .0 Data available
0012 :Ic FB181 Function block FB181 0012 :Ic FB181 Function block FB181
0013 NAME : RECEIVE 0013 NAME : RECEIVE
0014 SSNR : KYO, IO 0014 SSNR : KYO,1O
0015 A-NR : KYO,1OI Receive data from slave 1 0015 A-NR : KY0,102 Receive from slave 2
0016 ANZW : FW34 0016 ANZW : FW44
0017 ZTYP : KSDB Receive mailbox in the DB area 0017 ZTYP : KSDB Receive mailbox in DB area
0018 DBNR : KY0,21 DB21 0018 DBNR : KY0,22 DB22
0019 ZANF : KF+ 1 From DWI 0019 ZANF : KF+ 1 From DW 1
OOIAZLAE KF+3 3 words OOIAZLAE : KF+3 3 words
001 B PAFE FY186 Flag byte 186 OOIB PAFE : FY188
Oolc Oolc
001 D OOID The program section
OOIE The program section 001 E “Evaluate data received”
001 F “Evaluate data received” 001 F is only to be processed in the
0020 is only to be processed in the 0020 example if new data have been
0021 example if new data have been 0021 received.
0022 received. 0022 The first byte received (SBR)
0023 The first byte received (SBR) 0023 in the preamble of the receive data
0024 in the preamble of the receive 0024 is used for this purpose
0025 data is used for this purpose 0025 in the example.
0026 in the example. 0026 This byte is described by the CP
0027 This byte is described by the CP 0027 whenever data are received.
0028 whenever data is received. 0028
0029 0029 :C DB22
O02A :C DB21 O02A :L DLI
O02B :L DB1 O02B :L KBO
O02C :L KBO O02C ; !=F
O02D ; !=F O02D : BEC Program end if no data have
O02E : BEC Program end if no data have O02E been received
O02F been received O02F
0030 0030 **Evaluate data received *X
0031 **Evaluate data received ** 0031
0032 0032 The first net data byte received is in
0033 The first net data byte received 0033 DB22, DL3
0034 is in DB21, DL3 0034
0035 0035
0036 0036 ;C DB22
0037 :C DB21 0037 :L DL3 Display data received
0038 :L DL3 Display data received 0038 :T QBI
0039 :T QBO 0039
O03A O03A :L KBO
O03B O03B :T DL1 Data have been evaluated
O03C :L KBO O03C (Delete SBR)
O03D :T DLI Data have been evaluated O03D
O03E (Delete SBR) O03E : BE
O03F : BE

2-17
I
2. Programming

2.3 Initializing and Programming the S5-CPU with the CP 530 as Master or Slave

FBIOO SPRM-B 150U Pc

Segment 1
Name: Cyc flags

0005 : Cycle flag shift register

0006 :
0007 : AN F 112.1 Ist cycle
0008 :AN FI12.2 2nd cycle
0009 :AN F112.3 3rd cycle
OOOA :AN FI12.4 4th cycle
OOOB :AN FI12.5 5th cycle
Oooc : AN F 112.6 6th cycle
OOOD : AN F 112,7 7th cycle
OOOE :AN FII1.O 8th cycle
OOOF := F 112.0
0010 :R F 111.1
0011 :L FWI 11
0012 : SLW 1
0013 :T FW111
0014 : BE

2-18
 -
2. Programming

2.3 Initializing and Programming the S5-CPU with the CP 530 as Master or Slave

2.3.2.4 Sending with Interrupt 2.3.2.5 Receiving Interrupt data

—
FB3 OB2 115U Pc
Segment 1
Segment 1 0000 :
Name: Interrupt 0002 This block is used for receiving
0004 interrupt data, which have
0014 This block is used for sending 0006 been received via the CP530
0016 interrupt data to slave 1 0008
0018 OOOA
OOIA A F99.O Send initiation edge Oooc : When an interrupt message is
Oolc :s F 1.1 Set flag for send initiation OOOE received, the CP 530 initiates
OOIE 0010 a branch from the normal user
0020 : IU FB247 Function block FB247 0012 program totheinterrupt OB2
0022 NAME : CONTROL 0014 : (l R-Acable)
0024 SSNR : KYO, I 0016 : IU FB247 Function block FB247
0026 A-NR : KY0,51 0018 NAME : CONTROL
0028 ANZW : FWIO OOIASSNR : KYO,l Caution with the 150U PC
O02APAFE : FY181 Flag byte 181 OOICA-NR : KYO,1OO *******************
O02C OOIE ANZW : FW30 Since the 150U PC has no interrupt
.. O02E :A F 11.2 Positive-going edge evaluation of 0020 PAFE : FY 199 cable, there is also no branching
0030 :AN FI.7 the “Completed without error 0022 : into the interrupt OB
0032 := F 1,6 message, “Completed without 0024 Remedy: Call Receive 100 cyclical-
0034 :A F 11.2 error” edge 0026 Iyvia Control
0036 := F 1.7 0028
0038 : O02A A F31.O
O03A : AN F 182.0 No PAFE with the last send O02C : IU FB245 Function block FB245
O03C :A F 1.6 “Completed without error” O02E NAME : RECEIVE
O03E R F 1.1 Reset send initiation 0030 SSNR : KYO,l Page frame No. of the CP530
0040 : 0032 A-NR : KYO,1OO receive interrupt data
0042 : AN FI 1.1 “Request running” 0034 ANZW : FW30
0044 :AN F1.1 Start send 0036 ZTYP : KSDB
— 0046 R F 1.7 Reset auxiliary edge flag 0038 DBNR : KYO,l 10 DBI 10
0048 O03AZANF : KF+I From DW1
O04A : IC FB244 Function block FB244 O03CZLAE : KF+5 5 words (net data 3 words)
O04CNAME : SEND O03E PAFE : FY200 Flag byte 200
O04E SSNR : KYO, I 0040 :
0050 A-NR : KY0,51 0042
0052 ANZW : FWIO 0044 :
0054 QTYP : KSDB 0046
0056 DBNR : KYO,1OO 0048 : BE
0058 QANF : KF+I
O05AQLAE : KF+4
.- O05CPAFE : FY182 Flag byte 182
O05E
0060 : BE
N. B.:
With the S5-150U, the RECEIVE 100 request must be in the
cyclic program section since no OB2 entry is initiated. With
the S5-1 15U/135U, the RECEIVE 100 call can be programmed
in OB2, as in the example. Please note that the RECEIVE 100
request can fail as a result of a PAFE error 91 and, should this
be the case, OB2 is exited without the interrupt data being
fetched.

Remedy:
Repeat the request in OB2 or initiate an additional CON-
TROL/RECEIVE 100 in the cyclic user program.

2-19
2. Programming

2.3 Initializing and Programming the S5-CPU with the CP 530 as Master or Slave

2.3.2.6 Send/Receive “Bus Master” Control Byte

.
If a slave connected to the bus fails, the bus is to be brought into the STOP state by way of the control byte (request 42). The control
byte is not sent on to the slaves but is used only as control information for the master CP.

The bus will stop at the end of the current bus cycle, i. e. at the end of the polling list.

FB 101 -Bus-Stop SPRM-A

Segment 1 LAE = 43 SYM

Name: Bus-Stop Page 1

OOOA :C -Databox DB 11 0028 :L KBI Initialize control byte in

Oooc O02A send mailbox =BUS “STOP”
OOOE O02C :T DLIO .
0010 O02E
0012 0030 :C -Cond. code DB 10 Call condition code DB
0014 : A N F80.O BUS STOP? 0032
0018 0034 : JU -SEND FB 244 SEND call,
OOIA : JC = JUMP lump to program end 0036 NAME : SEND Function block 244
Oolc 0038 SSNR : KYO, I With request
OOIE : O03AA-NR : KYO.42 Send control byte INFO “BUS
0022 O03CANZW : DW20 STOPi’
0024 : O03E QTYP : KSDB
0026 : 0040 DBNR : KYO, I 1 The control byte is in
0042 QANF : KF+IO data word IOof DB 11
0046 QLAE : KF+I
0048 PAFE : -PAFE-SEN FB 200
O04A
O04CIUMP : BE

PAFE-SEN = FB200 Parameter assignment error for send, flag byte

200
Databox = DB 11 Send and receive mailbox for SINEC L1
Cond. code = DB 10 Condition code double words for send and
receive
Send = FB244 Standard function block for CPS

The RUN mode can be reached again by setting bit 1 (“BUS RUN”).
The bus cycle starts with the first slave in the polling list.

2.3.2.7 Sending and Receiving Lists

Like data, the polling and interrupt lists are transmitted with
SEND/RECEIVE. After lists are written to the CP, the bus per-
I 1st slave No.
I
forms a RESTART, i. e. all send and receive mailboxes are
2nd slave No.
erased, or requests (including those from the programmer)
are cancelled and the bus cycle is restarted at the beginning
of the polling list.
The interrupt and polling lists have the same format; the inter- ~
rupt list has a maximum length of 30 bytes, while the polling
list has a length of 64 bytes.
Last slave No.
Note:
Make sure the CP is in the STOP mode before writing any lists.
FF(H)

2-20
 m
2. Programming

2.3 Initializing and Programming the S5-CPU with the CP 530 as Master or Slave

AB5 FB5 115U Pc

Segment 1
Name: Polling list
OOOA This example shows howa O02C :
Oooc polling list can be written, O02E
OOOE using data handling blocks. 0030 “Enterwith RLO = “1“ ‘(
0010 The CP 530 must first be 0032 :
0012 switched to “Stop” for this 0034 : II-J FB244 Function block FB244
0014 purpose (e. g. using “Control 0036 NAME : SEND
0016 byte, bus master”). 0038 SSNR : KYO, I Page frame no. of CP530
0018 The “Slave numbers” data for O03AA-NR : KY0,43 Write polling list
OOIA the polling list are stored O03CANZW : FW60
Oolc in DB20 from DWI onwards. O03E QTYP : KSDB
OOIE The Send Block call should 0040 DBNR : KY0,20 Data in DB20
0020 be issued once only and is 0042 QANF : KF+l from DWI onwards
0022 monitored via a Control call 0044 QLAE : KF+4 4 words
0024 (call no. 34) in the cyclic 0046 PAFE : FY201
0026 user program. 0048 :
0028 O04A
O02A O04C
O04E :
0050
0052 : BE
DB20 SPRM-A
o KS= UMLI
1 KY= 001,002;
2 KY= 001,003;
3 KY= 001,004;
4 KY= 001,005
5
The SYSID list consists of various parameters, (see Section 2.2.1, p. 2-3). Each of these parameters is terminated with a carriage return ‘CR’, i. e.
ODH. Parameters that are not assigned consist of only ‘CR’, and only ASCII characters maybe used.

Layout of the SYSID list

‘CR’ O = Optional
M = Mandatory
Parameter 1 ‘CR’ o
Parameter 2 ‘CR’ 0
7

.— Parameter 3 ‘CR’ 0 I
Parameter 4 ‘CR’ o I
Parameter 7 ‘CR’

Parameter 12 ‘CR’ M I
Parameter 13 ‘CR’ o I
—.

—
— The SYSID DB must be generated in ‘KH’ format. The terminating

EL Parameter 18 ‘CR’ 7
o parameter ‘CR’ cannot be represented in ‘KS’ format.

2-21
2. Programming

2.4 S5-101 U as Slave

2.4.1 Initializing the S5-IOIU S5-101 U PC: DB 1

LEFT-HAND BYTE RIGHT-HAND BYTE —
The SYSID function has not yet been implemented for the
S5-101 U programmable controller. The slave number should DW . .
be programmed by STEP 5 statements. DW . .
The slave number must be identified as a constant with the
first two statements in the user program and, to distinguish it I Receive mailbox I
from applications without SINEC Ll, identified by a SYSTEM
flag, e. g.:
Ow 40 Length of data packet Source of data
DW 41 1st data item 2nd data i tern
Ist statement SF 63.0 – (unused SYSTEM flag) DW 72 63rd data item 64th data item
i
2nd statement L KF 11 — slave number= 11

The coordination bytes for receiving (CBR) and sending Send ma i 1 box
(CBS) are permanently defined in flag bytes FY 61 for receive Ow 80 Length of data packet Destination of data
and FY 62 for send. DW 81 1st data item 2nd data item
DW 112 63rd data item 64th data item
Send and receive buffer for the S5-101 U

The S5-101 U can receive and send a maximum of 64 data bytes in a block. A fixed area is reserved in data block 1 of the PC for the
SINEC LI receive and send mailboxes.

2.4.2 Program Examples

2.4.2.1 Receiving
Example:
A slave receives data only if no other slave connected to the bus has failed.

AF61.I A slave has failed A slave receives data only if it has been sent from the master.
IC = MO02
AF61.7 Permission to receive= 1 data invalid Data receive
IC = MOOI = O data valid AF61.7 Permission to receive= 1: Data invalid
IC = M 001 = O: Data valid
L DL41 Store data from flag byte 36 onwards L DR40 Source = master?
TFY36 L KF +0
L DR41 ><F
TFY37 IC = M 002
L DL42
TFY38 L DL41 Ist item of data received in FY36
L DR42 (flag byte)
TFY39 TFY36
L DR41 2nd item of data received in FY37
AN F61.7
TFY37
S F61.7 Receive mailbox has been
L DR42 3rd item of data received in FY38
evaluated and slave may
TFY38
MOOI : : accept new data.
L DR42 Qth item of data received in FY39
TFY39
A slave receives four items of data and prepares itself for
receiving new data M 002: AN F61.7
S F61.7 Receive mailbox evaluated and
Data receive slave can accept data
AF61.7 Permission to receive= 1: Received M 001:
IC = M 001 data invalid
L DL41 Store Ist item of data received in FY36
(flag byte)
TFY36
L DR41 Store 2nd item of data received in FY37
TFY37
L DL42 Store 3rd item of data received in FY38
TFY38
L DR42 Store 4th item of data received in FY39
TFY39
AN F61.7
S F61.7 Receive mailbox has been evaluated
and slave may accept new data
M 001:

2-22
 m
2. Programming

2.4 S5-101 U as Slave

2.4.2.2 Sending Interrupt: A slave sends an express message once onlv to the
— maste; PC:
A slave sends two items of data to the master.

A F62.7 If permission to send = 1, new

IC = M 001 data may no longer be written ONF32.O No interrupt (edge-triggered flag)
into the send mailbox. O F62.4 Interrupt is not processed;
mailbox must not be changed
L KF+O Destination = enter master in AF62.7
TDR80 send mailbox IC = M 001
L KF+2 Length = enter2 bytes in
TDL80 send mailbox L KF+O Destination = master
TDR80
L FW50 Transfer 2 bytes to send mailbox L KF+2 Length = 2
TDW81 TDL80
AN F62.7
L FW50 Transfer 2 data bytes to
S F62.7 Transfer contents of send mailbox
TDW81 send mailbox
MOOI : to bus

AN F62.7
S F62.7 Transfer contents of send mailbox
Interslave traffic: A slave sends two items of data to slave 3 S F62.4 to bus with interrupt request

M 001:
A F62.7 If permission to send = 1, new
IC = M 001 data may no Iongerbewritten
into the send mailbox.
A slave is only to send new data if the last transmission was
L KF=3 Destination = slave 3 free of error (CBR, bit no. O = F 62.0); otherwise the send re-
TDR80 quest is repeated.
L KF = 2 Length = 2 bytes
. TDL80 The user can define the number of repetitions by inserting a
counting loop at the position marked@
L FW50 Transfer 2 bytes to the send mailbox
TDW81

AN F62.7
S F62.7 Transfer contents of send mailbox to
MOOI : bus AF62.7 If permission to send = 1,
IC = MOOI no new data maybe written into
the send mailbox
@ AF62.O If previous error:
Broadcasting: A slave sends two items of data to all nodes IC = M 002 Repeat message
— participating in the bus
LK KF+O Destination = master
Caution: TDR80
L KF+2 Length = 2 bytes
This data is not acknowledged by any of the receiving nodes! TDL 80

L FW50 Transfer 2 data bytes to

TDW81 send mailbox

AN F62.7
S F62. 7 If permission to send = 1, M O 0 2 : S F62.7 Transfer contents of the
IC = M 001 new data may no longer be written send mailbox to bus
into the send mailbox MOO1:
L KF+31
TDR80 Destination = “to all”
L KF+2 Length = 2 bytes
TDL80

L FW50 Load 2 data bytes into send mailbox

TDW81
— AN F62.7
S F62.7

MOOI :

2-23
I
2. Programming

2.5 S5-I15U as Slave

~, 2.5.1 Parameter Assignment using SYSID

—
If the CPU of the S5-115 is connected direct to the SINEC LI network, it reacts in a similar way to the S5-101 U, the only differences
being the coordination flags and the position of the send and receive mailboxes. The coordination flags are defined as a flag word
by the user with the aid of the SYSID function. The left-hand byte contains the receive coordination flag bits and the right-hand byte
the send coordination flag bits (parameter 11).
The send mailbox (parameter 12) is defined in a similar manner: it may be located in the data or flag area. In the case of data blocks,
the user specifies the DB number and the data word number from which the mailbox starts in the data block.
In the case of flags, the number of the flag word at which the mailbox begins is specified.

The receive mailbox (parameter 13) is similar to the send mailbox; both mailboxes maybe located in different areas and in different
DBs.

The table below contains an overview of the SYSID data possible in the S5-115 CPU. Since the SYSID function is not yet supported
by programmers on CPUS, parameters cannot be assigned with SYSID as described below, but via OB22 using STEP 5 statements.
This is described in Section 2.5.2.

General parameters

Field Definition Examples Formats Max.

length
1 Module identifier CP 530 ace. to MLFB 8
1P nnn (ordering
931 B CPU code)
2 Firmware version v– 1.2 free 8
identifer Z03
3 Plant identification Shop l-M/C-4AG7 free 19
4 Generation date 2--10/83 free 8
7 Slave No. on pro- --/10 *) PG PG/-- 5
grammer (PG) bus/ -8/-4 SINEC LI --/n
SINEC LI -7/_ PG/SINEC LI : PG/mm

Special parameters for the S5-115U

Field Definition Examples Formats Max.

length

@ Address of coordination 123 Flag area of the 3

flag word S5-115U
@ Address of send mailbox D-37-235 D = data block 8
Area: F-10 F = flag area
Block No.: *1)
Word address:

@ Address of receive D-4-1 D = data block 8

mailbox F-17 F = flag area
Block No.: *1)
Word address:

Explanation of special parameters 11 to 13

@Address of the coordination flag word

The number of a flag word or byte at which the coordination flags begin is specified here:
The first byte contains the coordination flags for RECEIVE and the next byte in memory the coordination flags for SEND. The coordina-
tion flags must be located in the non-retentive flag area (otherwise there is a danger of coordination errors).

@Address of thesendmailbox:
This mailbox may be located in the data or flag area (“D” or “F”). If located in the “D” area, a valid “DB” number must be specified as
well as the word address in this DB at which the send mailbox begins; if in the “F” area, a valid word address is necessary in the flag
area.

@)Addressof thereceivernsilbox
As for the send mailbox;
the send and receive mailboxes may be located in the same area or data block or independently of each other in different areas or
different DBs.

2-24
 m
2. Programming

2.5 S5-115U as Slave

2.5.2 Parameter Assignment from OB 22

The operating system of the 941 CPU supports operation of the SINEC LI master (CP 530) by means of data handling blocks which
are available as integral function blocks from software release Z08 onwards.

2.5.2.1 Using the SINEC L1 LAN Bus

With each data transmission on the Ll, control and status information is also sent. This information is made available to the STEP 5
user program via a coordination byte. The actual data in receive and send mailboxes which the user can access with load and trans-
fer operations.

Slave number:

The slave number is used to assign the number by which it can be addressed on the L1 bus. It must lie in the range 1–30 inclusive.

Coordination bytes Send/Receive (CBS/CBR)

These bytes represent the interface between the user program and the operating system. They are set as follows by the operating
system on warm restart following power recovery.

CBR = 80 H = ==> Permission to receive

CBS =00 H

2-25
I
2. Programming

2.5 S5-I15U as Slave

Coordination Byte, RECEIVE (CBR) Coordination Byte SEND (CBS)

2 7 20
I I I rrrrl I
ERROR Receive error in last data

L
~ROR Senderroroccurred
SLAVE-FAIL A slave on the bus has failed during last transfer

[ &rved
BUS-RUN The bus is in the RUN state reserved

INTERRUPT Slave requests a bus interrupt

INTERRUPT This message comes with an interrupt

s
RECV-PRM The user gives permission for the operating SEND-PRM User releases data in send-mailbox for
system to write into the receive mailbox transmission

❑ Bit from bus master

❑ Bit for bus master

The coordination bytes are managed by the operating system and may not be used for any other purpose.

The Send Mailbox:

This may be up to 66 bytes long. The user must place the data that is to be sent in the send mailbox starting at byte 3.
The layout is as follows:

Length of the net data Byte 2 Destination No.

(O. . . 64) (0... 300r31) 1)

E
Byte 3 1st data byte Byte 4 I 2 n d d a t a b y t e
Byte 5 3rd data bvte Byte 6 4th data byte
Net
data

Byte63 61st data byte Byte64 62nd data byte

Byte65 63rd data byte Byte66 64th data byte
1) Slave. NJo, O 4 Master
31 Q Broadcast

The Receive Mailbox:

The receive mailbox may be up to 66 bytes long.

The layout is as follows:

Byte 1 Length of net data Byte2 Source No.

(O. 64) (o. 30)’
Byte 3 1st data byte Byte 4 2nd data byte
Byte 5 3rd data byte I Byte 6 4th data byte
Net
data

Byte 63 61st data byte Byte64 62nd data byte

Byte 65 63rd data byte Byte 66 64th data byte

3 Slave No. O G Master

2-26
 2. Programming

2.5 S5-I15U as Slave

2.5.2.2 Parameter Assignment for the SINEC LI Slave Firmware

When using the S5-I15U CPU type 941/942/943, it is possible to program the location of the coordination bytes and of the send and
receive mailboxes. The SINEC LI parameter block is in the system data area SD from word 57 onwards.

The SINEC LI parameter block:

SD 57 PG bus address Slave number

CBR CBR
SD 58 Location type DB or flag number
CBR CBS
SD 59 DWnumber Data identifier
CBS CBS
SD 60 DB or flag number DWnumber
SM SM
SD 61 Data identifier DB or flag number
SM RM
SD 62 DWnumber Data identifier
RM RM
SD 63 DB or flag number DW number

CBS/CBR (Coordination Bytes, Send/Receive)

The locations of the coordination bytes are defined in each case by three data locations
They can be defined either as a flag byte or in the left-hand byte (DL) of the data word.
Coordination byte in data block:
Coordination byte in flag area:

The coordination bytes are in the left-hand byte (DL) of the data word.

SM/RM (Send/Receive Mailbox)

The beginning of the send and receive mailboxes is defined by three data bytes in each case. Parameter assignment is as described
for the coordination bytes.

Mailbox overflow
If more data is received than will fit within the mailbox, the mailbox overflows and the data is lost. No error message results.
The end of the receive mailbox is determined as follows: for the flag area this is flag byte 255 and for the data area the last data
word. In 256 word long data blocks it is data word 255.

2-27
I
2. Programming

2.5 S5-I15U as Slave

Example for programming SINEC L1.

The parameters are set in (OB21 ) OB 22, using auxiliary FB 255 to enter the parameters. Any other unassigned FB could have been
used instead of FB 255.

FB 255 SPRM-A
Segment 1
NAME : L1-PG/DA
.- .- ,- ,- .- - ./. . . . ,,,. , ,,, - ,,/- ,,.? ,,, ,. ,,/- ,.. ,
ID ‘: --
I-WDA IIQIUIW I IG : U KMIKHIKYIKSIKtf K I IKLIKti : KY
ID : TCBR IIQIDIBITIC : D KMIKHIKYIKSIKFIKTIKCIKG : KS
ID : NCBR l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KC/KG : KY
ID : TCBS l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KM/KH/KYIKS/KFIKTIKCIKG : K S
ID : NCBS llQ/D/B/T/C : D KM/KH/KY/KS/KFIKT/KCIKG : K Y
ID : TSM IIQIDIBITIC : D KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KTIKCIKG : KS
ID : NSM l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KCIKG : KY
ID : TRM l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KMIKHIKYIKSIKFIKTIKCIKG : K S
ID : NRM l/Q/DIB/T/C : D KM/KH/KYIKSIKFIKTIKC/KG : KY

0040 : LW =PGDA LI -PG-BUS/Ll-DATABUS-SLAVE-N O.

0042 :T FW200
0044
0046
0048 : LW =TCBR Type of coordination byte “R”
O04A :T FW202 (Receive)
O04C Meaning of the FB255 parameters:
O04E : LW =NCBR Address of CBR
0050 :T FW203 DB or FB number/DW number PGDA: Programmer bus address/ data slave address
0052 KYa, b
0054 : LW =TCBS Type of coordination byte “S” a) Programmer bus address
0056 :T FW205 (Send) b) data slave number
0058 TCBR/TCBS: Type of coordination byte RECEIVE/SEND
O05A : LW =NCBS Address of CBS KS Q possible identifier
O05C :T FW206 DB or FB number/DW number FY A flag byte
O05E DW Q left-hand data byte
0060 : LW =TSM Type of send mailbox NCBR/NCBS Number or address of coordination byte
0062 :T FW208 RECEIVE/SEND
0064 : LW =NSM Address of send mailbox KYa,b
0066 :T FW209 a) For type FY A number of flag byte
0068 : LW =TRM Type of receive mailbox For type DW A number of data block
O06A :T FW211 b) For type FY Q “O”
O06C : LW =NRM Address of receive mailbox For type DW G number of data word
O06E :T FW212 (left-hand data byte)
0070 TSM/TRM: Type of SEND/RECEIVE mailbox
0072 :L KHEED5 Transfer from F area into SD (system KS: FY L flag byte and
0076 :L KHEA7F data area) DB A data byte are possible
O07A :TNB 14 NSM/NRM: Number of SEND/RECEIVE mailbox
O07C KYa, b
O07E :L KHOOOO Erase working flag words a) Type FY Q number of flagbyte at which
0082 :T FW200 the Send/Receive mailbox begins.
0084 :T FW202 Type DB A number of data block
0086 :T FW204 b) Type FY 4 “O”
0088 :T FW206 Type DB Q number of data word at which the
O08A :T FW208 Send/Receive mailbox begins.
O08C :T FW210
O08E :T FW212
0090
0092 : BE

2-28
 m
2. Programming

2.5 S5-I15U as Slave

2.5.3 Programming Examples OB 1 SPRM-B LNG = 34ABS

Page 1
Send to test date integrity Segment 1
OB21 SPRM-A LNG = 13ABS 0000 I15U CPU as slave on
Page 1 0002 : SINEC LI network bus
Segment 1 0004
0000 : 0006
0002 : I15U CPU as slave 0008 : II-J FB 1 Function block FBI
0004 OOOA NAME : SINEC LI
0006 : IU F8113 Function block FBl13 Oooc
0008 NAME : SINEC LI OOOE : BE
OOOA
Oooc
OOOE : BE FBI SPRM-A

Segment 1
OB22 SPRM-A LNG = 14 ABS NAME :SINEC LI
Page 1
Segment 1 OOOA :A DB 100 Data-DB
0000 Oooc :
0002 OOOE :0 F 1,0 Disable receive flag
0004 : I15U CPU as slave 0010 :0 F61,7 Receive CBRdata flag
0006 0012 : IC =IUMI lump if no data received
0008 : IU FB113 Function block FBI13 0014 :
OOOA NAME : SINEC LI 0016 : AN F 1,0 Disable setting of receive flag
Oooc : 0018 :s F 1,0
OOOE OOIA
0010 : BE Oolc :L DW40 Relocate length/source to
OOIE :T DW80 length/destination
0020 :L DW41 Relocate data
FB 113 SPRM-A 0022 :T DW81
0024 :
. Segment 1 0026 : AN F61,7 Message from user progr. ==> BESY
Name: SINEC-LI 0028 :s F61,7 Receive mailbox free
O02A :
OOOA Call function block FB255for O02CIUMI :
Oooc : direct ccmnection of an s5-115u O02E ; AN F 1,0 End if no data received
OOOE : 941/942 CPU as slave to the 0030 : BEB
0010 : SINEC LI network bus 0032
0012 : JU FB255 Function block FB255 0034 :0 F 1,1 Disable send flag
0014 NAME : L1-PG/DA 0036 :0 F62,7 Send CBS flag
0016 PGDA : KYO,I Slave No.: 1 0038 : IC =IUM2 lump if no receive mailbox free
0018 TCBR : KSFY Type of CBR is “FB” (flag byte) O03A
OOIA NCBR : KY61,0 CBRisflag byte61 O03C : AN F 1,1 Set flag for “Send disable”
OOICTCBS : KSFY Type of CBR is “FB” (flag byte) O03E :s F 1,1
001 E NCBS : KY62,0 CBRisflag byte62 0040 :
0020 TSM : KSDB Type of send mailbox “DB” 0042 : AN F62,7 Send message from user
0022 NSM : KY1OO,8O Send mailbox in DBIOOfrom DW80up 0044 :s F62,7 progr. ==> BESY
0024 TRM : KSDB Type of receive mailbox in “DB” 0046 :R F 1,2 Reset aux, edge flag
0026 NRM : KYIO0,40 Receive mailbox in DBIOOfrom DW40 up 0048 IUM2 :
0028 O04A : Edge evaluation for Send
O02A : BE O04C completed
O04E : AN F62,7 CBS Send flag
Caution: 0050 : AN F 1,2 Aux. edge flag
A CPU acting as slave returns data to the Sender. The 0052 : = F 1,3 “Send completed” edge flag
returning of data is monitored by evaluating Send Error Bit 0054 ;A F 1,3
CBS bit O and, if necessary, repeated. 0056 :s F 1,2
0058 :
O05A :A F 1,3 “Send completed” edge
O05C : AN F62,0 “Send error” CBS flag
O05E :R F 1,0 Receive enable
0060 :R F 1,1 Send enable
0062 :A FI03 “Send ready” edge
0064 :A F62,0 “Send error” CBS flag
0066 :R F 1,1 Send enable for repeat
0068
O06A : BE

2-29
2. Programming

2.6 Example of Small Parts Plant

Parameter Assignment with the CPU 102 Programming Example with the CPU 102
The control program has to handle the following tasks: .
Declarations:
● Coordination byte, receive (CBR)- flag byte FY 100 . The Send and Receive mailboxes must be enabled, and the
● Coordination byte, send (CBS) - flag byte FY 101 data in these mailboxes processed.
● Send mailbox -
d a t a b l o c k DB2 f r o m ● The coordination bytes must be managed (e. g, send job,
DWO error evalution)
● Receive mailbox (RM) -
d a t a b l o c k DB3 f r o m Example:
DWO Data traffic with the Master as Slave 1
● Flag bytes FY64 to 77 are used as buffers. Declarations:
● Slave 1 receives 3 bytes from Master O.
● The information is stored in the PIQ (QBO, QBI, QB2).
● Slave 1 sends 3 bytes (IBO, IBI, IB2) to the Master.
● Parameter assignments is implemented in FBI, as shown in
Fig. 11.6
Programming the individual blocks:
OB22 SPRM-A
SEGMENT1
FB1O SPRM-A IU F1 OB22executesonce following power-up,
It calls FBI, which assigns the slave parameters,
NAME: PARA 102 BE
L KF 1 - Loadslave No. OB1 SPRM-A
T FY 65 andstorein flag byte65
SEGMENT I
L KH 4DO0 - Load “Flag” data identifier
IU FB2 OB1 executes cyclically, It calls FB2, which services
T FW 66 and store in flag byte66
the Send and Receive mailboxes,
L KY 100.0 - Load flag byte lOOand BE
T FW 67 store in flag byte67
- Load ’’Flag’’ identifierand FB2 SPRM-A
L KH 4DO0
T FW 69 store in flag byte 69 SEGMENT1
L KY 101.0 - Load flag byte 101 andstore NAME: PROG 102
T FW 70 in flag byte 70 c DB3 Receive mailbox (DB3)
L KH 4400 - Load “Dataword” identifier A FIO0,7 Check whether access to Receive mailbox isallowed,
T FW 72 and store in flag byte72 CBR/bit 7 = O: access allowed
CBR/bit 7 = 1: access prohibited
L KY 2,0 - Load DBNo. “2’’and DBNo. “3”
IC = MOO1 Skip Receive box evaluation if access prohibited
T Fw 73 in flag bytes 73abd 74
L DRO Check whether number of source (MasterO)
L KH 4400 - Load “dataword” identifierand L KF+ O is in byte 2 of the Receive mailbox
T FW 75 store in flag byte 75 ><F
L KY 3.0 - Store DBNo, ”3” and DWNo. ”0” IC = MO02 Skipevaluationof Receive mailbox
T FW 76 in flag bytes 76 and 77 if source No, = O
- Transferflagarea FY64to DLI
77tothesystem data area \ ABO
L KH EE4D - Load upper source address L DRI Transfer Receive mailbox to
L KH EA7F - Load upper destination address T QBI the PIQ
T NB 14 - Transferdata frameof 14 Bytes L DL2
Reset all buffers. QB2
L KH 0000 - Load hexadecimal number ’’OOOO” M2: ~N FIOO,I Set CBR/bit 7to ”1”, i.e. permit PCaccess
T FW 64 - Setallbits of FY64t077to “O” Program access isnot permitted again
T FW 66 s FIOO.7 until the PC has reset this bit.
T FW 68 Ml: A F1OI.7 Check whether access is permitted to Send
mailbox,
T FW 70
CBS/bit 7 = O: access permitted
T FW 72
CBS/bit 7 =1: access prohibited
T FW 74
IC = MO03 Skip evaluation of Send mailbox
T FW 76 if access prohibited
CBRdefault setting: c DB2 Call Send mailbox (DB2)
Data can be received from the bus, KF+ 3 Specify length of data packet
L KH 0080 - Load binary number lOOOOOOO : DLO in byte 1 of Send mailbox
T FY 100 - Set bit7to “l” and bits6.. .Oto “O” KF+ O Load destination No, O(Master)
CBS default setting: \ DRO in byte 2 of Send mailbox
Program hasaccesstothe Send mailbox L IB3
T DL1 Load input bytes3, 4and 5 in
L KH 0000 - Load binary numberOOOOOOOO L IB4 Send mailbox
T FY 101 - Set bits7. .. Oto ”O” T DRI
BE Block end L IB5
T DL2
AN FIOI.7 Set CBS/bit 7, i, e, PC may access —
s F1OI.7 Send mailbox
M3: NOP O
:BE

2-30
 -
2. Programming

2.6 Example of Small Parts Plant

A plant for manufacturing small parts from bar stock consists of three substations (S5-101 U slaves)
—.
Station 1 supplies station 2 with raw material from the bar magazine.
Station 2 machines the raw material and passes the finished part on to station 3.
Station 3 checks whether the manufacturing tolerances have been adhered to.

A master station supplies the slaves with data and also receives data from the slaves.

Monitoring station

m
Master
CPU :{0
115 M

Bar stock
uTest
S5 -101 u
slave 3

magazine

-
1 -

Fig. 2-6 Layout of a small parts manufacturing plant

Examples of STEP 5 programs:

Example 1: Data exchange between the master and slave 3

The master tells slave 3 which dimensions of the finished part are to be tested and which manufacturing tolerances can be
accepted. The three-byte long block of data is stored by the slave in flag bytes FY 36 to FY 38.
For statistical purposes, slave 3 informs the master which manufacturing tolerances have occurred. The two-byte long data word
is stored in FW 50. Data is to be transferred to the master only once at the end of each test operation. For this purpose, flag F 32.0
is set by the control program at the end of the test operation.

Name: EXAMPLE 1

0006 :s F63.O
0008 :L KF+3
OOOA A I 0.0 Control program forslave3
Oooc :
OOOE
0010

2-31
2. Programming

2.7 Example of Small Parts Plant

0012 := Q 1.0
0014
0016 :
0018 : RECEIVE DATA
OOIA
Oolc A F61.7 Permission to receive= 1: data received
001 E : IC = MOOI not valid; slave is receiving data
0020 :
0022 Evaluate receive mailbox:
0024 :L DR40 Source
0026 :L KF+O Accept only data from O (master)
O02A : ><F
O02C : IC = FO04
O02E
0030 :L DL41 Store Ist item of data received in FY36
0032 :T FY36 (flag byte FY36)
0034 :L DR41 Store 2nd item of data received in FY37
0036 :T FY37 (flag byte FY37)
0038 :L DL42 Store 3rd item of data received in FY38
O03A :T FY38 (flag byte FY38)
O03C
O03E MO04 : A N F61.7 Permission to receive= 1: data received
0040 :s F61.7 have been evaluated and slave may accept
0042 new data
0044
0046 :
0048 SEND DATA
O04A
O04C MOOI : A F62.7 Permission to send= 1: slave sends
O04E : I C = MO02 but send mailbox may not be changed
0050
0052 Edit send mailbox:
0054 : ~peration not compw
0056 :L KF+O Length: O
O05A :T DL80
O05C :L KF+O Destination slave: O (master)
0060 :T DR80
0062 : A N F32.O F 32.0= 1: Test operation completed
0064 : IC = MO03
0066 ~peration comp~
0068 :L KF+2 Length: 2
O06C :T DL80
O06E
0070 :L FW50 FW50: Manufacturing tolerances
0072 :T DW81 (Ist and2nd items of data sent)
0074 A F32.O Reset “Test operation completed”
0076 :R F32.O identifier
0078
O 0 7 A MO03 ; AN F62.7 Permission to send= 1: send mailbox
O07C :s F62,7 ready to send
O07E MO02 : NOP O
0080
0082 : BE

Example 2: a) Data exchange between the master and slave 1

b)Data exchange between slave 1 and slave 2 (interslave traffic)

a) The master informs slave 1 of the magazine compartment in which it will find the raw material for the next processing batch. Slave
1 stores this information in flag byte FY 35.
Slave 1 tells the master how many bars of raw material have been removed from the particular magazine compartment. For this
purpose, the current status of counter CO is transferred.

b) Slave 1 accepts the data byte sent by slave 2 and maps bit 1 to flag F 34.0 of its flag area (F 34.0 = 1: supply new bar of raw ma-
terial).

2-32
 -
2. Programming

2.7 Example of Small Parts PIant

Name: Example 1
.—
0006 :s F63.O
0008 :L KF+I
OOOA :A I 0.0 Control program for slave 1
Oooc
OOOE : :
0010
0012 := Qo.o
0014
0016 :
0018 RECEIVE DATA
OOIA
Oolc ;A F61,7 Permission to receive= 1: data received
OOIE : IC = MOOI invalid; slave receiving data
0020
0022 :L DR40 Source
0024 :L KF+O Source: master?
0028 : ><F
O02A : IC = MO02
O02C Evaluate receive mailbox from master
O02E
0030 :L DL41 Store number of magazine compartment in FY35 (flag byte FY35)
0032 :T FY35 (Ist item of data received)
0034 :
0036 :IU = MO03 Permission to receive= 1: receive mailbox has
0038 been evaluated; slave may accept new data
O03A M 002 : L DR40 Source
O03C :L KF+2 Source: slave 2?
0040 : ><F
0042 : IC = MO03
0044 Evaluate receive mailbox of slave2
— 0046
0048 :L DL41 Map bit Oto F34.O
O04A :L FY34 (lst item of data received: OOOOOOOX)
O04C : Ow
O04E :T FB34 (flag byte FY34)
0050
0 0 5 2 MO03 : A N F61.7 Permission to receive= 1: receive mailbox
0054 :s F61.7 has been evaluated; slave may accept new data
0056
0058 :
O05A
O05C SEND DATA
O05E
0 0 6 0 MOO1 : A F62.7 Permission to send= 1: slave sending data;
0062 : IC = MO04 send mailbox may not be changed
0064
0066
0068 Edit send mailbox
O06A :L KF+2 Length: 2 (counter contents take up 2 bytes)
O06E :T DL80
0070 :L KF+O Destination slave: O (master)
0074 :T DR80
0076
0078 :L C O Number of bars removed
O07A :T DW81 (lst and 2nd items of data sent)
O07C
O 0 7 E MO02 : A N F62.7 Permission to send= 1: send mailbox
0080 :s F62.7
0 0 8 2
0 0 8 4 MO04 ; NOP O
0086
. 0088 : BE

2-33
I
2. Programming

2.7 Example of Small Parts Plant

Example 3: a) Data exchange between the master and slave 2

b) Data exchange between slave 2 and slave 1 (interslave traffic) —

a) The master sends slave 2 a three-byte long identifier telling it in coded form how the raw material is to be machined. Slave 2
stores this information in flag bytes FY 38 to FY 40.
Slave 2 tells the master which machining step the control system is at that moment. This information is contained in flag byte
FY 10.

b) The control program of slave 2 sets flag F 34.0 when slave 1 is to supply a new bar of raw material. Slave 2 informs slave 1 of the
status of this flag. Slave 1 then transfers the status of this flag. Slave 1 then transfers the status of the flag to F 34.0 of its flag
area.

NAME: EXAMPLE 1

0006 :s F63.O
0008 :L KF+2
OOOA A I 0.0 Control program for slave 2
Oooc :
OOOE
0010
0012 := Q i.o
0014
0016
0018 : RECEIVE DATA
OOIA
Oolc A F61.7 Permission to receive= 1: data received
001 E :IC= MOOI invalid; slave receiving data
0020
0022 Evaluate receive mailbox:
0024 :L DR40 Source
0026 :L KF+O Accept only data from source O (master)
O02A : ><F
O02C : IC= MO04
O02E Data for parts machining
0030 :L DL41 Store Ist item of data received in flag byte FY38
0032 :T FY38
0034 :L DR41 Store 2nd item of data received in flag byte FY39
0036 :T FY39
0038 :L DL42 Store 3rd item of data received in flag byte FY40
O03A :T FY40
O03C
O03E MO04 ; A N F61.7 Permission to receive= 1: receive mailbox
0040 :s F61.7 has been evaluated; slave may accept new data
0042
0044
0046 :
0048 SEND DATA
O04A
O04C MOOI ~ A F62.7 Permission to send= 1: slave is sending data;
O04E :IC= MO02 send mailbox may not be changed
0050
0052 :A F60.O F60.O = 1: supply send mailbox of slave 1
0054 A F34.O with new raw material
0056 :IC = MO03
0058
O05A : Edit send mailbox for master
O05C
O05E :L KF+l Length: 1
0062 :T DL80
0064 :L KF+O Destination slave: O (master)
0068 :T DR80
O06A :L FY 10 FY 10 (flag byte 10): active machining step
O06C :T DL81 (Ist item of data sent)
O06E
0070 : A N F62.7 Permission to send= 1: send mailbox ready
0072 :s F62,7 to send

2-34
 2. Programming

2.7 Example of Small Parts Plant

0074 :s F60.O F60.O = 1: send mailbox slave 1

0076 : JU = MO02
0078
O07A Edit send mailbox for slave 1
O07C
O07E MO03 ; L KF+l Length: 1
0082 :T DL80
0084 :T DR80 Destination slave: 1
0086
0088 :L FY34 Transfer F 34.0 only
O08A :L KF+I
O08E : AVV Mask out F34.I to F34.7
0090 :T DL81 (Ist item of data sent)
0092
0094 : A N F62.7 Permission to send = 1: send mailbox
0096 :s F62.7 ready to send
0098 :R F60.O F60.O = O: send mailbox of master
O09A
O09C MO02 ; NOP O
O09E : BE
..

2-35
I
3. A p p e n d i x

3.1 Matrix of the Data Handling Block Numbers in the Various PCs

The “Data handling blocks” program package contains the following function blocks (FBs):

For S5- I15U’) 135U with 150U

S processor’) R processor

SEND FB 244 FB 120 FB 120 FB 180

RECEIVE FB 245 FB 121 FB 121 FB 181
FETCH FB246 FB 122 FB 122 FB 182
CONTROL FB 247 FB 123 FB 123 FB 183
RESET FB 248 FB 124 FB 124 FB 184
SYNCH RON FB 249 FB 125 FB 125 FB 185
ACTIVE — FB 126 —
UP ACTIV FB 127 — —
SEND-A — FB 126
REC-A . — FB 127

I) In the case of the s5-I15u, these function blocks are contained in the operating system of the CPU.
2) The data handling blocks of the S processor differ from the others with respect to queue processing (see ACTIVE and UP ACTIV
function blocks).

3-1
 m
3. Appendix

3.2 Standard FBs for CPU — CP 530 Traffic

FY 244 “SEND”
—.
FY244 SPRM-A LNG = 35 SYM
Page 1
Segment 1
NAME : SEND
ID : SSNR l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KC/KG : KY
ID : A-NR l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KC/KG : KY
ID : ANZW l/Q/D/B/T/C : I BIIBYIWID : W
ID : QTYP l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KC/KG : KS
ID : DBNR l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KC/KG : KY
ID : QANF l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KC/KG : KF
ID : QLAE l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KMIKH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KC/KG : KF
ID : PAFE l/Q/D/B/T/C : Q B1/BY/W/D : BY

O03A : BE

Description:

The SEND block is used for initiating a “Send data” request to the CP 530.

Description of parameters:

SSNR: Number of logic interface

A-NR: Interface request to be initiated (send message)

ANZW: Address of the condition code double word (address ANZW and ANZW + 1) in which processing of the initiated request is
flagged to the user.

— QTYP: Type of data source from which the data are to be transferred to the CP.

DBNR: Number of data block for QTYP XX, SS, DB and DX

QANF: “Relative starting address” of the data source

QLAE: Number of source data

PAFE: Error condition codes in response to parameter assignment errors

FY244
..-----------------
-- ! SEND !
0,1 -- ! SSNR PAFE ! - - F Y 9 9
0,3 -- ! A-NR !
DW 100 -- ! ANZW !
DB -- ! QTYP !
02 00 -- ! DBNR !
+1 -- ! QANF !
+64 - - ! QLAE !
-------------------

3-2
I
3. A p p e n d i x

3.2 Standard FBs for CPU — CP 530 Traff ic

FY 245 “RECEIVE”

FY245 -RECEIVE SPRM-A LNG = 35 SYM

Page 1
Segment 1
NAME : RECEIVE
ID : SSNR l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KC/KG : KY
ID : A-NR l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KC/KG : KY
ID : ANZW l/Q/D/B/T/C : I B1/BY/W/D : W
ID : ZTYP l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KC/KG : KS
ID : DBNR l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KC/KG : KY
ID : ZANF l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KC/KG : KF
ID : ZLAE l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KC/KG : KF
ID : PAFE l/Q/D/BIT/C : Q B1/BY/W/D : BY

O03A :BE

Description:

The RECEIVE block is used for examining whether there is a request on the CP 530.

Description of parameters:

SSNR: Number of the logic interface

A-NR: Number of the receive message to be fetched on the CP.

ANZW: Address of condition code double word in which processing of the request is flagged to the user.

ZTYP: Type of data destination in which the data of the CP are to be entered

DBNR: Number of the data block for ZTYP XX, DB and DX

ZANF: Relative starting address of the data block

ZLAE: Number of data items to be accepted (length of net data + 4)

PAFE: Condition codes in response to parameter assignment errors

FY245
------------------
! RECEIVE !
0,1 -- ! SSNR PAFE ! -- FY 100
0,2 -- ! A-NR !
DW 101 -- ! ANZW !
DB -- ! ZTYP !
02 01 -- ! DBNR !
+1 -- ! ZANF !
+64 -- ! ZLAE !
------------------

3-3
 m
3. Appendix

3.2 Standard FBs for S5 I15U ——— CP 530 Traff ic

FY 247 “CONTROL”

FY247 -CONTROL SPRM-A LGN = 23 SYM

Page 1
Segment 1
N A-ME : CONTROL
ID : SSNR l/CVD/B/T/C : D KM/KH/KY/KSIKFIKT/KC/KG : KY
ID : A-NR IIQIDIBITIC : D KM/KHIKYIKSIKFIKT/KC/KG : KY
ID : ANZW l/QID/BIT/C : I BIIBYIWID : W
ID : PAFE l/QID/B/T/C : Q B1/BY/W/D : BY

0022 : BE

Description:

The CONTROL block performs the following functions:

— Updating of the condition code word if the associated request was initiated in an interrupt branch (SEND)

— Scanning of the CP to determine whether a definite request of an interface module is active

— Scanning of the CP to determine which request is being processed

No acknowledgements take place between the CONTROL block and the interface module; the control block only transfers the con-
dition codes from the “Request status” to the initialized condition code word. The block does not depend on the RLO (result of the
logic operation) and must be linked into the cyclic part of the STEP 5 program section by the user.

Description of parameters:

SSNR: Interface number

—
A-NR: CP 530 request to be monitored to tell whether a message is present or not

ANZW: Condition code word in which the result of the scan is flagged to the user

PAFE: Condition code byte for parameter assignment errors

FY247
----------------
! CONTROL !
0,1 -- ! SSNR PAFE ! -- FY 101
0,3 -- ! A-NR !
Dw 210 -- ! ANZW !
----------------

FY 248 “RESET”

FY248 -RESET SPRM-A LGN = 20 SYM

Page 1
Segment 1
NAME : RESET
ID : SSNR IIQIDIBITIC : D KM/KHIKYIKS/KFIKT/KCtKG : KY
ID : A-NR i/Q/D/BIT/C : D KMIKHIKYIKSIKFIKTIKC/KG : KY
ID : PAFE l/Q/D/B/T/C : Q BIIBYIWID : BY

001 c : BE

— Description:

The “RESET” function block knows the following operating mode in conjunction with the CP 530:
— RESET all; resets all requests of this logical interface to which parameters have been assigned

3-4
I
3. A p p e n d i x

3.2 Standard FBs for S5 I15U ——— CP 530 Traffic

Description of parameters:

SSNR: Logical interface number

A-NR: Request number

PAFE: Error condition codes in response to parameter assignment errors

H 248
----------- ------
! RESET !
0,1 -- ! SSNR PAFE ! -- FY 102
0,0 -- ! A-NR !
--- - ----- - - ---- .-

FY 249“SYNCHRON”

FY249 -SYNCH RON SPRM-A LGN = 20 SYM

Page 1
Segment 1
NAME : SYNCHRON
ID : SSNR l/Q/D/B/T/C : D KM/KH/KY/KS/KF/KT/KC/KG : KY
ID : BLGR l/CJ/D/B/T/C : D KMIKHIKYIKSIKFIKTIKCIKG : KY
ID : PAFE l/Q/D/B/T/C : Q B1/BY/W/D : BY

Oolc : BE

Description:

The block synchronizes the PC with the CP 530 on restart of the PC. At the same time, the transfer area of the interface is erased
and initialized and the packet size between the CP 530 and the PC defined.

Description of parameters:

SSNR: Logical interface number

BLGR: Packet size

PAFE: Parameter assignment error

Block sizes:

OQ Standard size Note:

1 Q 16 bytes The packet size in the case of the CP 530 from version 2.0 onward is
2 & 32 bytes preset at 5 Q 256 bytes and cannot be changed.
3 G 64 bytes
4A 128 bytes
5& 256 bytes
6& 512 bytes

FY 249
---------------
! SYNCHRON !
0,1 -- ! SSNR PAFE ! -- FY 103
0,0 -- ! BLGR !
---------------

3-5
 m
3. Appendix

3.3 User Manipulation of the Condition Code Word

a) Bit O Handshake Meaningful

Setl By the data handling blocks in keeping with the condition code in the request status byte.
Reset: Handshake bit (= 1) is only meaningful with the RECEIVE block (as information on whether a message is present or
not),
Evaluation: By user for RECEIVE enquiry (enquiry as to whether message is present or not).

b) Bit 1 Request Executing

Set: By the data handling blocks if request issued to CP
Reset: By the data handling blocks if a request is processed by the CP (e. g. acknowledgement received).
Evaluation: By the data handling blocks
A new request is only issued if the “old” request has been processed
By the user
in order to find out whether it is meaningful to trigger a new request or not.

c) Bit 2 Request Completed Without Errors

Set: By the data handling blocks if the corresponding request has been completed without errors.
Reset: By the data handling blocks if the request has been retriggered.
Evaluation: By the user in order to check whether the request has been completed without error,

d) Bit 3 Request Completed With Error

Set: By the handling blocks if the corresponding request has been completed with error, The cause of the error is then in
the high byte of the condition code word in coded form.
Reset: By the data handling blocks if the request is retriggered.
Evaluation: By the user in order to check whether the request has been completed with error or not. If the “Requestcompleted with
error” identifier bit is set, the cause of the error can be read from the high byte of the condition code word.

e) Bit 4 Data Acceptance/Data Transfer Executing

Set: By the SEND and RECEIVE data handling blocks if transfer/acceptance has been started for a request, e. g. if data is
being exchanged in response to the broadcasting function (DMA substitute), but the request has been initiated with
SEND direct.
—
Reset: By the SEND and RECEIVE data handling block if the data exchange for a request is terminated (last partial block of
data transmitted).
Evaluation: By the user
During data transmission from the CP to the PC, the user is not allowed to make any further changes to the packet of
a request. In the case of packets shorter than the blocking limit, this is uncritical since data exchange can be imple-
mented in one block pass. However, larger quantities of data can only be transmitted in packet form with blocking
distributed over a number of PC cycles. In order to ensure data integrity, the user must therefore first check whether
the data packet has just been transmitted before he changes the data of a request.

f) Bit 5 Data Transfer Completed

Set: By the SEND data handling block when data transfer for a request has taken place.
Reset: By the SEND data handling block when the transfer of data for a new request (retriggering) has been started.
By the user if evaluation has already taken place (pulse edge generation).
Evaluation: By the user
This bit can tell the user whether the packet for a request has already been transmitted to the CP or when a new packet
can be readied for a current request.

g) Bit 6 Data Acceptance Completed

Set: By the RECEIVE data handling block if the acceptance of data for a request has been completed.
Reset: By the RECEIVE data handling block if transfer of the data to the PC has started for a new request (retriggering).
By the user if evaluation has been completed (pulse edge generation).
Evaluation: By the user
This bit tells the user whether the record of a request has already been transferred to the PC or when a new record for
the current request has been transferred to the PC.

h) Bit 7 Disable/Enable Data Block

By the user in order to prevent writing into an area by the RECEIVE block or reading out of an area by the SEND block
(in case of the Ist data packet).
—. Reset: By the user in order to release the associated data area.
Evaluation: By the SEND and RECEIVE data handling blocks.
If bit 7 is set, the blocks do not execute any data transfers but report this “error” to the CP. How this disabled data
block is treated depends on the type of CP,

3-6
3. A p p e n d i x
3.4 Length Word
3.5 PAFE: Condition Code for Parameter Assignment Error

i) Bits 8 to 11 Error Byte

If the interface module issues an error identifier for a request, the data handling blocks enter this identifier in the high
byte of the condition code word.
Error messages:
6 : Parameter assignment error
7 : Slave not in the polling list
8 : CP overload
9 : Operating mode error
A : Submodule failed or incorrect type
B : STOP/RUN switch set to STOP
C: Dialogue with handling block interrupted
D : Error in data traffic
E : List not found
F : Data has been overwritten

3.4 Length Word

The condition code word is followed immediately, i. e. in the next memory address location, by the length word, in which the number
of request data items exchanged between the PC and CP are stored.
—
Writing: By SEND and RECEIVE during data interchange.
The length word is calculated from
the packet management + “reserved” pointer
Reset: By overwriting or with each new SEND, RECEIVE or FETCH request.
Evaluation: By the user
— If the “Request completed without error” or “Data transfer/acceptance completed” bit is set, the length word con-
tains the current source and/or destination length.
– If the “Request completed with error” bit is set, the length word contains the number of data items transferred up
to the point of error.

3.5 PAFE: Condition Code for Parameter Assignment Errror

> PAFE: Condition code for parameter assignment error

The “BYTE” specified here (output, input, flag) is set if the block detects a parameter assignment error, e. g. interface (module)
does not exist or illegal parameter asignment of QTYP/ZTYP; QANF/ZANF; QLAE/ZLAE.

Type of parameter: Output, byte o No error

Permiss. range : IBO. IB 127 1 Wrong ORG (operating system) format
QBO QB 127 2 Area non-existent (no DB)
F Y O . FY255 3 Area too small (DB etc.)
4 Time-out
5 Wrong condition code word
Format PAFE byte 6 No source/destination parameter for SEND
RECEIVE ALL
7 0 7 Interface does not exist
+ .-------------- i- 8 Interface not ready
!!!!!I!!! 9 Interface overloaded
+--------------- + B Interface not acknowledged or enabled
! ! c Interface (CP) does not acknowledge or gives negative
acknowledgement
+--v--: + ‘ -- Error = I/No error = O D Parameter assignment error high byte
! (e. g. blocking)
+-------------- Error number

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Order No.: GWA4NEB Bll 0546-02d

Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
AG 6870.5 FI 66 En
 SIEMENS
SIMATIC S5 / SINEC LI
CP 530 Communications Processor CP 530
COM 530 on the PG 675 Programmer

O~eratinq Instructions Order No.: GWA 4NEB 811 0520-02b

Contents Page Page

1 Introduction 1-1 3.6 TRANSFER form 3-21

2 Definitions ?-1 3.7 Test and startup 3-24

3 Operator input and operation 3.7.1 TEST form 3_~4

of the COM 530 3-1 3.7.2 STAT/FORCE form 3-~5
3.7.3 STATUS form 3-~9
3.1 Corn 530 basic form 3-1 3.7.4 FORCE form 3-32
3.7.5 STATUS BYTE form 3-35
— 3.1.1 Disk formatting form 3-2 BUS TEST functio~ 3-38
3.7.6
3.7.7 CYCLE TIME form 3-43
3.2 CONFIGURATION form 3-3
3.3 Entering (programming) user 3.8 INFO form 3-49
data 3-7
3.9 DELETE form 3-52
3.3.1 Programming the system
parameters (SYSID-I!IP form) 3-8 3.10 Setting the operating mode
(MODES form) 3-54
3.3.2 Generation of a polling list
-. (pOLL-INp) 3-1o 3.10.1 Operating Modes 3-54
3.10.2 Error Messages from
3.3.3 Generation of an interrupt the CP 530 3-57
list (INTERRUpT-INp form) 3-13
4 APPENDIX 4-1
3.4 Output (display of the user
data 3-14 4.1 COM 530 Error List
with hints on how to proceed 4-1
3.4.1 SYSID-DISP form 3-15
3.4.2 POLL-DISP form 3-16 4.2 References 4-5
3.4.3 INTERRUPT-DISP form 3-17

3.5 PRINT form 3-18

3.5.1 PRINTPAR form 3-19

1 Introduction

The SINEC L1 Local Area Network permits communication between up to 31 SIMATIC S5

programmable controllers of the U range in master/slave mode.
The COM 530 software packaqe for the PG 675 t)roqrammer is used to assian ~arameters
to the SINEC L1 CP530 cormnfinications processor, ‘to select the LAN oper~ting mode,
to control data traffic and t~ document and archive the bus parameters on mini
diskettes.

A l l o p e r a t o r i n p u t s a r e m a d e v i a i n t e r a c t ve screen forms (entry fields) and functon

keys (or softkeys).
T h e s i g n i f i c a n c e of the function keys can be seen in the menu displayed in the
b o t t o m three lines of the s c r e e n .

In addfition, t$e familiar functions of tte keys On the PG 675 programmer, such
as acknowledgement / r@ /, Abort, /
.
❑
/, etc. have been retained.
I

2 Definitions

The following are described:

o Layout of the interactive screen forms

o Meaning of the entry and output fields in the interactive forms
o Meaning and effect of the softkeys and function keys.

Output fields in the interactive forms are marked XXXXX. In these fields COM 530
shows cur~ent statuses or data entered with the previous operations.

@l!Lf~elds in the interactive forms are marked ##### and appear on the screen
of the PG675 in inverse video. Entries can be made in these fields
by means of the alphanumeric keyboard and, in some cases, with
the function keys (HELP function).

Error messages of COM 530 always appear in t+e last line on the screen before
the menu.

Bus parameters:
— All parameters necessary to operate the LAN and generated by the
user with the aid of the COM 530 software (polling list, interrupt
list, SYSIll identifiers, see SINEC L1 Operating and Programming
Instructions).

The bus parameters are qenerated when programming (see Section 3.3) and stored
by means”of function keys.
Where they are stored depends on the COM 530 mode set, i.e. ONLINE or OFFLINE.

In ONLINE mode, the user data are stored directly in the CP 530 co~unications
processor, and, in OFFLINE mode, on, for example, distette in drive FD1 or in
an EPROM or EEPROM submodule.

When chanqinq over to programming bus parameters these are read from the communica-
.— tions pro~es;or or minidiskette - that is, if user data are already stored there
and displayed on the respective forms where they can be modified and re-stored.

Program name: A user-selectable name for identifying all user data assigned
to a CP 530 interface and stored on diskette.

2 - 1
The significance of
— the cursor
— control
. keys
— .and .function.—
keys

a) Cursor control keys

—

In most of the interactive forms used, the significance of the control key functions
is as follows:
?1
Iv : The cursor is positioned to the first entry fie’ c1 in the line above
(below ).

==> <== : The cursor is positioned t~ the previous (next) entry field.

-+ <-- : The cursor is positioned to the previous (next) character witfiin an

entry field.
If t%e left (or right) fi~lcl limit is exceeded, the cursor moves to
the previous (next) field.

b) Function
— .——-—. keys

The COM 530 software package gene~ally permits parallel input 5oth by means of
softkeys and function keys. The op~y-at~r tberefore d~?s not have to relearn program-
mer operations.

In most of tie interactive forms used the significance of the keys is as follows:

. -J:
Ii 9elet~on of a charact.sr at t$e cursor position

b: InseYtion of a character at the cuvsor position

#’ This key always has t+e same. meaning as ‘unction key F8 EXIT
(parallel key) .
This results in ‘the next-highest level in the form hierarchy being entered
without the input data in the current screen form being evaluated.

o1 : This key means “Store” if softkey F6 STORE has been def ned in the form.
These are also parallel keys and have the same function

HELP : The HELP key has the same function as ‘unction key F7 - HELP if it fias
been defined in the form.

2 - 2
 3 Operator input and operation of the
COM 530
3.1 COM 530 basic form
After the COM 530 has been cal led (diskette in drive FD@, and after the PG 675
programmer has been switched on), the following form appears:

3- 1
3.1.1 Disk formatting form

Assignment of the function keys:

F1 The disk in F!)l is formatted

YES N.B. any existing files on it are lost.

F? Return to main menue

NO

!=8 Return to main ?nenue

EXIT

3 -2
 3.2 CONFIGURATION form
Either the CONFIGURATION (ONLINE) or CONFIGURATION (OFFLINE) form appears, depending
on which mode is active.

(1) ONLINE programming:

CONFIGURATION (ONLINE) fOt7Tl

The menu for the CONFIGURATION (ONLINE) form is in two parts:

—

!E.!LQ’

Menu lb):

The meaning of the output fields in the CONFIGURATION (ONLINE) form:

The ‘Nodes” field in the header displays a two-part node number, which is read
out of the SYSID area of the CP 530.
For the master the second part is /00; for a slave it is a number greater than
o (1-30).

The next two fields show the version and symbolic designation of the CP 530 (only
if the PG675 is connected directly or indirectly to the CP 530, i.e. in ONLINE
mode).

3 - 3
Assignment of t~e function keys:

Menu la):

Fl: Entry of user data

The following are possible:

- Programming t$e system parameters (sYSID),
- Generation of a polling list,
_ G e n e r a t i o n o f a n interruDt (Drioritv) list.
Selects the ENTRY form.

F2: Display of user data

If available, SYSID ident fers, t h e p o l l i n g l i s t and t h e i n t e r r u p t l i s t

can be displayed.
Selects the DISPLAY form.

F3: Listing user data

The user data generated can be output for documentation purposes on a

p r i n t e r c o n n e c t e d t o t h e PG 675.
Selects the PRINT form.
F 4 : Transfer of SYSID identifiers, polling and interrupt lists

This function permits the transfer of bus p a r a m e t e r s f r o m the CP 530 onto

mini-diskette. EPROMS and EEPROMS can also be programmed with tbe bus
parameters.
Selects the TRANSFER form.
F 5 : selects t~~ tests of data traffic on t$e ‘jINEC L~ (TEST form)

Note:
—- A user diskette must be in drive F13 1, even in ONLINE mode.

F6: Selects menu lb

F 8: Initiates return to tfie COM 530 basic form

Menu
.— lb:

Fl: Selects the “Information mode

Information is given on whether SYSID identifiers and/or polling list

and/or interrupt list are in the CP 530 or EPROM/EEPROW submodule.

In addition, information is given on the programs st~red on the user diskette

(program names) and their contents ( INFO form)

F2: Selects the “Delete” mode

Deletes SYSID identifiers, polling or interrupt lists (DELETE form)

F3: Selects mode setting (MODE form)

F6: Selects menu la

F 8 : Initiates return to the COM 530 basic form

3 -4
 (2) OFFLINE programming:

PROGRAM NAME:

In OFFLINE mode, the user must enter a name here which he can use to iden-
tify new or already existing bus parameters (lists and SYSID). This speci-
fies the file name under which the user data is read from, or written
onto, the diskette.

The HELP function can be used to enter all program names on the diskette.

The meaning of the output fields: see CONFIGURATION (ONLINE) form.

— The “Version no.” and “Symbolic designation” fields of the CP 530 are blank in
OFFLINE mode.

3 - 5
Assignment of the function keys:

Menu
— . .2a):
.
F 1, F 2, F 3: see Menu la.

F 4 : Transfer of SYSID identifiers, polling and interrupt lists

This function permits bus parameters to be transferred from mini-diskette

to EPROMs or EEPROMS.
Selects the TRANSFER form.

F6: Selects menu 2b

F7: HELP function

With the aid of the HELP function, the names of all programs (i.e. bus
parameters) on the user diskette can be entered in the “PROGRAM NAME”
field.

F?: Initiates return to the COM 5 3 0 b a s i c f o r m

Menu 2b):
—.—
Fl: Selects the “Information” mode

Information is given on whether SYSID identifiers and/or polling list

a n d / o r i n t e r r u p t l i s t a r e a v a i l a b l e in the EPROM. In addition, information
is given on the programs st~red on t$e user diskette (program names) and
their contents. (INFO form)

F?: Selects the “Delete” mode

Deletion of SYSID identifiers, polling or interrupt list (DELETE form)

F6: Selects menu 2a

F7: HELP function

The HELP function can be used to enter the names of programs (i.e. bus
parameters) on the user diskette in the “PROGRAM NAME” field.

F8: Initiates return to the COM 530 basic form

Possible error messages:

Error 2a: fllAARNING N. EpROM driver on the system diskette. NO EPROM Ca.llS!! !“

The attempt to proqram data direct into an EPROM/EEPROM or to read data

out of an’ EPROM/EEPROM causes the program to crash ===> The
“INTERRUPT TRAP HALT” message appears.

Remedy: Load the original COM 530 system diskette into drive FD17 and
restart program.
Error 46: “Incomplete entry”

A freely selectable program name must be specified in OFFLINE mode.

3 - 6
 3.3 Entering (programming) user data
INPUT form

The following applies to the header in this and all subsequent forms:

.—
The node numbers and identifiers are taken from the SYSID area of the CP 530 communic-
ations processor in ONLINE mode. If OFFLINE mode has been selected, this data
is taken from the SYSID identifiers stored on the user diskette. If the SYSID
identifiers stored on the user diskette under the program names specified in OFFLINE
programming are not (yet) available, the fields in the header remain vacant.

The “Program name” field is only displayed when programming OFFLINE. It then
contains the name specified in the CONFIGURATION (ONLINE) form.

Assignment of the function keys: Softkeys-— F2 and F3 only appear if the CP 530
is master in the SINEC L1 network.

F l : Selects programming of the system parameters (SYSID-ON form)

F 2 : Creation of the polling list (POLL-INP form)

(Only possible when programming a master)

F 3 : Creation of the interrupt (priority) list (INTERRUPT-INP form)

(Only possible when programing a master) ‘

F 8 : Initiates return to the CONFIGURATION form.

3 -7
3.3.1 Programming the system parameters (SYSID-lNP form)

The SYSID data area is a memory area in the CP 530 used for identification purposes.

Purpose of the SYSID:

- To u n i q u e l y d e s c r i b e the role of an intelligent module (e.g. CP 530) in an pro-
grammable controller system.
To transfer parameters to an intelligent module, causing certain reactions
To give information on the firmware and software status of the module.

Description
—- of the SYSID INP form:
——-———

(1) ONLINE parameter

——. ass~ment:
——-

When the CP 530 is started, tbe operating system transfers the “submodule iden-
tifier, “Version identifier”, and “Firmware version identifier” parameters to
the SYSID area reserved in the RAM. Then it transfers the other parameters to
the SYSID area from the memory submodule connected (EPROM/EEPROM).

In ONLINE progrannning, the SYSID identifiers of the CP 530 appear in this form
and can be modified by overwriting them.
(2) OFFLINE programming:
——

The form also appears completed on the screen in OFFLINE programming if a SYSID
file exists on the floppy disk under the program name specified (see CONFIGURATION
form).
CItherwise t h e e n t r y f i e l d s a r e v a c a n t o r d e f a u l t e d w i t h p o s s i b l e a l t e r n a t i v e s .

The contents of the SYSID (except for the first three parameters) can be generated
OFFLINE on the programmer and transferred to an EPROM/EEPROM. This means that
the EPROMs/EEPROMs can be identified at any time and can program the CP 530 on
start-up.

Output field F6 is defaulted with FD (floppy disk) (OFFLINE programming) or with

Cp (Cp 530) in ONLINE m o d e .
3 - 8
Meaning of the entry fields in the SYSID-INP form:
PLANT DESIGNATION:

Name freely selectable with up to 19 alphanumeric characters

~“9*: “SHED1 PLA4 PC7°

USER SOFTWARE GENERATION DATE:

The generation date of the user software can be s~ec fied in a free’y
selectable format (e.g.: “=’ ‘“ ‘E’”
SLAVE-NO. AT PG/SINEC Ll:

Specification of the node number of the CP 530 on the PG or SINEC L1 bus.

Examples: “-- /10” . . . . . . only node number for SINEC L1
“ -8/-4” . . . . . . two-tier node number
“ -7/--” . . . . . . only node number for PG bus
11-11 stands for a blank; the “/” is provided by the programmer)
(

Q!!3.2: Slave no. on PG bus: 1 . . . 30

Slave no. on SINEC Ll: 1 . . . 30
AUTOMAT. COLD RESTART:

The alternatives YES (Y) and NO (N) can be entered using the HELP function.

Default: “Y”

MASTER/SLAVE IDENTIFIER:

The CP 530 can be programed as master or slave. This is shown either

by “M” (Master) or
“S” (Slave).
HELP functions are possible.

Default: “M”

TRANSMISSION SPEED:

This permits selection of transmission speed on the bus.

Possible entries: 9,600 baud 4,800 baud 2,400 baud
1,200 baud 600 baud 300 baud

Default: “9,600 baud”

Ass gnment of the function keys:

F 6 In ONLINE mode: Storinq the SYSID identifiers in the CP 530

In OFFLINE mode: Storing the SYSID identifiers on diskette under the
program name specified.
After storage - return to the INPUT form.

F7: HELP functions by paging possible alternatives (only in the “Master/

Slave identifier”, “Addressing mode” and “Automatic cold restart” fields.)
Depressing the HELP function key causes a description to be displayed
in the other input fields. This can be exited with F 8 (Exit), returning
to this form.

F8: Return to the INPUT form without storing the SYSID identifiers.

3 - 9
3.3.2 Generation of a polling list (POLL-lNp)

For minimal operation of the SINEC Ll, only the polling list is required. This
list c o n t a i n s 6 4 l o c a t i o n s f o r e n t e r i n g slave numbers; the s e q u e n c e thus laid
down defines the order in which the slaves are to be addressed in LAN operation.
The simplest case is the natural sequence; if all 64 places are used and certain
slaves are specified several times, a certain priority can be achieved.

>imple case:

+ ---+---+---+---+---- ----+---+
!1!2!3!4! . . . . . . !n!
+---+---+---+---+---’- -----+ --- +

Assigni~g p r i o r i t y to s.-—
lave 3:

+---+---+.--+---+---+---+---+---+---- ----+---+---+
!1!2!3!4!5 !6!7!3! ,.. . . . !3!n!
+ --- +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---- ---- + --- +---+

POLL-INP
— .. form:

when entering a polling

— list for the first time, the f0110win9 form aPPears:

The entry field between the arrows symbolizes the first location in the polling
list. The number of the first node in the list can be entered here. The first
double arrow signifies the beginning of the list, the final double arrow the end
of the list.

3 - 10
 The F 1, F 2 and F 6 function keys have no significance at this time as tfie list
does not contain any nodes yet.

After a node number (e.g. 10) has been input in the entry field, the form changes
as follows:

— It can be seen that, after a node has been entered in the list, a new entry field
is offered for entering a further node and thus building up the list.
The slave numbers (1. to 30) are keyed into the entry fields in the sequence in
which they are to be addressed. The same slave can appear several times, thus
receiving higher priority than other slaves.

The polling list can have up to 64 entries.

After a certain number of slave numbers have been entered (e.g. 20) the form looks
like this:

3 - 11
The S1 ave numbers can be changed once the respective field has been selected using
the c u r s o r c o n t r o l k e y s .

The function keys now have the f o l l o w i n g a s s i g n m e n t s :

Fl: Operation of this key deletes t$e slave entry in the field on which the
cursor is prese~tly positioned (Current entry field). ,411 slaves f o l l o w i n g
this entry field are then automatically moved one place backwards. If
the last field is deleted, the cursor automatically jumps to the first
field.

F2: Operation of this key releases tfie current field, i.e. all slave num5ers
following this are moved one position to the right.
The key has no effect if the cursor is in the last (free) entry field
or if 64 entries have already been made.

F6: Storing the polling list in the CP 530 (oNLINE mode) or- on mini-diskette
(OFFLINE mode) and return to t?e INPUT form.

F8: Return to the IYPUT form without storing the polling list.

Possible erro? messages:

Error 01: “Illegal input”!

At least one slave number must be entered in the list

Possible slave numbers: 1 to 30.

Error 26: “Blank fields illegal”!

The polling list must not have blank fields. The cursor is in the first
blank field that has been found.
Remedy: - Delete the field or
enter slave number in the respective field.

3 - 12
 3.3.3 Generation of an interrupt list (lNTERRUPT-lNP form)

The interrupt list is only required if slaves can interrupt bus traffic with an
interrupt request. The bus master then searches for the cause of interrupt in
the sequence specified in the interrupt list.

Generation and display of the interrupt list is the same as for the polling list.

The following form therefore appears when an interrupt list is generated for the
first time:

Further operations and functions of the softkeys can he seen from the description
of polling list generation (Section 3.3.2).

The numbers of the slaves (1 to 30) must be keyed into the entry fields in their
order of priority in the event of a bus interrupt. The slave entered in the first
field has the highest priority, the second the second-highest priority, etc.

~: Each slave number may only be specified once!

Possible error messages:

Error 27: “No double slave numbers in interrupt list!”

Each slave may only appear once in an interrupt list. The cursor is
in the field in which the slave number appears for the second time.
Remedy: - Delete the respective field or
- Enter another slave number in the respective field.

See the POLLING-INP form for other error messages.

3 - 13
3.4 Output (display of the user data)
DISPLAY form

Significance of the entry fields in the DISPLAY forin:

SOURCE :

The source can be specified here wit?out changing the mode. An EPROM (EEPROM)
can also be specified as source!
possi~ilities: +-----------+-------------------+
! Plode ! Source !
+ - - - - - - - - - - +- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +
! OFFLINE ! FD, EPROM !
! ONLINE ! FD, CP 530, EPROM!
+ ----------- ------
+ --,---------- ----- +
These alternatives can be entered with the HELP function.

Default:
— . . ONLINE mode . . . . CP 530
OFFLINE mode . . . FD
PROGRAM NAME:

If a floppy disk (FD) is specified as source, a program name must. be entered under
which the user data has been stored on the diskette.
The HELP function can be used to review all program names stored on the user
diskette.
Assignment of the function keys: (Softkeys F 2 and F 3 only appear if the CP530
i s mas@r!)

Fl: Causes d i s p l a y of the system parameters (SYSID-DISp form)

F2: Displays polling list (pOLL-DISp form)

(Only for display of master data)

F 3: Display of interrupt (priority) list (INTERRUpT-DISp form)

(Only for display of master data)

F 7: HELP function for entering source and program name

(if source = floppy disk)

F 8: Return to CONFIGURATION FORM

3 - 14
 Possible error messages:

Error 01: “Illegal input!”

Source must be stated. The following possibilities exist:

+ -------------------------------- +
! Mode ! Source !
+ ----------- --------------------- +
! OFFLINE ~ FD, EPROM !
! ONLINE ! FD, CP530, EPROM !
+ ---------- -t --------------------- i-
Error 31: “No polling list!”
Error 32: “No interrupt list!”
Error 33: “No SYSID identifier!”

One of these three error messages appears if the respective data type
does not exist in the CP 530, the EPROM or in the programs specified
on the user diskette.

Error 46: “Incomplete input”

A program name must be specified if the diskette (FD) is the source.

3.4.1 SYSID-DISP form

The significance of the data in the output fields can be seen from the SYSID-DISP
form.
In output field 5 (ONLINE or OFFLINE) EPROM is specified as source if an EPROM
is used.

Assignment of the function keys: (Softkey F 1 remains unassigned if display is

from an EPROM!)
Fl: This key initiates display of the form for SYSID identifier input (see
Section 3.3.1)

F8: Causes return to the DISPLAY form

3 - 15
3.4.2 POLL-DISP form
Node: xx/xx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxx Xxxxxxxxxx Xxxxxxx

EXIT i

In output field 5 (ONLINE or OFFLINE) “EPROM” appears as source if an EPROM is

used. The polling list stored is displayed as generated {see Section 3.3.2) with
the following d i f f e r e n c e s :

- There are no entry fields

There is no vacant field at the end of the list

Ttle slave numbei-s appear in the output f i e l d s a s generated.

Assignment of the function keys: (Softkey F1 does not appear if display is from
an EPROM!)

Fl: T h i s key pemits e n t r i e s to b e m a d e in the polling list [see S e c t i o n 3 . 3 . 2 )

for modification, etc.

F 8: Causes return to the DISPLAY form

3 - 16
 3 . 4 . 3 INTERRUPT-DISP f o r m

In output field 5 (ONLINE or OFFLINE) “EPROM” appears as source if an EPROM is

used.

The interrupt list stored is displayed as for input mode (see Section 3.3.3),
with the following differences:
— - There are no entry fields:
- There is no vacant field at the end of the list.

The slave numbers appear in the output field as entered.

Assignment of the function keys: (Softkey F 1 does not appear if display is from
an EPROM!

Fl: This key permits entries to be made in the interrupt list (see Section
3.3.3) for modifications etc.

F 8: Causes return to the DISPLAY form

3 - 17
3.5 PRINT form

SOURCE :
Here it is possible to specify the source without changing the mode. An EPROM
can also be given as source!
Possibilities: + -------------------------------- +
! Mode ! source !
+ --------------------------------- +
! OFFLINE ! FD, EPROM !
! ONLINE ! Fll, CP530, EPROM !
+ ----------- + --------------------- +
These alternatives can be entered using t?e HELP function.
Default: ONLINE mode . . . . . . . CP530
OFFLINE mode . . . . . . FD
PROGRAM NAME:

If a floppydisk (FD) is specified as source, a program name must be entered here

under which the bus parameters have been stored on diskette. The HELP function
can be used to review all program names from the user diskette.

Assignment of the function keys:

!=1: Causes transfer to the PRINTPAR form for assignment of parameters to the
PG printer output.

F2: Printing all user data from the CP 530 (in ONLINE mode) or the bus parameters
stored on the diskette under the program name specified (in OFFLINE mode).
The printed pages have header and footnote lines (user texts in accordance
with F 1) and are numbered. When finished, the program returns to the
CONFIGURATION form.

F7: HELP function for entering the source.

—
F 8: Return to the CONFIGURATION form.
3 - 18
 Possible error messages:

Error 01: “Illegal input!”

Source must be specified. The following are possible:

+ ---------------------------------- +
! Mode ! Source !
+ ------------- + -------------------- +
! OFFLINE ! FD, EPROM !
! ONLINE ! FD, CP 530, EPROM !
+ ------------- + -------------------- +

Error 46: “Incomplete input”

If the diskette (FD) is stated as source, a program name must be specified.

3.5.1 PRINTPAR form

Significance of the entry fields in the PRINTPAR form:

NUMBER OF LINES PER PAGE: Specification of number of lines per page for the PG
printer connected.
m: 40 ““” 65
DATE: The actual date can be entered here in any format.

The other entry fields can be filled with user text as required.

In this case, the output fields only indicate that dynamic texts appear in the
printout here.
(lSYSID1, ‘Polling list’, page number etc.)
3 - 19
Assignment of the function keys:

F 6: Operation of this function key causes the parameters generated for printout
to be stored on the user diskette. They are not assigned to any program
name.
The next time parameters are assigned to the printer, this form already
has these parameters as defaults.

F 8: Return to the PRINT form

Possible error messages:

Error 01: “Illegal input!”

Permissible number of lines 40 . . . 65

3 - 20
 3.6 TRANSFER form

Significance of entry fields in the TRANSFER form:

. TRANSFER FROM/TO:

In these two fields, the source and destination of the transfer are to be specified.
(This is also possible using the HELP key).

Possibilities:

+ -------------------------------------------------------------- +
! Mode ! Source ! Destination !
+ ---------- --------------------------- + ----------------------- +
! OFFLINE ; FD, EPROM ! FD, EPROM !
! ONLINE ! FD, CP530, EPROM ! FD, CP530, EPROM !
+ ---------- + --------------------------- + ----------------------- +

Source and destination must not be identical.

Default: Source: ‘DISKETTE’ (’FD’)

Target: ‘EPROM’

SYSID, POLLING LIST, INTERRUPT LIST:

In these three fields, the entries “y” for yes or “N” for no can be selected.

If the CP 530 is configured as a slave, only “N” is possible for both lists (as
a CP 530 slave has neither a polling nor an interrupt list).
If the EPROM is specified as destination, all user data are automatically trans-
ferred.
Default: “Y”

3 - 21
 —
PROGRAM NAME:

If the floppy disk is specified as either dest ” nation or source, a program

name must be entered under which the user data is stored on the diskette
or are to be stored on it.
The HELP key can be used to review al’ program names on the user diskette.

Assignment of the function keys:

F l : Initiation of transfer.
In the message line the messages ‘Act Ve!, “Completed” or error messages
appear.

F7: HELP function (paging through the alternatives) in the first five fields.
In addition, the names of all programs on the user diskette can be reviewed
in the “PROGRAM NAME” field.
—
F8: Return to the CONFIGURATION form.

3 - 22
 Possible error messages:

Error 01: “Illegal input!”

Source and destination must be specified. The following possibilities

are available.

+ ----------+ ---------------------+ -----------..---.----- +

! Mode ! Source ! Target !
+ ---------- --------------------- + -------------------- +
! OFFLINE ; FD, EPROM ! FD, EPROM !
! ONLINE ! FD, CP 530, EPROM ! FD, CP 530, EPROM !
+ ----------+ ---------------------+ -------------z------ +

Error 21: Source = Destination?

In “Transfer” mode, source and destination must not be identical.

Possibilities:
+ -------- ---------- ----------+ ---------
!Destina-~ DISKETTE ~ Cp53(l ! EPROM i
!tion ! ! ! !
+ -------- + ! ! !
! Source ! ~ ! !
+ --------+ ---------- + ---------- + --------- +
! ! ! ! !
! FLOPPY ! - ! + ! + !
! ! ! ! !
— ! CP530 ! + !- ! + !
! ! ! ! !
! EPROM ! + ! + !- !
+ --------+ ---------- + ---------- + --------- +

+ permissible illegal

Error 36: “No polling list!” or

“No interrupt list!” or
“No SYSID identifier!”
One of these three error messages appears if the respective data type
does not exist in the CP 530 or EPROM or on the user diskette under
the program name specified.

Error 46: “Incomplete input”

If the source or destination = DISKETTE; a program name must be specified.

3 - 23
I

3.7 Test and startup

3.7.1 TEST form
(Refer also to instructions GWA 4NEB 811 . . . for the L1 network, Section 3.3)
—

Assignment of the function keys:

F5: The message line is deleted and t?e following menu appears on the screen: —

Assignment of the function keys: 2 and

Softkeys F—.— F 3 appear if the CP530 is Master!
———

Fl: Selects display of contents of mailboxes (STAT/FORCE form)

F2: Selects bus test. The bus is stopped and further processing can then
take place step by step in accordance with the polling list. (BUS TEST
form)

F3: selects display of the bus cycle time.

(CYCLE TIME form)

F 8: Return to the CONFIGURATION form —

Possible error messages:

Error 35: ‘Illegal return message from PC!”

Error 36: “PC-Usart error!”

Error 37: No message from CP!”

Error 38: “USART error PG side!”

Error 39: “USART error PC side!”

Error 3A: “Interface not ready!”

Error 3B: “Abort by CP!” —

3 - 24
 3.7.2 STAT/FORCE form

Significance of the entry fields in the STAT/FORCE form:

SLAVE No:

Specifies the numbers of the slaves to be tested.

—
!&W: 1 ““” so

MAILBOX:

Specifies which of the mailboxes (send or receive mailbox) is to be updated

in the left or right half of the screen.
SEND can be specified for the send mailbox or REC for the receive mailbox
of the slave.

Default: . . . . SEND in both fields

Assignment of the function keys:

Fl: The input data are transferred and the CP test function activated. The
mailboxes specified are read (selects STATUS form).

F7: SEND or REC can be entered in entry fields 2 and 4.

F8: Return to the TEST form.

3 - 25
Possible error messages:

Error 01: “ I l l e g a l input!”

If a number outside the upper or “ ower limits is ds played in fields

1 and 3 or if there are blanks in these fields.
If somethingother than SEND, REC or blank appears in fields 2 and
4.

Error 35: “Illegal return messages from CP!”

Error 36: “CP Usart error!”

Error 37: “CP does not report!”

Error 38: “USART error PG side!’

Error 39: “USART error PC side!”

Error 3A: “Interface not ready!”

Error 3B: ‘Abort by CP!ti

Error 58: “Slave xx failed!”

Errar 59: ‘Slave xx not on bus!”

In these last two error messages tfie number of the respective slaves
is entered in the output fields.

3 - 26
 If the CP 530 is configured as a slave, only its send and receive mailbox can
be monitored and the STAT/FORCE form appears as follows:

Significance of the output fields:

SLAVE No.:

The extension of the node number from the header is written into these output
fields.

—
!E!W: 1 ““” 3°
Assignment of the function keys:

same assignment as for the master

Possible error messages:

as for the master

3 - 27
3.7.3 STATUS form
—

The folldwing possibilities are available for menu Iabell ing:

+ - . - .- - ---- - ----- - -------- +

+ -- ------- --- +-------- ---- ---
! Mode 1 eft ! Mode right ! Possible softkeys !
+ ----------- + ------------ + ---------------------- ---- +
! SEND ! SEND ! F 1 - F 5, F 8 !
! SEND ! REC ! F 1, F3 - F 6, F 8 !
! REC ! SEND ! F 2 - F 6, F 8 !
! REC ! REC ! F 3 - F 6, F 8 !
+ ----------- + ------------ + -------------------------- +

If the CP 530 is configured as a slave, the “FORCE LEFT” and “FORCE RIGHT”
functions cannot be implemented.

3 - 28
 Significance of the output fields:

SLAVE: In the case of a receive mailbox, tfie number of the slave selected is
entered. In the case of a send mailbox, 00 is entered as identifier for
the master.

MAILBOX: The data selected are taken from the previous form.

SB: The status byte of the respective slave is displayed in binary code.
It can be examined in more detail with function key 4 (nagni$ier function).

LENGTH: The length of the mailbox in words

SLAVE CYCLE: The reaction time of a slave until its mailbox is received (in milli-
seconds).

DESTINATION: In the case of a receive mai150x, 00 is entered for the master in

this field; in a send mailbox t$is number is identical with t$at,
of the slave selected.

*.. The appearance or disappearance of an asterisk in this field whenever

— a mailbox arrives indicates data traffic between the PG 675 and the CP 530.

The blinking frequency of the asterisk thus permits a rough estimate of

the bus cycle time.

The part of the form between header and menu shows t$e contents of the mai150xes
in the usual S 5 form divided into left and right mailboxes. The contents are
constantly updated.

The contents of the longer mailboxes can be paged up and down with the “Page”
.—
function keys.

Function keys F 1 to F 3 can be used to modify display formats or enter new

contents in the send mailboxes.

3 - 29
 —
Assignment of the f~mction keys:

F 1: Forcing the left mailbox. Both mailboxes are fixed, i .e. t4e display
is frozen (not lupdated). The contents of the left mailbox can be modi-
fied.
s~le~ts the FORCE form.

F 2: Forcing t+e right mai150x. Both rnail’mxes are fixed, i.e. the display
is frozen (not updated). The contents of ~~? right mailbox can be modified.
Selects the FORCE f~rm.

F 3: Both mal150xes are fixed. The cursor is in the first format Field of
t?e left mailbox. Now t$e formats for the display can be modified (for
bg~h ma7150xes). The menu la~elling f~r F 3 is changed to “FIXING OFF”.
In acldi:ion, softke.v F 4 enables tfie cursor to he positioned in the desired
mai150x (see menu, next page).

Actuating F 3 once more causes a return to updating of the mailbox contents

in the nei~ formats. TAP form apoears as shown in the diagram above.

F 4: T~~s function enahles t!le S1 ave status byte, which appears as a binary
~attern
‘. at the top right of each mailbox display, to be more closely exam-
1 ned. Howeve~, the status byte cannot be morliried.
Causes the STATUS BYTE form to appear. (Section 3.7.5).

F 5: Listing o= the contents of botfi ma-! 150xes m the printer connected to

the prograimnep. The ,~ispl,~y is frozen during printing.

F 6: T4e f~laimats for t?e respecti ve mai150x are stored on the user diskette.
The display is frozen d~ring the storage procedure. For each slave only
one list of formats can be stored for t~le send mailbox and for the receive
ma i 1 box.

Note: There must be a user diskette in drive FD 1. alt30ugh online mode

.—
is active.

F 8: Return to the STAT/FORCE form

3 - 30
 I(PV”

!
----------------------------------------
+-

F4 is 1 abell ed “right” or “left”, depending on whether the cursor is in the left

or right mai 1 box.

Possible error messages:

Error 13: “Unknown data identifier!”

The formats can be modified in the mailboxes. This error occurs if

formats other than KH, KF, KS, KT, KC, KM, KY or KG are entered.

Error 16: “Data cannot be interpreted”

Possible in conversions from all formats to the formats I(T, KC, I(S or
KG.

Error 17: “Beginning - no further!”

If the mailbox is paged upwards but tfie first line has already been
— displayed.

Error 18: “End - no further!”

If the mailbox is paged downwards and the last line has already been
displayed.

Error 2C: “Left mailbox empty!”

If the interface module brings a left mailbox wit~ length zero, this
—. message is displayed.

Error 2D: “Right mailbox empty!”

If the interface module brings a right mailbox wit? the length zero,
this error message is displayed.

Message 01: “Active”

If the F6 function key, the Enter key or the F5 function key or hardcopy
key are actuated, this message appears.

—.

3 - 31
3.7.4 FORCE form

Sign i fi cance of tile output fi el ds:

See STATIJS form, %cti On 3.7.3

A s s i g n m e n t of the f u n c t i o n keys:

F 1: F o r e ~ng Is e x e c u t e d , 1. e. t-he mod i f i ecl send m a i 1 5 0 x i s s e n t to t h e des~ i na -

~ i on node and ~ he bus cyc 1 t? co 9 ti n ues. ~ return is ~arj~ to ~~e STATIJS
f o r m and a n y n e w l y entered f o r m a t s taken ove~-.

F 2: bus cyc 1 e continues.

Fore ing is not execo~ed. The Qet!urn to the STATUS
form. ?Jew formats are not taken over.

F 3: The cursor j u m p s to the ‘lDes~i nat i o n : x x ” f i e 1 d wh i cfi n o w b e c o m e s an e n t r y

f i e l d a n d p e r m i t s a n e w des~l nation S1 ave t o be e n t e r e d .
Range: 1 . . . 30

F 4: This function permits the status byte of the S1 ave which appears as a
bi nary pattern at the top right o+ eac$ ma i 1 box Id ispl ay and can be more
closely examined and modified.
Causes t h e S T A T U S B Y T E f o r m to appear.

F 5: Printout of the contents of both mailboxes on t h e PG p r i n t e r .

F 6: The f o r m a t s for the respective m a i l Sox a r e stored on t h e user d i s k e t t e .

F 8: Return t o t h e S T A T / F O R C E f o r m w i t h o u t f o r c i n g b e i n g e x e c u t e d .

3 - 32
 Possible error messages:

Error OB: “Inhibited key!”

Error 12: “INSERT/ERASE” not possible here!”

The cursor is in the last line and an attempt has been made to erase
or insert in the mailbox.

Error 13: “Unknown data identifier!”

The formats can be changed in the mailboxes. This error occurs if formats
other than KH, KF, KS, KT, KC, KM, KY or KG are entered.

Error 16: “Data cannot be interpreted!”

Possible on conversion from all formats to the KT, KC, KS or KG formats.

Error 17: “Beginning - NO further!”

If the first line in the mailbox is ~isplayed and an attempt is made

to page upwards.
.
Error 19: ‘IDO not press function key!”

If the cursor is in the first field, i.e. where the editor is expecting
an initial word address, it is not permitted to actuate a function key.

Error 1A: “Repetition factor too high!”

A repetition factor can be specified when editing a mai150x. If the

total length of the mailbox, taking the repetition factors into con-
sideration, is more than 32 words, the editor outputs this error message.

Error 2C: “Left mailbox empty!”

If the CP 530 supplies a left mailbox wit+ the length zero, this message
is displayed.

3 - 33
Error 2D: “Right mailbox empty!”

If the interface module supplies a right mai150x witti the length zero,
this error message is displayed.

Error 35: “I llegal return message from PC!”

Error 36: “PC - Usart error!”

Error 37: flCP does not report!”

Error 38: ““!JSART error, PG side!”

Error 39: “USART error, PPC side!”

.
Error 3A: “Interface not ready!”

Error 3B: “Abort by CP!”

Error 4A: “Slave already receiving data!”

~y-ror ~~: “Slave x x failed!”

Error 59: “slave xx not on bus!”

In these lasttwo error messages ~~~ numher OF the respective slave

is entered in the output fields.

If the F6 function key, the transmit tey or ttle F5 function key or hard-
copy key are actuated, th!s nessage appears.

3 - 34
 3.7.5 STATUS BYTE form

Significance of the output fiel cls:

See STATUS form, Section 3.7.3.

—

Significance of the entry fields:

The status byte is displayed for both slaves. By changing the bit statuses (in
the entry fields), the status bytes are transmitted to the slaves. This, however,
is only possible when changing from the FORCE form and actuating the F6 key.

Assignment of the function keys:

F6: Transmitting the status bytes as displayed on the form to the slaves.
Return to the FORCE form.

F8: Return to the FORCE form wit?out changing the status bytes.

Possible error messages:

Error 01: “Illegal input!”

If a digit other than O or 1 or a blank appears in the entry fields.

If the first two bits have the same status, i.e. if both are set or
reset, this message also appears.

.—

3 - 35
Example
— —of .STATUS FORCING:

Actuating F1 caluses the STATUS form to appear. The interface module then supplies,
for example, tbe right ma~l~ox first, displays it on t$e screen and then dis~lays
the left mailbox.
Function key 3 is depressed w!IfllIs the interface module accesses the data of the
slave.

The f~llowing display appears on k?e screen:

Node: ~3/(70 CP53(3 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ONLINE

OIOOllOO!Slave 00 SEN?)
Slave 5 REC !4ailb~x SB: —.,..-.. Mailbox SI3:1OOOI1IO
Length: 24 Slave Cycl~: 15%s!
—.. Len@b: 5 Slave Cycle: 234ms--—--—
Ck2stlnat%fn: —
00 ! OesZ_ination:— 16 ‘- -

STATUS *

0: W-l= ABCD 0: I(T= 735.2

1: KM= 0100110001110000 \ 1: KY= 234,189
?: KH= 12CF ! 2: KS= “;
3: 5 Xl-t= 3E6A ! 3 : K!vI= 1011100010101001
8: KG= +1423148-05 ! 4: KF= -21555
9:11 KS= $Q 5:
20: KM= 1110000111010110 {
21: Kc= 391 !
. KM= 0101101001011010 !
%; KY= 24, 1 !
24; !
!

+a-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
! F~ ! F2 ! F3 ! F4 ! F5 j F6 ! F~ ! F fj ] :
! ! FORCE ! FIXING ! FORMAT ! PRINT ! STORE ! !
! ! RIGHT ! OFF ! LEFT ! MAILBOX ! FORMATS ! ! EXIT !
+ -----------------------------.--.-.----*-..*z.-..-+*.-+-..+.---*+-+--.+.+.-"=+“i- —

3 - 36
 The cursor is now positioned in the left mailbox. The formats can now he changed
in the mailboxes. The following formats are permissible: KH, KF, KS, KM, KT,
KC, KG, and KY.

A “?” appears for characters which cannot be converted to the format specified.

The next function selected is “FORCE RIGHT”. The following appears on the screen:

tide: 23/00 CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ONLINE

Slave 5 REC Mailbox S5: OIOCi1100!Slave 00 SEND Mailbox 2B:1OOOI11CI
Length: 24 Slave Cycle: —.-
15gms! Le~th: 5 51ave Cycle: 234ms—--’-”---
00
Destlnatfirl: — ! Des~ination:— 16 ‘- -

FORCING *
—.—

0: H-1= ABCD ! 0: KT= 735.2

1: KM= 0100110001110000 ! 1: KY= 2’34,189
?: KH= 12CF ! 2: KS= ‘;
~: KH= 3E6A ! 3: KM= 1011100010101001
4: K-i= 3E6A ! 4: KF= 21555
: KH= 3E6A ! 5:
2: K!-i= 3E6A !
7; KH= 3E6A !
8: KG= +~423148-!)5 !
9: Ks= $Q ]
10: KS= $Q !
11: KS= $Q !

+ -------------------.`..--+------------------------------------------------------
! F~ ! F~ ! F3 ~ F4 ! F~ ! Ffj ! F7 ! ~~;
! EXECUTE !A30RT ! CHANGE ! STATUS ! PRINT ! STORE ! !
! FORCING ! FORCING ! TARGET ! B~T~ ! MAILBOX ! FORMATS ! ! EXIT i
+ -----------.----------------------------------------------.=------------------- +
-.
The contents of the right mailbox can now be edited. Using the F4 key, the status
byte can be examined more closely and edited. Each bit has a certain function
and can be set or reset.

For a description of the function keys, see Section 3.7.4.

3 - 37
3.7.6 BUS TEST function
The BUS TEST function of the COM 530 enables minibus traffic to be executed step
by step, i.+wre5y the data exchanged between CP 530 and the nodes can be observed
in the form of mai150xes and, in certain cases, modified. Idhen the bus test is
called, the SINEC 1 cycle is stopped at the end of the polling list.
(lperati)r procedure depends on whetber or not interrupts triggered by slaves occur
during bus processing.

1. PrOCe~Ure Wit?out interru-pts [flfl~-~er-sldve trafficl

— .. —--- -—-———— —.—-

Each s?ep :9 the bus t?st consists of two parts:

A) Int h e first paw~, the operator can examine an~ a ? so mod ify the send ma i 1 box
of ~fie CP 530 to the curr?n t sl ave (t?e S1 ave currently being processed). This
First part is conpl eted by actuating the F I “ SEND MA IL80X” softkey.

The fo 11 owi ng reaction is ~ i spl ayed on tts programmer screen:

The fo 11 owi ng r?act i on is ~ is p 1 aye d on t? 2 screen !O= t~le prog r amm~r:

Soft ‘key FI !Ias the 1 abe 1 “SEND MAII..8OX” once more, i . e. t$e first part is
active again ( see ‘!. ~. ).

3 - 38
 2. If-.-..-—-
an interrupt occurs

In this case, after the first part has ken executed, an operator input must now
be made:

A) The following reactions appear on the screen:

- Tk slave causing the interrupt is acknowledged

The sead mailbox of t$e CP530 to the interrupting slave appears

The send mailbox from the interrupting slave to another node appears

The “INTERRUPT CYCLE” message appears

Soft,key F1 (“NEXT STE?”) permits tfin expc:ltjon of the next step.

-.
B) After this intermediate step, tte previous wocedure is followed as under l.~.
as long as no further interrupt occurs.
IF ~ further interrupt ~ccm-s, t$e screen reaction is as in 2.A.

In tfie 5!JS TEST forms, send ma i 1 bo x~s ,OF the C’? 530 appe at- on the 1 ef t of tfie
screen. Only these ma: 15oxes can be modified. On the right $a IC ~f the screen,
the ma i 1 box wh i CA js sent back to the C? 530 by the res pe: ti V? s 1 ave ( c1 i rect traffic )
appears
or
the ma i 1 59x ,dh 1 ch !s sent ‘rem t!le current s 1 ave to another fiode (cross tra f-f i c).
app~ars.

as t-e SINEC-LI tr-affi c is ex~c{lte.d step by step in the B!JS TEST, the occurrence
of fre quenh interrupts CN1 d pwvent novmal processing of the po 11 i rig 1 i 5%. For
th is reason, a soft key function permits interrupts t!~ be en ah 1 ed or d i sab 1 ed.

3 - 39
The forms for the t w o parts o f t h e operation f o r m a s t . er-sl ave and S1 ave-sl ave
traffic follow:
[US T E S T ——-.—
form 1 - 3

This form appears in the first step:

The left half of the screen shows the send mailbox of the CP 530 which is to be
sent to the current slave.
Modifications can be made with the usual S5 operator input procedures.
Assignments of the function keys:

Fl: Sending the send mai150x to the current slave. Causes the BUS TEST 2
form to appear for the second step.

F2: The inscription of the key is alternately “DISABLE INTERRUPT” or “ENABLE

INTERRUPT”. This key makes it possible to service the slaves in accordance
with the polling list even if an interrupt occurs.

F3: This key makes it possible to come to the “DESTINATION” field in the form
header and change the destination for the send mailbox.

F4: Function as in FORCING (Section 3.7.4)

F5: Function as in FORCING (Section 3.7.4)

F6: Function as in FORCING (Section 3.7.4)

F8: Return to the TEST form. The SINEC L1 cycle continues running. —

3 - 40
 BUS
—- TEST 2 form

This form is displayed in the second step:

.—

The send mailbox from the previous form remains displayed. It can no longer be
edited, however. The receive mailbox for the current slave appears on the right
of the screen. The formats can be modified here.

Assignment of the function keys:

.— Fl: Polling the next slave. Return to the BUS TEST 1 form.

For all other function key assignments, see BUS TEST S form.

On the right of the screen, the mailbox from the slave to the master appears or
the mailbox of the slave to another slave appears (slave-slave traffic).

In the case of cross traffic, the following form header appears:

Node: xx/xx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ONLINE

slmi CP530 to Smxx
— — SB:
— XXXXXXXX! CROSS TRAFFIC Slave xx to ——--—
slave xx
m: ‘ x Slave Cycle: xxxms!Length: xx -

.—

3 - 41
BUS TEST ———
3 form

This form appears (in the second step) if an interrupt occurs:

.- --,--
F $3;
EX
,--

The left half of the screen displays the send mailbox from the CP530 to the slave
sending the interrupt.
On the right, the send mai150x from the current slave to the master or another
slave appears. Editing is not possible in either mailbox, but the formats can
5e changed. Whether or not slave-slave traffic is taking place is indicated in
the header.

Assignment of the function keys:

F l : BUS traffic continues. If no further interrupt occurs, the BUS TEST 2

form appears once more. The original send mailbox for the slave whose
turn it should have been is displayed on the left and on the right the
respective receive mailbox appears.
If, however, a further interrupt occurs, the BUS TEST 3 form reappears
with the mailboxes to and/or from the slave sending the interrupt.

F2: This key must be actuated to position the cursor for changing the formats
in the required mailbox. The inscription is alternately FORMATS RIGHT
and FORMATS LEFT.

For further function key functions, see the BUS TEST 1 form.

3 - 42
 Possible error messages:

Error OB: “Inhibited key!”

Error 12: “INSERT/ERASE not possible here!”

The cursor is in the last line and an attempt has 5een made to insert
or erase in the mailbox.

Error 13: “Unknown data identifier!”

The formats can be changed in the mailboxes. This error occcurs if

formats other than KH, KF, KS, KT, KC, KM, KY or KG are entered.

Error 16: “Data cannot be interpreted”

In connection with conversions from all formats to the formats KT, KC,
KS or KG.

Error 17: “Beginning - no further!”

If the mail~ox is paged upwards but the first line is already displayed.
Error 18: “End - no further!”

If the mailbox is paged downwards and the last line is already displayed.
— Error 19: “Do not press function key!”

If the cursor is in the first field, i.e. where the editor is expecting
an initial word address, it is not permitted to press a function key.

Error 1A: “Repetition factor too high!”

A repetition factor can be specified when editing a mai150x. If the

total length of the mailbox, taking the repetition factor into account,
is greater than 32 words, the editor outputs this error message.

3 - 43
 —-
Example of-BUS TEST

The bus test function has been selected. T h e mailjox of the m a s t e r to t h e S1 a v e ,

e.g. slave
17, is displayed.

Themailbox can be edited. If function key F1 is actuated, the mailbox is sent

t~ the slave and the receive mailbox is read.

Three different cases can n o w occur:

a) Slave sends mai150x to master

b) Slave sends to another slave

c) Interrupt

3 - 44
 If case a) occurs, the form has the following appearance:

—.

3 - 45
 —
If case b) occurs, the form appears as follows:

In both cases, function key F 1 “NEXT STEP” can be used to display t?e send mailbox
Of the master to the next slave in the polling list. !-lowever, only the formats
can be changed here.

3 - 46
 Case c) Interrupt

An interrupt has occurred, i.e. the send mailbox of the master to the slave sending
the interrupt and the mailbox of the slave sending the interrupt to the master
or to another slave (slave-slave traffic) are displayed.
N~&: 8/00 CP53CI .Xxxxxxxxfxxxxxx?wxxxxxxxxxxx ONLINE
SEND C!%wto slave 7 sttl:CllfJooC@)REc from sl~v~ 7
Length: 5 Nave Cyc~@: 20ms! Length: 2

31JS T E S T
* :NTERRU~TCYCL E *

0: Ktl= A13co O: KT= 735.2

1: N’!’ 1011001110001131 : 1: KG= -1208537+14
~~ ~~= 2345 ! 2:
3: W= ‘2345 !
4: KH= 2345 !
5: !
?
j
!
!
!

+-------------+--------.---------..---------------+-------------.+.-.---.------+
,f. ::p,l ‘! F2 !HF3 ! F4 ! F5 ! F6 ! F7 ! Fg !
:? ”’’NE’XT .! FWWT$ !DW4BLE ! STATUS ! PRINT ! STORE ! !
“’j,’,:.’ s’~~p .! RIGHT. !IWIYRRUPTi BYTE ! MAILBOX ! FORMATS 1 ! “EXIT ;
.+&”.-..--.**.-..*.*------------*++-+-----_----..+.-.-----_---e-.+-+----_-----a-.+---
”:.”’ +

Now the left or right formats can be changed.

—. Actuation of the F 1 key causes a return to case a) or b) if no further inter-
rupt occurs.

3 - 47
3.7.7 CYCLE TIME form

Significance of the output fields:

ACTUAL : In this field the current bus cycle time is displayed. It is updated
approximately every half second.

MINIMUM: A non-return pointer shows the lowest value.

MAXIMUM: A non-return pointer shows the highest value.

Assignment of the function keys:

F2: The interface module receives the command to delete the bus cycle times.

F8: Return to the TEST form.

3 - 48
3.8 INFO form

Significance of the entry fields in the INFO form:

SOURCE:

Here it is possible to specify the source without changing the mode. An EPROM can
also be given as source!
Possibilities: +--------------------------------------+
! Mode ! Source !
+ ----------- + -------------------------- +
! OFFLINE ! FD, EPROM !
! ONLINE ! FD, CP530, EPROM !
+ ----------- + -------------------------- +

These alternatives can be entered using the HELP function.

Default-: ONLINE mode . . . . . CP 530

OFFLINE mode . . . . FD

PROGRAM NAME:

If a diskette (FD) is specified as source, the program name under which the user
data are stored on the diskette must be entered here.
All program names on the user diskette can be entered with the aid of the HELP
function.

3 - 49
Assignment of the function keys:
Fl: Information is given on whether a SYSID identifier and/or polling list
and/or interrupt list is available either in the CP 530 or in the EPROM
or on the user diskette under the program name specified.
Selects the INFO 1 form.

F2: All program names on the user diskette are listed. Selects the INFO 2
form to appear.
(Only possible for ‘FD’ source!)

F 7: HELP function for entering the source and available program names.

F8: Return to the CONFIGURATION form.

Possible error messages:

Error 01: “Illegal input!”

Source must be specified. The following are possible:

+ ------------ + ---------------------------- +
! Mode ! Source !
+ ------------ + -------------------------- +
! OFFLINE ! FD, EPROM !
! ONLINE ! FD, CP 530, EPROM !
+ ------------ + -------------------------- +

Error 29: ‘No program name for EPROM and CP 530!”

I f the EPROM or CP 530 is desigrlat~cl as source, rto info~mation Carl be

received o n “ a l l p r o g r a m s ” {i.e. all Progratn n a m e s o n t h e usev diskette)
as only one user program can be stored in the EPROM or CP 530.

Error 46: “Incomplete input”

If a diskette (FD) is given as source, a program name must be specified.

3 - 50
 AVAILABLE or NOT AVAILABLE appear in the output fields.

F 8: Return to the CONFIGURATION form.

—.

All available CP530 programs on the diskette are listed.

Assignment of the function keys:

Fl: Listing on the printer and return to the INFO form

F 8: Return to the INFO form

3 - 51
3.9 DELETE form
In “Delete” m o d e , user data stored in the CP 530 or on diskette under a certain
program name can be deleted.

The following possibilities are available:

Individual deletion (i.e.: Deletion of SYSID, polling or interrupt lists)

- Total deletion (i.e. : Deletion of SYSID, polling and interrupt lists)

Significance of the entry fields in the DELETE form:

SOURCE:

It is possible to specify the source here without changing the mode.

Possibilities: +-----------+---------------------+
! Mode ! Source !
-1- ----------- + ---------------------- +
! OFFLINE ! FD !
! ONLINE ! FD, CP 530 !
+- - - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -+

The alternatives can be entered using the HELP function.

Default:
—. ONLINE mode . . . . . . CP 530
OFFLINE mode . . . . . FD

PROGRAM NAME:

If diskette ( F D ) is s p e c i f i e d a s s o u r c e , a program name under which the

bus parameters are stored on the diskette must be entered here.

3 - 52
 All program names on the user diskette can be entered with the a d of the HELP
function.

Assignment of the function keys:

F 1: Deletion of the SYSID identifier in the source specified.

Deletion is indicated with the “Active” and “SYSID deleted” displays.

F2: Deletion of the polling list in the source specified:

Deletion is indicated by the “Active” and “Polling list deleted” messages.

F3: Deletion of the interrupt list in the source specified:

Deletion is indicated by the “Active” and “Interrupt list deleted” messages.

F4: Delete all user data:

The SYSID, polling list and interrupt list in the source specified (i.e.
in the CP 530 or on diskette under the name stated) are deleted.
In the error message line the message ‘Delete all ?’ appears. The user
is prompted to acknowledge.
Menu for acknowledgement:

The deletion is indicated by the “Active” and “SYSID deleted” or “polling

— list deleted” or “Interrupt list deleted” messages.

F7: HELP function for entering the source and the program names on the floppy
diskette.

!=8: Return to the CONFIGURATION form.

Possible error messages:
Error 01: “Illegal input!”

Source must be specified. The following are possible:

+ ------------ + ----------------- +
! Mode ! Source !
+ ------------ + ----------------- +
! OFFLINE ! FD, !
! ONLINE ! FD, CP 530 !
+ ------------ + ----------------- +

Error 31: “Polling list does not exist!”

Error 32: “Interrupt list does not exist!”
Error 33: “SYSID identifier does not exist!”

One of these three error messages appears if the respective data type
is not available on the CP 530 or on the user diskette under the program
name specified.

Error 46: “Incomplete input”

—
If diskette (FD) is given as source, a program name must be specified.
3 - 53
3.10 Setting the operating mode (MODES form)
3.10.1 Operating Modes
The foil owing operating modes can be set:

- Starting the CP 530 (CP RUN),

- Stopping the CP 530 (CP-STOP),

- PG priority (ON and OFF),

- PG priority ON means that the programmer connected directly or indirectly
to the PG (programmer) interface has absolute priority.

Significance of the output fields in the MODES form:

CP STATUS:

!iere the current status of the CP530 is displayed: The possibilities are ‘STOP’
or ‘RUN’.
The ‘STOP’ or ‘RUN’ states can be forced with function keys F 1 or F 2.

PG PRIORITY:

The PG priority field also shows the current CP status (possibilities: YES and
NO).
These settings can be changed with the F 3 and F 5 function keys.

ERRORS:

The error messages collected in the CP 530 are displayed in the ERROR fields and
updated approximately every half second.
After function keys F 1 to F 4 have been actuated, the “CAUTION: DANGER(IUS STATE
- Operate keys again” message is output and only the relevant function keys appear
in the menu.
3- 54
Assignment of the function keys:

F 1: The CP 530 is brought to the STOP state at the end of the current cycle
through the polling list. As a dangerous system status can occur, the
user is prompted to acknowledge with the following menu:

Fl: After positive acknowledgement, the Cp 530 is brought to STOp:

This is indicated as follows:
The “EXECUTED” message is output and
in the CP STATUS field the word “STOP” appears.

F2: The operating mode is not changed as ttie CP 530 is already in the
RUN state. The “CP IN RUN STATE” message appears.
Only
a) Positive acknowledgement with F 1 or
b) Negative acknowledgement with F 8 are meaningful.

F 8: Negative acknowledgement means that tfie operating mode is not changed.

Return to main menu.

F 2: The CP 530 is brought to the RUN state. As a dangerous system status

can occur, the operator is promted to acknowledge with the following
menu:

Fl: The operating mode is not changed as the CP 530 is already in the
STOP state. The “CP in STOP STATE” message appears.

Only
a) positive acknowledgement with F 2 or
b) negative acknowledgement with F8 are meaningful.

F2: After this positive acknowledgement, the CP 530 is set to RUN.

This is indicated as follows:-
- The “Executed” message is displayed and
in the CP status field the word RUN appears.

F 8: A negat” ve acknowledgement means that the operatng mode is not exe-

cuted. Return to main menu.

3 - 55
F 3: The CP 530 is brought to the “PGc heck YES’’ mode. As a dangerous system
status can occur, the operator is prompted to acknowledge with the following
—
menu:

F 3: After this positive acknowledgement the CP530 is brought to the “PG

check YES” state.
This is indicated as follows:
- The “Executed” message is displayed
- “YES” appears in the PG PRIORITY field

F 4: The mode is not changed as the CP 530 is already in the “PG check
NO” mode. The “PG PRIORITY OFF” message appears.
Only
a) Positive acknowledgement with F 3 or
b) Negative acknowledgement with F 8 are meaningful.

F 8: Negative acknowledgement means that the operating mode is not changed.

Return to main menu.

F4: The CP 530 is brought to the “PG check NO” mode. As a dangerous system
status can occur, the operator is prompted to acknowledge with the following
menu:

F 3 : The operating mode is not changed as the CP 530 is already in the

“PG check YES” mode. The “PG PRIORITY ON” message appears.
Only
a) Positive acknowledgement with F 4
b) Negative acknowledgement with F 8 are meaningful.

F4: After this positive acknowledgement, the CP530 is brought to the

“PG check NO” status.
This is indicated as follows:
- The “Executed” message is displayed
- “NO” appears in the PG priority field.

F8: Negative acknowledgement means tfiat the operating mode is not changed.
Return to main menu.

F7: The HELP function causes a description of the operating modes which
can be set with F 1 to F 4 to be displayed on the screen. T h i s
description can be exited with function key F 8 (EXIT).

F8: R e t u r n t o t h e C O N F I G U R A T I O N f o r m .

3 - 56
 3.10.2 Error Messages from the CP 530
In the field for these messages in the mode form, messages will appear when problems
occur with data transfer from the CP 530 to the network or the S5 CPU.

The error number may be broadly classified in 4 classes, and most errors come
with an extension number to further define the problem (see the table “Error List”).
The extension may he used as follows.

a) Description of a group error number in more detail, e.g. t$e result of the
self test produces class 1 errors and these can only be cured by exchanging the
module. Example: 10,7 is hardware error 7.
b) Description relating to a job number containing an error
e.g. 54,177: job 177 not defined

c) Description of a slave with which the problem occurred

60,3: slave 3 not in poll list.

I S5-CPU

4 SINECL1

aL
SYSTAT

ENr
ENr
ENr
nn

nn

nn

PG

3 - 57
Error classes

Introduction to error classes:

more efficient error messages result

- the user can define a general reaction
to a failure type.

There are also other errors but these are not shown in this way since the failure
relates to those parts of the system necessary to transmit the error number.

Error class
————
! Class ! Error ! General ! ODerator ! Level of !
! ! No. ———
! Description I ai-m-rl—— —–...--. ! service
. !
———
!1 ‘! 10-29 ! Possible hardware ! HW.-Test / ! 1. Operator ?
I ! ! fault ! exchange ! 2. Service
“——-
!2 ! 30-49 ! Operational ! Switches, ! Operator —j
! ! ! errors ! Sub Module, !’ !
! ! ! ! Sequence: ! !
! ! ! ! Check / ! !

! ! ! by ~G
! program error ! Commissioning !
! ! ! ! necessary ! Enqineer !
! ! ! 1 -
! S5-SW ch~n~ ---—_—>,--— 1
-— -——
!—q—! 70-90 ! Status messages ! Record ‘“- ! Operator ‘?
! ! ! ! !
—-- — — — . — .

3 - 58
 Error list SYSTAT
! Class ! Error ! Description !
! ! No. ! Ext. ! I
——.—.——----
! 1 ! 10 ! xx ! Error 10: Hardware error No. XX !
! ! 11 ! xx ! Error 11: Internal error message No. XX
!2 ! 30 !0 ! Error 30 : ~aitinq for syNcHRoN ---+
! ! 31 ! o ! Error 31: Wrong ~P module I
! ! 32 !0 ! Error 32: PG Function operative ~
! ! 33 !0 ! Error 33: PC is in stop: no slave send is possible !
! ! 34 !0 ! Error 34: CP is not in the STOP mode !
! 35 ! o ! Error 35: The CP ma not RUN: switch is set.—— to STOP -—-.*LI
;3 ! 50 !0 ! Error 50: Err=u=+ absent) SYSID !
! ! 51 !0 ! Error 51: Erronious (absent) Poll list ~
! ! 52 ! O ! Error 52: Erronious (absent) Alarm list !
! ! 53 ! xxx ! Error 53: Job XXX not defined !
! ! 54 ! xxx ! Error 54: Job description XXX not recognized
-.J ..—-.. !
! ! 55 xxx ! Error 55: Job No. XXX only for reveive
.— ! ! 56 xxx Error 56: Job No. XXX onl~ for send
! ! 57 xxx Error 57: Job No. XXX only compatible with the master
! ! 58 xxx Error 58: Job No. XXX only compatible with the slave
! ! 59 xxx Error 59: Job too long
! ! 60 xxx Error 60: Slave XXX not in polling list
! ! 61 xxx Error 61: The job number XXX uses an undefined list
! ! 62 ! xxx ! Error 62: Job number XXX SBR not allowed .——— !
—— ---—--
!4 ! 70 ! o ! Err& 70: Bus error !
! ! 71 ! xxx ! Error 71: Connection to slave has an interference !
! ! 72 ! xxx ! Error 72: The wrong slave (No.XXX) has replied !
! ! 73 ! xxx ! Error 73: Slave No. XXX has failed !
— -. ———

3 - 59
I

4. APPENDIX
4.1 COM 530 Error List with hints on how to proceed
The following message texts appear in the message line; the numbers are internal
references only and should not appear.
Error 01: Illegal input
The COM 530 executes validity checks for the data entered: The cursor
blinks in the field in which an illecial entry has been made.
In the field only certain limit va~ues are-permissible
- In the field only certain alternatives are permissible
- For further details, see Operating Manual.
Error 02: !l!~cjal key!
The key which has just been actuated is illegal in the field in which
the cursor is blinking. The following are possible:
- Only digits and letters
- Only letters
- Only digits
- Only special characters
- Only digits and ‘+’ and ‘-’
- Only digits and ‘+’ and ‘-’ and ‘=’
- Only hexadecimal characters
- Only digits between O and 3
- Only digits O and 1
are permissible.
Error OB: Inhibited key!
Error OD: Pr9gramm~r memory overflow!
Action: The programmer must be switched off wit$ the power switch
and switched on again and the COM 53”0 must be reloaded. If
this error occurs frequently, the manufacturer must be contacted.

Error OE: s@ZFTI file not in drive 0!

A system file required for correct execution of COM 530 is not in
drive O. Action: Insert. system diskette in drive 0.
Error OF: ?rogram load error!
A system file required for correct execution of COM 530 cannot be loaded.
Action: Use original system diskette..
Error 10: Starting address Length of mailbox!
Error 11: Mailbox empty!
Error 12: INSERT/ERASE not possible here!
The cursor is in the last line and an attempt has been made to erase
or insert data in the mailbox.
Error 13: Unknown data identifier!
The formats can be changed in the mailboxes. This error occurs if formats
other than KH, KF, KS, KT, KC, KM, KY or KG are entered.
Error 15: Input missing!
Error 16: Data cannot be inter~reted!
Possible in conversions from all formats to formats KT, KC, KS or KG.
Error 17: Beginning - No further!
If the mailbox is paged upwards and the first line is already displayed.
Error 18: End - No further
If the mailbox is paged downwards and the last line is already displayed,
Errcr 19: Do not press function key!
If thecursor is in the first field, i.e. where the editor is expecting
an initial word address, no function key may be pressed.

4 -1
Error 1A: Repetition factor too high!
When a mailbox is edited, a repetition factor can be specified. If
the entire length of the mailbox taking the repetition factor into account,
is greater than 32 words, the editor outputs this error message.
Error 21: Source = Destination?
In “Transmit” mode, source and destination devices must not be identical.
Possibilities:
+ ------------ + ----------- + ------------ + ------------ +
!Destination ! DISKETTE ! CP 530 ! EPROM !
+ ------------ + ! ! !
! Source ! ! ! !
+ ------------ + ----------- + ------------ + ------------ +
! ! ! ! !
! DISKETTE ! - ! + ! + !
! ! ! ! !
! CP530! + ! - ! + !
! ! ! ! !
! EPROM ! + ! + ! !
+ ------------ + ----------- + ------------ + ------------ +
+ permissible
illeqal
DISKETTE User diskette in drive 1
CP 530 SINEC L1. communications processor
EPROM Plug-in EPROM/EEPROM submodule
Error 23: Transmission error
This error message indicates an error in all transmission types:
TRANSMIT PG675 ==> CP 530
- No transmission cable plugged in
- Transmission cable incorrectly plugged in
- Wrong transmission cable
- An EPROM submodule is inserted in the CP 526, all accesses
for writing or deletion are possible
- CP 530 not in operation
- Transmission time exceeded
PG675 ==> FD
Please contact manufacturer
- Hardware fault
- COM 530 system error
Error 24: Read SYSID identifier
Error 25: SYSID, polling and interrupt lists non-existent!
In “Print all” mode, no data can be listed as no user data are stored i n
the CP 530 memory (ONLINE mode) or
- on the diskette under the program name specified (OFFLINE mode)
Error 26: No blank fields permitted!
Blank fields are not permitted in polling lists or interrupt lists.
The cursor is in the first vacant field found.
Action: - Delete the respective field or
- Enter a slave number in the respective field.
Error 27: No double slave number in interrupt list!
Each slave may only appear once in an interrupt list.

4 - 2
E r r o r 28: N o E P R O M / E E P R O M submodule pluqqed in!
A n E P R O M / E E P R O M submodule m u s t b e p l u g g e d into t h e r e c e p t a c l e f o r i t
o n t h e prograrmner.
S e e SINEC L 1 Operating I n s t r u c t i o n s .
E r r o r 2 9 : N o p r o g r a m n a m e s f o r E P R O M a n d CP 5 3 0 !
“Info” mode:
Where EPROM or CP 530 is specified as source, no information can be
given for “All programs” (= all program names on diskette), as only
one user program can be stored in the CP 530 or EPROM.
~rce = CP 530 or EPROM:
Only “Individual program” mode is possible in which information is given
on whether the SYSID identifier and/or polling list and/or interrupt
list exist or not.
Error 2A: bJARNING: No EPROM driver on the system diskette. No EPROM calls!!!
The COM 530 draws the user’s attention to the fact that there is no
EPROM driver on the system diskette being used.
WARNING: An attempt to program data into an EPROM or to read data from
an EPROM causes a program crash. The “INTERRUPT TRAP HALTII
message appears in the form.
Action: Put original COM 530 system into
drive O and start program
once more.
Evror 2C: Left mailbox empty!
If the interface supplies a mailbox (left) wit? length 0, this error
message appears.
Error 2 D : R i g h t mailbox em@y!
I f t h e interface s u p p l i e s a mailbox (right) wi~fi length O , this error
message appears.
31: Polling list does not exist!
Error
Error 32: Interrupt list does not exist!
Error 33: SYSID identifier does not exist!
These three error messages appear in
- output
- Delete
- Transmit
modes if the respective data type does not exist in the CP 530 or in
the EPROM or on the user diskette under the program name specified.
Error 35: Illegal return message from PC!
Error 36: PC-Usart error!
Error 37: CP does not report!
Error 38: Usart error on programmer side!
Error 3A: Interface not ready!
Error 3B: Abort by CP!
Error 3C: List non-existent!
Error 3D: Diskette directory full!
The diskette directory of the user diskette is full. A new file cannot
be initialized.
Action: Use new diskette
Delete files not required
Error 3E: User diskette full!
The space available on the diskette being used is insufficient for storir
the file.
Action: Use another diskette
Delete files not required
Error 41: EPROM not erased!
The EPROM must be completely erased before it is progranmnmed.

4 - 3
 Error 42: VPP error!
The supply voltage level (for the EPROM) is not within the permissible
range. This suggests a hardware fault on the EPROM or at the PG 675
interface.
Action: Service or repair
Error 43: Comparison error!
After bus parameters have been programed into an EPROM from diskette
or the CP 530, the contents of the EPROM are compared with the data
on the diskette or CP 530. If the data are not identical, this error
message is output.
Action: Erase EPROM and reprogram
Error 45: Address out of range!
Error 46: Incomplete input!
In the
- output
- transmit
- print
info
- delete
modes, a program name must be given for the source diskette (the cursor
is in the PROGRAM NAME field).
Error 47: Slave failed!
Error 48: hlrong mode!
Error 49: Slave not in polling list!
Error 4A: Slave already receiving data!
Error 54: EPROM/EEPROM submodule type illegal!
The wrong EPROM/EEPROM submodule is being used:
See SINEC L1 Operating Instructions
— Error 56: Mode change CP in STOP
Error 57: Faulty slave cycle
Error 58: Slave xx failed!
Error 59: Slave xx not on bus!
In both of these error messages, the number of the respective slave
is entered in the output fields.
Error 60: Only hexadecimal characters permitted!
Error 61: -32.768 fixed-point +32.767!
— Error 62: FORMAT: aaa, bbb ; aaa, bbb . . . only Up t. 255!
Error 63: ASCII characters only!
Error 64: FORMAT: aaa, b ; b . . . 0 to 3!
Error 65: Wrong counter word!
Error 66: Only keys O and 1 permissible!
Error 67: FLOATING-POINT SYNTAX: +1234567-89
Error 70: Incorrect CP module!
Error 71: Error when progranrning the EEPROM on the CP.
Error 72: It is not possible to set the CP to Run since the Stop/Run switch is
at Stop.
Error 73: CP 530 is a slave.
Error 75: Slave failure
Error 77: PG data has been overwritten.
Error 78: Slave not in polling list.

4 -4
COM 530 Error list

The following error messages do not appear in the error message line as usual
but in the body of the form. These are all fatal error messages which means you
are now at the Operating System Level.

x stands for ‘A’ (drive O) or ‘B’ (drive 1)

!3110S error on x:

If this error message appears, a write access was not made on the diskette The
diskette is write-protected or initialized for read-only access. In the second
case, the diskette can be initialized for read/write access by reloading COM.

BOOS ERR ON x: had sector

This error message suggests a hardware fault or a wrongly or badly for-

matted diskette. Reformat the diskette and subsequently reload COM 530.

By actuating the return key “ <--’” the error can be ignored.

ERROR: DISK WRITE: “X:xxxxxxxx.$$$”

There is no more room on the diskette in drive 1.
Action: Delete files not required —
Use another diskette

ERROR: NO DIRECTORY SPACE - Xxxxxxxx’$$$

The diskette directory is full.
Action: Delete files not reauired
Use another diskette

ERROR: USER ABORTED

Transfer has been aborted by actuating a key.

SECTOR NOT FOUND:

A sector of the d skette cannot be accessed. This means that data mght
be lost.
By actuating the return key “ <--” the error can be ignored.

4.2 References
/1/ S5DOS Description
for PG675 (Herr Trapp/E814)

4 - 5
 SIEMENS

SIMATIC S5 SINEC LI Local Area Network

-
CP 530 Communications Processor
COM 530 on the PG 615 Programmer
Instructions Order-No.: GWA 4NEB 8110521 -02c

Contents Page Page

1. Introduction 1-1 3.7.1 TRANSFERXX Form 3-15

2. Definitions 2-1 3.7.2 TRANSFERACKN Form 3-15
3. Operator Input and Operation of the 3.8 Deletion of User Data 3-16
COM 5300n the PC 615 Programmer 3-1 3.8.1 DELETExx Form 3-16
3.1 Power up 3-1 3.8.2 DELETEACKN Form 3-16
3.2 DEFAULTS Form 3-2 3.9 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Form 3-17
3.3 BUS SELECT Form 3-3 3.9.1 CP MODE Form 3-17
—. 3.3.1 SL. NO. PG-BUS Form 3-3 3.10 INFO Form 3-18
3.3.2 SL. NO. SINEC LI Form 3-4 3.10.1 CONTENTS Form 3-18
3.3.3 SINEC L1/PG-BUS 3-4 3.11 Test and Start-up 3-19
3.4 I NIT STATE Form 3-5 3.11.1 TEST Form 3-19
3.5 Input of User Data 3-6 3.11.2 STATUS-FORCE Form 3-19
3.5.1 SYSID INPUT Form 3-7 3.11 .2.1 STAT/FRCE 1 Form 3-19
3.5.2 POLLING LIST INPUT Form 3-8 3.11 .2.2 STATUS Form 3-20
3.5.3 INTERRUPT LIST INPUT Form 3-8 3.11 .2.3 FORCE Form 3-20
3.6 Display of User Data 3-9 3.11 .2.4 STATUS BYTE Form 3-21
3.6.1 Output of User Data on the Display 3-9 3.11 .2.5 FORCE STATUS BYTE Form 3-21
3.6.1.1 SYSID DISPLAY Form 3-1o 3.11.3 Bus Test 3-22
3.6.1.2 POLLING LIST DISPLAY Form 3-1o 3.11 .3.1 BUS TESTSEND MAILBOX Form 3-23
3.6.1.3 INTERRUPT LIST DISPLAY Form 3-11 3.11 .3.2 MODIFY MAILBOX Form 3-23
3.6.2 Output of User Data on the Printer 3-11 3.11 .3.3 BUS TEST RECEIVE MAl LBOX Form 3-23
3.6.2.1 PRINT PARAMETER Form 3-12 3.11 .3.4 BUS TEST INTERRUPT CYCLE Form 3-24
3.6.2.2 PRINT START Form 3-12 3.11.4 Bus Cycle Time 3-24
3.7 Transfer of User Data 3-13 4 COM 530 Error Messages 4-1
4.1 Errors displayed in the seventh Display Line 4-1
4.2 Errors displayed in CPM ODE 4-2
I
1. Introduction

The SINEC L1 Local Area Network permits communications between up to 31 SIMATIC S5 programmable controllers of the U range
in master/slave mode.

The COM 530 software package described here for the PG 615 programmer is used for the following: to assign parameters to the
SINEC LI communications processor, for SINEC LI mode selection, for controlling data traffic (including diagnostics) and for the
documentation and archiving of bus (network) parameters on EPROM/EEPROM submodules and on the printer.

Procedures for programming and assigning parameters are described in the “Programming instructions” for SINEC L1. All operator
inputs are interactively via screen forms (entry fields) and function keys. The meaning of the function keys is shown either on the last
display line or in the texts assigned to the numbers.

—-

1-1
 2. Definitions

The following are described:

— Format of the interactive screen forms

— Meaning of the entry and output fields in the forms
— Meaning and effect of the softkeys and function keys

Output fields in the interactive form are marked XXXXX .

In these fields COM 530 shows current statuses and data entered in previous operations.

Entry fields in the interactive form are marked +++++*++

Entries can be made in these fields via the hexadecimal keyboard or the funktion keys.

COM 530 error messages are shown in the second last display line.

Bus parameters: All parameters necessary to operate the LAN are generated by the user with the aid of the COM 530 software
(SYSID identifiers, polling list, interrupt list, see SINEC LI Operating and Programming Instructions).

Meaning of the cursor control and function keys

The cursor is positioned to the first entry field in the line above (below). The next (previous) part of the
interactive screen form appears in the last (first) entry field. If the form contains further parts, this is shown by
arrows pointing up and down on the form. If the form has no entry fields, it is only used for consultation.

The cursor is positioned to the next (previous) character within an entry field so that a character may be
changed without changing the whole field.

DEL Deletion of a character at the cursor position.

INS Insertion of a character at the cursor position.

BRK This key allows progression movement up to the next form in the hierarchy without evaluating the data in the
current form.
—
ENTER This key means ,, Store”.

0...9
without Shift key : Entry of numbers O to 9 or selection of functions

0...5
with Shift key : Entry of hexadecimal numbers A to F.

2-1
I 3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530 on the PG 615 Programmer

3.1 Power up

After the power is switched on, the following display appears:

PG 615 —
COM 530V1.O

FUNCTION TEST
This indicates that internal tests are taking place. After a few
RUNNING!
seconds, the Defaults form appears and the cursor blinks at
the ON-LINE position.

3-1
 -
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530 on the PG 615 Programmer

3.2 DEFAULTS Form

In ON-LINE mode, the output fields in the top line show a two-
digit mode number which has been entered in the Bus Select
. form. The master has the number xx/0, and a number greater
than O applies for a slave. I *DEFAULTS

ON-LINE : ++=#+#=#
Xx/xx

YES is the default for the first entry field and NO for the BUS SELECT : +#++#+1
remaining entry fields.

The function keys and their meaning: x

YES NO
1 : YES is entered at the cursor position
———.
2 : No is entered at the cursor position 1 2 3 4

ENTER : Change to INITIAL STATE form

If YES is entered in the entry field of the BUS SELECT line, it is possible to page further in the BUS SELECT menu. This is indicated
by an arrow pointing downwards in the last column of the second-last line. The BUS SELECTform appears if the ~ key is pressed
while the cursor is in the bottom-most entry field.

3-2
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530 on the PG 615 Programmer

3.3 BUS SELECT Form

With this function a mode can be selected. To do this it is nec-

essary to enter the slave number on the programmer bus/or
the slave number on the SINEC LI LAN. *BUS SELECT Xxlxx .
1 SL. NO. PG BUS
2 SL, NO. SINEC L1
N. B.: The Bus Select process is integral only from the 3 SINEC L1<>PG BUS
V2.O software version onwards.

The function keys and their meaning:

I
L
*SELECT FUNCTION
I
I
——
1 : Change to the SL.NO. PG-BUS form 1 2 3 4

2 : Change to the SL.NO.SINEC L1 form

3 : Change to the SINEC LI /PG Bus form

BRK : Return to the DEFAULTS form

3.3.1 SL.NO.PG-BUS Form

The number of the slave with which the PG 615 is to communi-

cate via the programmer bus (PG-Bus) can be entered with *SL.NO.PG BUS Xxlxx
the numeric keys 0-9.
SL.NO. PG BUS :*+

The function keys and their meaning:

ENTER : Transfer the slave number entered and return to

I I
I NIT STATE form *SELECT NUMBER

BRK : Return to BUS SELECT form

—.——
1 2 3 4

3-3
 -
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530 on the PG 615 Programmer

3.3 BUS SELECT Form

3.3.2 SL.NO.SINEC LI Form

If it is desired to select a CP 530 which is connected to the *SL.NO.SINEC L1 Xxlxx

SINEC LI network, and if the programmer is plugged directly
into the relevant Master CP, then the slave number of the SL.NO. SINEC L1 : =##
CP 530 is entered in this form with the numeric keypad.

The meaning of the function keys is the same as in Subsection

3.3.1. *SELECT NUMBER

————
1 2 3 4

3.3.3 SINEC L1/PG-BUS

*SINEC/PG BUS Xxlxx
If the programmer is at a random position on the programmer
bus and it is to communicate with a CP 530 connected to SL.NO. PG BUS :+++
SINEC LI as a slave, then the number of the relevant Master SL.NO. SINEC L1 :++
—
CP through which the slave CP is to be addressed must be
entered in this form, followed by the number of the slave CP
itself.

The meaning of the function keys is the same as in Subsection

I *SELECT NUMBER
I
3.3.1.
————
1 2 3 4

3-4
I 3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530 on the PG 615 Programmer

3.4 I NIT STATE Form

Pressing the ENTER key after power-up brings the user to the
I NIT STATE form.
*INITIAL STATE Xxlxx .
The form consists of two parts which can be accessed with
the ~ O cursor keys. 1 INPUT
2 OUTPUT
3
The function keys and their meaning: 4 TRANSFER
w
ENTER : The Enter key effects a return to the start of INIT *SELECT FUNCTION
STATE form.
————
1 : Change to INPUT form. 1 2 3 4

2 : Change to OUTPUT form

4 : Change to TRANSFER form.

With this function the various transfer modes can be
selected

5 : Change to the DELETE form

With this function bus parameter can be deleted in
the programmer, the CP 530 or also in an EEPROM
submodule.
*INITIAL STATE Xxlxx
6 : Change to the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS form A
(Defaults, Operating modes)
5 DELETE
6 SPEC. FUNCTION
7 : Information about the bus parameters in the
7 INFO
programmer, the CP 530 or the submodule.
8 TEST
v
8 : Change to testing the data traffic on SINEC LI LAN
*SELECT FUNCTION
(TEST form)

————
1 2 3 4

3-5
 -
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530 on the P G 6 1 5 P r o g r a m m e r

3.5 Input of User Data

INPUT form:

Keylock switch in position 1: Input not possible *INPUT Xxlxx

Keylock switch in position II: 1 INPUT PG

By pressing key I in the initial state, the user reaches the INPUT 2 INPUT PG
form.

The node numbers are taken from the Defaults form, and are
used for addressing on the LAN in connection with “ON- *SELECT FUNCTION
LINE” functions. I
The contents of the SYSID data (Slave No. = O — “Master”, ————
Slave No. = 1 . . . 30— “ Slave”) controls the following forms 1 2 3 4
for INPUT/OUTPUT:
MASTER : Polling list and interrupt list maybe selected.
SLAVE : Error message of polling list or interrupt list is
selected.

In the OFF-LINE mode, these identifiers originate from the SYSID stored in the programmer. If these are not available or if
“MASTER” is entered in the SYSID, a polling list or an interrupt list can be selected.
If the polling list and interrupt list have been assigned parameters, the programmer may only accept a SYSID for “Master”.

The function keys and their meaning:

1 : Input to the programmer

2 : Input to the CP 530 (only possible in ON-LINE mode)

BRK : Return to “INIT STATE” form

The following form appears on pressing keys 1 or 2:

*INPUT XX Xxhx

PG or CP appears in the output field in the top line, depending 1 SYSID

on whether 1 or 2 was pressed on the “INPUT” form. 2 POLLING LIST
3 INTERRUPT LIST

Function keys and their meaning:

1 : Change to input of SYSID identifiers

*SELECT LIST
I
————
2 : Generate polling list 1 2 3 4

3 : Generate interrupt list

BRK : Return to INPUT form

If there is already a SYSID, a polling list or an interrupt list in the CP 530 or in the programmer, this will be indicated on input and can
be changed.

3-6
I 3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530 on the PG 615 Programmer

3.5 Input of User Data

3.5.1 SYSID INPUT Form

The SYSID data area is a memory area in the CP 530 used for
general identification purposes.

Purpose of the SYSID: I *INP. XX SYSID

O SU-ID
Xxlxx

: Xxxx ++++++
— to give a clear description of the classification of an intelli- +l+k++?+++
gent 1/0 module (e. g. CP 530) in a programmable control- 1 MO-ID : xx xxx
ler. 2VERS. : v x.x
— to transfer parameters to an intelligent 1/0 module which v
will lead to definite performance characteristics. HELP
— to provide information about the firmware and software re-
1
leases of the module. —.—
1 2 3 4
SYSID identifiers appear in these forms when parameters are
assigned ON-LINE. They can be overwritten.
The form sections are also filled in during OFF-LINE program-
ming should SYSID identifiers have already been generated
by entering them in the programmer, or transferred to pro-
grammer. Otherwise, the entry fields are empty.

Explanation of SYSID mnemonics:

*INP. XX SYSID Xxlxx
SUB-ID : For submodule identification (e. g. 6ES5 375- A
OLAII)

MD-ID : Module identifier (e.g. CP 530)

VERS. : Software release

PLT-ID : Plant identifier

Free choice of name of up to 19 alphanumerical
characters (only hexadecimal numbers can be —.—
entered on the PG 615 programmer). 1 2 3 4

GN-DAT : Date of generation of bus parameters.

The format is optional (e.g. 1.5.85).

SL-NR : Slave number on the programmer (PG) bus (1-30)

and slave number on SINEC L1.

PAG-NR : 3-digit number (l-254)

RSTRT : Cold restart

BAUD-R : Entry and changing of baud rate (only, 9,600 baud

presently possible).
*INP. XX SYSID Xxlxx
A
The form consists of three parts, which can be paged through
12 PAG-NO : #++++
with the cursor control keys.
13 CLD-RS : +
18 BAUD-R : ++++++++
Function keys and their meaning:

If no texts are displayed over digits 1-4 in the bottom line of *SELECT SYSID
the display, keys 1“-F have their n~rmal meaning. The numbers
1 -F can be written into the entry fields. ———
In some of the entry fields, the text assigned to keys 1-4 ap- 1 2 3 4
pears above the digits in the display. If one of the keys is
pressed, the text assigned to it is written into the entry field.

BRK : Return to the “INPUT-XX” form.

ENTER : Store edited text in the programmer (PG) or

CP 530. Return to the ‘INPUT’ form.

3-7
 3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530 on the PG 615 Programmer -

3.5 Input of User Data

3.5.2 POLLING LIST INPUT Form

For minimum operation of SINEC LI only the SYSID and

polling list are necessary. This list contains 64 locations for the
entry of slave numbers; the order of these numbers establis-
hes the order in which the slaves are to be addressed during
network operation. In the simplest case, the natural order is
maintained; however, by using all 64 locations and naming
certain slaves several times, a certain order of priority can be
achieved.

Simple case:
I *INP, XX PO-LI Xxlxx

1 2 3 4
I II n 01 :+=+

Giving priority of slave 3

7
1 2 3 4 5 3 6
I I ml *SELECT POLL. LIST

The following form appears for entering a new polling list: —..
1 2 3 4

The cursor is in the first entry field, in which a two-digit slave

number can be entered. When both digits have been entered, *INP, PG PO-LI Xxrxx
the cursor jumps to the next field, which is then available for A
the next entry (max. 64). If only one digit is entered, the next 07:18 1 2 19 3 4
field is reached by pressing the => key. Each position in the 13:20 21 3 4 5 12
edited polling list can be reached via the cursor control keys 19:23 24 10 11 12 12
and changes can then be made. 25:25 26 27 28 29 30
v
After several slave numbers have been entered, the form *SELECT POLL. LIST
looks like this:

——.—
1 2 3 4

Function keys and their meaning:

DEL : This key deletes the contents of the field in which the cursor is located. The subsequent slave numbers are then moved
one location left.

INS : This key moves all slave numbers one location on. A new slave number can then be entered in the vacant location.

ENTER : This kevcauses the ~ollin~ list to be stored in the communications Processor orthe wogrammerand then effects a return
to the ‘; INPUT” form. -

BRK : Return to the “INPUT” form without storage of data (the data are simply lost).

3.5.3 INTERRUPT LIST INPUT Form

An interrupt list is generated in the same way as the polling list. *INP. XX PO-LI Xxfxx
The following form appears for entering a new interrupt list:
01 :#=#

Further inputs and the meaning of the function keys are the
same as when generating the polling list, (subsection 3.4.2).

In the input fields the slave numbers (1 –30) should be entered *SELECT INTR. LIST
according to their priority in case of a bus interrupt.
——.—
N. B.: Each slave number may only be entered once 1 2 3 4

3-8
I 3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530 on the PG 615 Programmer

3.6 Display of User Data

If the key 2 is pressed while the “I NIT STATE” is being dis-

played, access is gained to the “OUTPUT” form.
*DISPLAY Xxlxx

Function keys and their meaning: 1 CP - PG

2 PG
1 : Output of user data from the CP 530 and transfer into 3 SUBMODULE — PG
the programmer. If user data have already been 4 PRINTER
generated in the programmer, the question “Over-
write?” must be acknowledged by pressing the ENTER *SELECT FUNCTION
key, if these data are no longer needed. Should these
data still be needed, the user can abort with the BRK
————
key and the data can then be saved (e.g. on a memory
1 2 3 4
submodule).

2 : Output of user data from the programmer.

3 : Output of user data from the EPROM/EEPROM submodule. If there are already data in the programmer which are to be over-
written, the question “Overwrite?” must be acknowledged with the ENTER key.

4 : Output of user data on the printer connected to the programmer.

BRK : Return to “I NIT STATE” form.

3.6.1 Output of User Data on the Display Form DISPLAY-XX:

Pressing function keys 1 to 3 in the “DISPLAY” form enables CP 530 is master

access to the following form:
*DISP. XX Xxlxx

1 SYSID
2 POLLING LIST
3 INTERRUPT LIST

The letters CP, PG or SM appear in the first output field of the *SELECT LIST
top line, depending on which of the first three functions keys
(1 -3) was pressed in the “DISPLAY” form.
————
The function keys and their meaning: 1 2 3 4

1 : Change to display of system parameters (“SYSID CP 530 is slave

DISPLAY” form)

2 : Display of polling list (D ISP-POLI form) in the case of

master data only. I *DISP. XX

1 SYSID
Xxlxx

3 : Display of interrupt (D ISP-INLI form) in the case of

master data only.

BRK : Return to the “DISPLAY” form.

*SELECT LIST
I
————
1 2 3 4

3-9
 3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530 on the PG 615 Programmer -

3.6 Display of User Data

3.6.1.1 SYSID DISPLAY Form

—. The SYSID DISPLAY form consists of three parts which can be

paged through using the cursor control keys. *DISP. XX SYSID Xxlxx

Further details: 3.5.1 SYSID INPUT form. O SUB-ID : Xxxx++=ll+l+l

4+***++
1 MD-ID : xx xxx
2VERS. : v x.x
w
INPT

———
1 2 3 4

—.—
1 2 3 4

The function keys and their meaning:

*DISP. XX SYSID Xxlxx
1 : With this key, control can be passed direct to the input
A
— of SYSID identifiers, if the keylock switch is in position II
(see Subs. 3.4.1). 12 PAG-NO : #=+#
13 RSTRT : +
18 BAUD-R : ++++ =11#
BRK : Return to DISPLAY xx form

The text above digit 1 INP in the display does not appear when
*SELECT SYSID
output from a memory submodule. It is therefore not possible
to change to input.
—— ——
1 2 3 4

3.6.1.2 POLLING LIST DISPLAY Form

The following form appears on pressing key 2 in the DISPLAY *DISP. XX PO-LI Xxlxx
xx form:
01 : xx xx xx xx xx xx
The polling list is displayed as generated 07 : xx xx xx xx xx xx
13 : xx xx xx xx xx xx
The function keys and their meaning: 19 : xx xx xx xx xx xx
v
1 : This key branches direct to the input of the interrupt INPT
list, if the keylock switch is in position II (Subs. 3.4.2).
——. .
BRK : Return to DISPLAY xx form. 1 2 3 4

The text above digit 1 INP in the display does not appear if data is being output from a memory submodule. It is therefore not possi-
ble to branch the input.

3-1o
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530 on the PG 615 Programmer

3.6 Display of User Data

3.6.1.3 INTERRUPT LIST DISPLAY Form

On pressing key 3 in the DISPLAY xx form, the following form *DISP. XX IN-LI Xxlxx —
appears:
01 : xx xx xx xx xx xx
The interrupt list is displayed as generated. 07 : xx xx xx xx xx xx
13 : xx xx xx xx xx xx
The function keys and their meaning: 19 : xx

1 : This key branches direct to the input of the interrupt list, INPT
if the keylock switch is in position II (Subs. 3.4.2).
— — .
BRK : Return to DISPLAY xx form 1 2 3 4

The text above digit 1 INP in the display does not appear if data is being output from a memory submodule. It is therefore not possi-
ble to change to input.

3.6.2 Output of User Data on the Printer

With this function, all user-generated data can be output via *OUTPUT PRINT. Xxlxx
the printer from the CP, the PG or the EPROM/EEPROM sub-
module. By pressing key 4 in the DISPLAY form, the following 1 PRINT-PARAMETER
form appears: 2 PG — PRINTER
3 CP — PRINTER
4 SUBMODUL — PRINTER
The function keys and their meaning:
*SELECT FUNCTION
1 : Change to setting of print paramters (PRINT-PAR form)
— . ——
2 : Change to printing of user data generated in the pro- 1 2 3 4
grammer (PRINT START form)

3 : Change to printing of user data generated in the CP 530 (PRINT START form)

4 : Change to printing of user data from the EPROM/EEPROM submodule (PRINT START form)

BRK : Return to the OUTPUT form

3-11
 3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530 on the PG 615 Programmer -

3.6 Display of User Data

3.6.2.1 PRINT PARAMETER Form

*PRINT-PARAM. Xxlxx
Explanation of print parameters:
BAUD RATE : ###*
BAUD RATE : Transmission speed between the PG 615
MAX, LINES : ++
and the printer. If the cursor is in the BAUD
BUSY SIGNAL : #+++++
RATE entry field, the BAUD RATE can be set
TITLE BLOCK : ##=k=#
between 300 and 9600 baud, using key 4
v
(HELP), The default on programmer power-
HELP
up is 600 baud.

M A X . L I N E S : Maximum number of lines per page. If the —.—

cursor is positioned at the entry field, this 1 2 3 4
number can be set to 72, using key 1, and to
66, using key 2, The default is 72 lines.

BUSY SIGNAL : If the printer has a busy line, “YES” must be

set. “YES” and “NO” can be set using nu-
meric keys 1 and 2, respectively. The default
is “NO”. *PRINT-PARAM. Xxlxx
A
TITLE BLOCK : Frame for the data to be printed. YES is set
WAITAFT. CR : +#+1=
using key 1 and NO with key 2.
WAITAFT, LF : +++++
WAlTAFT. CR. : Waiting time after “CR”. After the control
character “CR”, there is a waiting period so
that the print head can return to the begin-
ning of the line. This period is a multiple of
25 ms and can be entered with the keys O to I (O-255) x25 MSEC

9, The default is 20. ————

1 2 3 4
WAlTAFT. L F : Waitina time after “LF” (as for waitinq time
after “-CR”).

—
The PG 615 transmits CR and LF as control characters for the printer. Before starting to print, the paper must be set to the top of the
form.

The function keys and their meaning:

BRK : Return to the “OUTPUT PRINT” form

ENTER : Transfer of edited values and return to “OUTPUT PRINT” form.

3.6.2.2 PRINT START Form

The following form appears on pressing keys 2 and 4 in the *OUTPUT PRINT. Xxlxx
OUTPUT PRINT form:
Xxxxx — PRINTER
The text PG, CP or SM appears in the entry field of the third
line, depending on which key was pressed in the OUTPUT
PRINT form.

*START PRINT?
The function keys and their meaning:
— — — —
ENTER : The printout is started. All user data of the device
specified are printed out, followed by return to the 1 2 3 4
DISPLAY FORM.

BRK : Return to the OUTPUT PRINT form.

3-12
I 3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530 on the PG 615 Programmer

3.7 Transfer of User Data

When key 4 is pressed in the I NIT STATE form, the TRANSFER

form appears. It consists of two parts, which can be paged
using the cursor control keys ~ O. *TRANSFER Xxlxx —
1 CP — PG
The function keys and their meaning: 2 PG — CP
1 : Transfer of user data from the CP 530 to the programmer 3 PG - SUBM
4 SUBM - PG
2 : Transfer of user data from the programmer to the CP 530 v
*SELECT FUNCTION
3 : Transfer of user data from the programmer to the EPROM/
EEPROM submodule
——.—
4 : Transfer of user data from the EPROM/EEPROM sub- 1 2 3 4
modul

5 : Transfer of user data from the CP 530 to the EPROM/

EEPROM submodule

6 : Transfer of user data from the EPROM/EEPROM sub- *TRANSFER Xxlxx

module to the CP 530 A
5 CP - SUBM
Keys 1, 2, 4 and 6 effect a change to the TRANSFER xx form.
6 SUBM - CP
Keys 3 and 5 effect a change to the SUBMODULE SELECT
form after power-up or if the submodule has changed.

BRK : Return to INIT STATE form. I

I
● SELECT FUNCTION
!
I
————
1 2 3 4

3-13
 -
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530 on the PG 615 Programmer

3.7 Transfer of User Data

SUBMODULE SELECT form

The ordering codes of permissible EPROM/EEPROM sub- *TRANSFER Xxlxx

modules can be examined in the following forms. The digit as- ++
signed to the MLFB number of the connected module must be 1 : 6ES5372-0AA61
entered in the input field. After pressing the transition key in 2 : 6ES5373-0AA21
the assigned module type is then set until the module is 3 : 6ES5373-OAA41
changed. 4 : 6ES5373-0AA61
w
*SELECT ORDER. CODE
The function keys and their meaning: I
———.
ENTER : Enter ordering code assigned to the digit and 1 2 3 4
change to the TRANSFER xx form.

BRK : Return to the I NIT STATE form.

*TRANSFER Xxlxx
++ A
5 : 6ES5375-0LA15
6 : 6ES5375-0LA21
7 : 6ES5 375-0LA31
8 : 6ES5375-0LA41
w
*SELECT ORDER. CODE

————
1 2 3 4

*TRANSFER xx/xx
## A
9 : 6ES5375-OLC1l
10 : 6ES5375-0LC21
11 : 6ES5375-0LC31
12 : 6ES5375-0LC41
v
*SELECT ORDER. CODE
I I
————
1 2 3 4

*TRANSFER Xxlxx
++!= A
13 : 6ES5376-OAA1l
14 : 6ES5376-0AA21

I *SELECT ORDER. CODE

I
————
1 2 3 4

3-14
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530 on the PG 615 Programmer

3.7 Transfer of User Data

3.7.1 TRANSFER xx form

The function keys and their meaning: I *TRANSF. XX—XX

1 SYSID
Xxlxx
I —

1: Initiates transfer of SYSID identifiers 2 POLLING LIST

2: Initiates transfer of the polling list 3 INTERRUPT LIST
3: Initiates transfer of the interrupt list 4 ALL
4: Initiates transfer of all source user data
*SELECT LIST
Keys 1 to 4 effect transition to the TRANSFER ACKN form I I
————
BRK : Return to the TRANSFER form 1 2 3 4

In this form only those lists are offered which are in the source.

3.7.2 TRANSFER ACKN Form

This form only appears when transfer is to be made to the pro-

grammer and lists already in the programmer are to be over- *TRANSF. XX—XX Xxlxx
written.
Xxxxxxxxxxx
Xxxxxxxxxxx
The designations of the user data to be transferred (SYSID,
Xxxxxxxxxxx
POLLING LIST, INTERRUPT LIST), are entered in the output
fields of lines 3 to 5.
*OVERWRITE?
The function keys and their meaning:
———
ENTER : The transfer process is positively acknowledged 1 2 3 4
and executed. Transfer to the module can take
anything up to a minute, depending on memory
type. On completion, return to TRANSFER form.

BRK : Return to TRANSFER xx form

3-15
 3. Operator Input and CJperatlOn Ot the CWM 53U on the W ti15 Programmer -

3.8 Deletion of User Data

With this function, user data generated in the CP 530, the pro-
grammer or in the EEPROM submodule can be deleted. It is
possible to delete the polling list, the interrupt list and the
SYSID individually.
After pressing key 5 in the I NIT STATE form, the DELETE form
appears:
*DELETE

1 LISTS IN PG
Xxfxx
I
2 LISTS IN CP
3 LISTS IN EEPROM
The function keys and their meaning:

1
2
: Deletion of user data in the programmer.
: Deletion of user data in the CP 530.
*SELECT FUNCTION
I
3 : Deletion of user data in the EEPROM submodule ————
1 2 3 4
Keys 1 to 3 effect change to the DELETE xx form

BRK : Return to the I NIT STATE form

.
3.8.1 DELETE xx Form

This form always only displays the lists stored in the respec-
tive devices (e. g. CP 530). *DELETE IN XX Xxlxx

In the first output field of the top line the text PG, CP or SM 1 SYSID
appears, depending on which key was pressed in the DELETE 2 POLLING LIST
form. 3 INTERRUPT LIST
4 ALL
The function keys and their meaning:
*SELECT LIST
— 1: Deletion of the SYSID
2 : Deletion of the Dolling list
————
3 : Deletion of the ~nterr~pt list
: Deletion of all user data 1 2 3 4
4

N. B.: On deletion of all user data, only the first 2Kbytes of the EEPROM submodule are deleted even if the submodule has a
memory capacity of more than 2Kbytes. The erasing process can last up to a minute.

Keys 1 to 3 effect a change to the DELETE ACKN form.

BRK : Return to the DELETE form.

3.8.2 DELETE ACKN Form

In the first output field of the top Iinethetext PG, CPor SM ap-
pears, depending on which key was pressed in the previous *DELETE IN XX Xxlxx
form. The designations of the user data to be deleted appear
in the output fields of lines 3 to 5. Xxxxxxxxxxx
Xxxxxxxxxxx
The function keys and their meaning: Xxxxxxxxxxx

ENTER : Deletion process is activated, followed by return to

the DELETE form *DELETE?

: Return to the DELETE xx form I

BRK
————
1 2 3 4

3-16
I 3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530 on the PG 615 Programmer

3.9 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Form

When key 6 is pressed in the I NIT STATE form, the following

form appears:
● SPEC FUNCTION XX Xxlxx
—.
The function keys and their meaning: 1 CP MODE
1: C h a n g e t o t h e CP M O D E f o r m ( o n l y p o s s i b l e 2 DEFAULT
ON-LINE)
2 Change to the DEFAULTS form (see Subs. 3.2)
BRK ; Return to I NIT STATE form
I *SELECT FUNCTION

————
1 2 3 4

3.9.1 CP MODE Form

The information in this form is continually updated by the CP *CP MODE Xxlxx
in a function similar to “Status”.
CP MODE : Xxxxxxx
The current status of the CP 530 (RUN, STOP) is displayed i n
PG PRIORITY : XXXX
the “CP Status” field. The “PG Priority” field likewise displays
ERROR :x
the current status of the CP 530. (YES, NO). Function keys 1
and 2 refer to the CP status, and function keys 3 and 4 to the
PG programmed priority.
RUN STOP YES NO
If the CP is in the RUN status, for example, and the PG priority
is YES, only function keys 2 and 4 can be used in the menu. If
one of these function keys is pressed, (e. g. STOP), the mes- ————
sage CAUTION! PLANT! appears, and in the menu line key 2 1 2 3 4
only. By pressing function key 2 again, the CP is brought to
Stop status and only function keys 1 an 4 appear in the menu
line This process is executed for-all functio”n”keys. The texts RUN, STOR YES and NO do not appear if the keylock switch is set to
“ l ” .

After function key 2 is pressed, the menu appears as follows:

CAUTION! PLANT!
STOP
————
1 2 3 4

After function key 3 is pressed, the menu appears as follows:

CAUTION! PLANT!
YES
——.—
1 2 3 4

The message “CAUTION! PLANT!” appears. The relevant function key must then be pressed again.

The function keys and their meaning:

1 : The CP 530 is set to the Stop status. STOP appears in *CP MODE Xxlxx
A
the “CP status” field.
2 : The CP 530 is set to the Run status. RUN appears in the ERRORS:
“CP status” field. Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
3,4 : With these keys the CP 530 can be set to “PG PRIORITY Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
YES” mode or “PG PRIORITY NO” mode. Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
BRK : Return to INIT STATE form
DEL
In the “Error” field the number of errors accumulated in the
CP 530 is displayed. The plaintexts of the errors can be paged ————
using the cursor control keys V ‘(l The following form type 1 2 3 4
appears:

The plaintext of the error appears in the output fields, (see Subs. 4.2) The displayed error can be acknowledged with function key 1.

3-17
 3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530 on the PG 615 Programmer -

3.10 INFO Form

By pressing key 7 in the I NIT STATE form the following form ap-
pears:
*INFO Xxlxx

The function keys and their meaning: 1 PG CONTENTS

2 CP CONTENTS
1 : Information about user data in the programmer
2 : Information about user data in the CP 530 3 SUBM CONTENTS
3 : Information about user data in the EPROM/EEPROM
submodule
*SELECT FUNCTION
Function keys 1 to 3 effect a change to the CONTENTS form.
————
BRK : Return to the INIT STATE form
1 2 3 4

3.10.1 CONTENTS Form

PG, CP or SM appears in the first output field of the top line, *CONTENTS XX Xxlxx
depending on which information function was selected in the
INFO form. The output fields in lines 3 to 5 display which user SYSID : Xxxxxxxxxxx
data are available or not. PO-LI : Xxxxxxxxxxx
IN-LI : Xxxxxxxxxxx
The function keys and their meaning:

BRK : Return to the INFO form.

————
1 2 3 4

3-18
I 3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530 on the PG 615 Programmer

3.11 Test and Start-up

3.11.1 TEST Form

The function keys and their meaning: *TEST Xxlxx

1 : Change to the STATUS-FORCE form (display of 1 STATUWFORCE

mailbox contents) 2 BUS TEST
3 BUS CYCLE TIME
2 : Change to the BUS TEST form. Data traffic on the
SINEC LI LAN is stopped and can be continued
step by step in keeping with the polling list. *SELECT TEST

3 : Change to the BUS CYCLE TIME form —.—.

1 2 3 4
BRK : Return to the I NIT STATE form

3.11.2 STATUS-FORCE Form

1
The function keys and their meaning:

1 : Display of the status of the receive mailbox

I ‘STATIFRCE

1 RECEIVE MAILBOX
Xxlxx
I
2 SEND MAILBOX
2 : Display of the status of the send mailbox

BRK : Return to the TEST form

*SELECT FUNCTION
The function keys also effect a change to the STAT/FRCE-l
form. ————
1 2 3 4

3.11.2.1 STAT/FRCE 1 Form

R or S appears in the first output field of the top line, depend- *STATIFRCE X++++ Xxlxx
ing on whether a receive mailbox or a send mailbox was se-
lected in the STAT/FRCE form. The cursor is positioned to the
entry field in the top line. A slave number (1 to 30) must be
entered.

If the programmer is plugged direct into the CP 530 and the

CP 530 is set as a slave, this form is skipped and the slave *SELECT SLAVE NR.
number is entered automatically.
——
1 2 3 4
The function keys and their meaning:

ENTER : Enter the slave number and change to the STATUS

form.

BRK : Return to the STAT/FRCE form.

3-19
 -
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530 on the PG 615 Programmer

3.11 Test and Start-up

3.11.2.2 STATUS Form

— The data in the output fields of the top line are accepted by the *STATUS xxx Xxlxx
STAT/FRCE form. *
SB=XX S=XX D=xx L=XX
In addition, the following are displayed: xx : Xxxx Xxxx
Xxxx
xx : Xxxx Xxxx
Xxxx
SB : Slave status byte in hexadecimal form. For the contents xx : Xxxx Xxxx
Xxxx
of the status byte see Subs. 3.11.2.4 T= XXXX Ms v
S : Source of dis~laved data (O = CP 530) FRCE DW STBY PRNT
D : Destination o’f displayed data (O = CP530)
L : Length of the mailbox in bytes
T : Time in milliseconds between referencing a slave and 1 2 3 4
receiving its mailbox contents.

If the status is running an asterisk blinks in the second display line. If the asterisk is no longer blinking, there is no longer any data
traffic between the CP 530 and the programmer. The part of the form between the top line and the menu displays the mailbox con-
tents in hexadecimal form. Words are separted by blanks. The contents are updated continuously. The cursor control keys v o
can be used to page through longer mailboxes.

The function keys and their meaning:

1 Forcing the mailbox. The mailbox contents are fixed, i. e. the display is no longer updated (the asterisk in the display line
no longer blinks). The contents of the mailbox can be changed.
Change to the FORCE form
N. B.: The text FRCE above digit 1 on the display only appears in the send mailbox when the keylock switch is at “II”.

2 The cursor jumps to the data word number in the first line of the mailbox display. The menu line is deleted and a data word
number can be entered, If the ENTER key is pressed, the data word number is accepted and the mailbox display rolls to
the corresponding data word. With the BRK key, the previous status can be displayed again.

3 : With this function, the slave status byte, which is displayed hexadecimally in every mailbox, can be more closely examined.
— Change to the STATUS BYTE form.

4 Printout of mailbox contents on the printer. The display is frozen during printing.

BRK : Return to the STAT/FRCE form

3.11.2.3 FORCE Form

The cursor jumps to the left-hand data word in the first line of
the mailbox. Any data can then be selected using the cursor
control keys and changes can thus be made in the mailbox
I *FORCE XXX Xxlxx

contents.

The function keys and their meaning:

DEL : The data word at the cursor position is deleted.

Subsequent data word are moved one place to the
left and the length of the mailbox is reduced by one.
————
INS : A data word is inserted at the cursor position. 1 2 3 4
Subsequent data words are renumbered one
number higher and the length of the mailbox is
increased by one.

ENTER : The first time this key is pressed, “CAUTION! PLANT!” appears. The second time it is pressed, forcing is executed, i. e.
the modified send mailbox is sent to the destination node. Data traffic between the CP 530 and the programmer conti-
nues in the STATUS function.

—. BRK : Return to the FORCE form without executing forcing.

3-20
I 3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530 on the PG 615 Programmer

3.11 Test and Start-up

3.11.2.4 STATUS BYTE Form

Send mailbox Receive mailbox

*STATUS xxx Xxlxx *STATUS xxx Xxlxx

* *
STOPPC : ##*# PC STOPPED : ++4++4+
RUNPC : +++!=?++I PC RUNNING : ++i++#
SEND ENABLE SL : ###+ CROSS COMM. : ++++=++
INTERRUPT : =!+++*+I INTERRUPT : ++b+#
w v
FRCE PRNT PRNT

—.—— —.——
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

*STATUS XXX Xxlxx ‘STATUS xxx Xxlxx

* A * A
PG ROSTS BUS STOP PG ROSTS BUS STOP
BUS RUNNING : +++++ BUS RUNNING : *+++!=++
ONE SL FAILED : ***4+ ONE SL FAILED : #++#+
DP WITH ERROR : XXXX DP WITH ERROR : Xxxx

FRCE PRNT PRNT

————— ———.
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

The display of the status byte is updated continuously. A change in the slave status is therefore immediately displayed.

The function keys and there meaning:

1 : Forcing of the status byte. The status byte display is frozen. Control is passed to the FORCE STATUS BYTE form. FORCE
appears only in the send mailbox of a master.
4: Print out of mailbox contents and status byte on the printer.

3.11.2.5 FORCE STATUS BYTE Form Send mailbox

The status byte can now be changed for the specified slave.
*FORCE xxx Xxlxx
By changing the bit statuses (in the entry fields) and entering *
with the ENTER key, the status byte is accepted by the send
STOP PC : Xxxx
mailbox and the FORCE form is selected.
RUN PC : Xxxx
SEND ENABLE SL : Xxxx
The function keys and their meaning:
INTERRUPT : Xxxx
1 : YES is entered in the entry field at the cursor v
position YES NO PRNT
2 : NO is entered in the entry field at the cursor
position ————
BRK Return to the STATUS BYTE form 1 2 3 4
E N T E R ~ Enter the status byte in the send mailbox and
branch to FORCE of the send mailbox.
*CONTROL xxx Xxlxx
Note: If contradictory statuses are entered in the status * A
byte, e. g. PG Bit : Xxxx
STOP PC : YES and BUS RUNNING : Xxxx
RUNPC : YES ONE SL FAILED : Xxxx
then the message: ILLEGAL INPUT appears. The sta- DP WITH ERROR : Xxxx
tus byte can be accepted only when the contradictory
inputs have been corrected. YES NO PRNT

————
1 2 3 4

3-21
 -
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530 on the PG 615 Programmer

3.11 Test and Start-up

3.11.3 Bus Test

The BUS TEST function of the CP 530 enables SINEC LI to be tested step by step, while the data exchanged between the CP 530
and the nodes can be examined at the same time in the form of “mailboxes” and can also be changed. On changing to the BUS
TEST, the bus is stopped before the start of a new bus cycle (the CP 530 goes from RUN to STOP).

Sequence without interrupt (direct traffic):

In the first substep the operator can examine and also change the send mailbox of the CP 530 at the first slave of the polling list.
This substep is terminated by pressing the ENTER key and causes the mailbox contents to be sent.

As a result of this, the following is displayed:

The receive or cross communications mailbox of the referenced slave. The mailbox can be paged through with the cursor control
keys ~ O but it cannot be changed.

In the second substep, the next step is initiated with key 1 (CONT). The SINEC LI LAN is released until the next slave is polled (the
green LED on the CP 530 flashes momentarily).

—
As a result of this, the following is displayed:

The send mailbox of the CP 530 for the next slave in the polling list. The user is back at the start of the first substep for the second
slave in the polling list. When the polling list has been processed, the cycle starts again. If the bus test is interrupted, the CP 530
remains in the Stop status and can be switched back into RUN with the programmer or the mode selector.

Sequence with interrupt:

In this case, an operator input step is inserted after the first substep:
The send mailbox of the CP 530 at the slave responsible for the interrupt is displayed. The mailbox can be paged through with the
— cursor control keys, but the contents cannot be changed. Function key 1 calls up the display of the receive or cross communications
mailbox of the slave responsible for the interrupt. Function key ENTER leads to the second substep in the processing of the polling
list slave, If there is another interrupt, the relevant node must wait until at least one normal step has been executed in the polling list.

In the BUS TEST forms only those send mailboxes of the CP 530 which are at the current slave in the polling list can be changed.
Since data traffic on the SINEC LI LAN takes place step by step during the bus test, a build up of interrupts can hinder normal pro-
cessing of the polling list (this can be avoided by disabling the interrupt from the programmer).

When key 2 is pressed, the following message appears:

The question “BUSTEST” can be positively acknowledged

with the ENTER key and the PG 615 then takes the CP 530 into
the BUS TEST. Data traffic on the SINEC LI LAN is stopped at
the beginning of the polling list. Change to the BUS TEST
I *TEST

CAUTION:
Xxlxx
I
SEND MAl LBOX form. DANGEROUS
The TEST form appears again when the BRK key is pressed. PLANT CONDITION
POSSIBLE !

I *BUS TEST?
I
————
1 2 3 4

3-22
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 539 on the PG 615 Programmer

3.11 Test and Start-up

3.11.3.1 BUS TEST SEND MAl LBOX Form

*BUS TEST Sxx Xxlxx
The send mailbox of the CP 530 at the current slave on the
polling list is displayed. Changes can be entered in this mail- SB=XX S=XX D=xx L=XX
box. 00 : Xxxx Xxxx Xxxx
03 : Xxxx Xxxx Xxxx
The function keys and their meaning: 06 : Xxxx Xxxx Xxxx
T= XXXX Ms v
Characters above key 4 _ MODE DU STBY – _
1 : Modify the mailbox: Change to the MODIFY form
2 : Function as in STATUS (see Subs. 3.11.2.2) —.—.
3 : Function as in STATUS (see Subs. 3,11.2.2) 1 2 3 4
4 : Switch menu line

Characters above key 4 —

1
:
: Function as in STAT US key 4 (see Subs. 3.11.2.2) *BUS TEST Sxx Xxlxx
2 : Disable interruptlenable interrupt
4 : Switch menu line SB=XX S=XX D=xx L=xx
00 : Xxxx Xxxx Xxxx
ENTER : Send mailbox and change to BUS TEST MAlLBOX 03 : Xxxx Xxxx Xxxx
form or BUS TEST INTERRUPT CYCLE if an interrupt 06 : Xxxx Xxxx Xxxx
occurs. T= XXXX Ms v
PRNT INTS —
BRK : Return to TEST form. The SINEC LI LAN remains in
the Stop status. ———
1 2 3 4

3.11.3.2 MODIFY MAl LBOX Form

*BUS TEST Sxx Xxfxx
The cursor jumps to the left-hand data word in the first line of
the mailbox display. The mailbox can be paged through with
the cursor control keys; the data words can be modified.

The function keys and their meaning:

DEL : The data word at the cursor position is removed.
The subsequent data words are moved one number
—. ——
left and the mailbox is shortened by one.
4
INS : S~ace for a data word is inserted at the cursor position. The s~bsequent ~ata words3are moved 0ne number right and the
m’ailbox is lengthened by one.
ENTER : Send the mailbox and change to the second segment (BUS TEST RECEIVE MAlLBOX form)
BRK : Return to the BUS TEST SEND MAl LBOX form (the modified data are lost).

3.11.3.3 BUS TEST RECEIVE MAl LBOX Form

*BUS TEST Rxx XXfXX
The receive or cross communications mailbox of the current
slave is displayed. In the case of a cross communications SB=XX S=XX D=xx L=XX
mailbox, the message “CROSS COMMUNICATIONS” ap- 00 : Xxxx Xxxx Xxxx
pears in the second line. The receive mailbox can be paged 03 : Xxxx Xxxx Xxxx
through with the cursor control keys u O, but no changes can 06 : Xxxx Xxxx Xxxx
be made. T= XXXX Ms v
CONT DW STBY PRNT

The function keys and their meaning: ————

1 :
Change to the send mailbox display of the next slave 1 2 3 4
2 :
see BUS TEST SEND MAl LBOX form
3 :
see BUS TEST SEND MAl LBOX form
4 :
see BUS TEST SEND MAl LBOX form
ENTER : Polling of the next slave. Return to the BUS TEST
MAl LBOX form

3-23
 -
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530 on the PG 615 Programmer

3.11 Test and Start-up

3.11.3.4 BUS TEST INTERRUPT CYCLE Form

.— This form appears after the first substep on the recurrence of *BUS TEST xxx Xxrxx
an interrupt. * *INTERRUPT
SB=XX S=XX D=xx L=xx
The function keys and their meaning: 00 : Xxxx Xxxx Xxxx
03 : Xxxx Xxxx Xxxx
1 : Change to the receive mailbox display or the cross 06 : Xxxx Xxxx Xxxx
communications mailbox display of the slave T= XXXX Ms v
responsible for the interrupt. CONT DW STBY PRNT

2 : see BUS TEST SEND MAl LBOX form ———.

1 2 3 4
3 : see BUS TEST SEND MAl LBOX form

4 : see BUS TEST SEND MAl LBOX form

ENTER : Bus traffic is continued. If no further interrupt occur,

the BUS TEST RECEIVE MAl LBOX form appears in
which the receive mailbox or cross communications
mailbox of the current slave on the polling list is
displayed.

3.11.4 Bus Cycle Time

—
The current cycle time is displayed (CURRENT). The values
MINIMUM and MAXIMUM indicate the extreme values of
cycle time like non-return pointers.
I *BUS CYCLE TIME

CURRENT T=xxxx M S
Xxlxx
I

MINIMUM T=xxxx M S
The function keys and their meaning: M A X I M U M T ’ XXXX M S
=

1 : The minimum and maximum values are set to zero.

Capture of extreme values begins again.
I DEL
I
BRK : Return to the TEST form ———
1 2 3 4

3-24
I
4. COM 530 Error Messages

4.1 Errors displayed in the seventh Display Line

Error Meaning and remedy

CPABORT The programmer has recognized a BREAK. Check that the programmer is correctly connected to the
CP 530. Repeat function, if necessary. —
AREA NOT EMPTY The memory area into which the list in the submodule is to be programmed is not empty. Delete area.
MODE SELECTOR CP should be set to RUN even though mode selector is at STOP. Put switch to RUN.
NO REPLY FROM CP The CP 530 has not send an expected character within a certain time. Switch power supply off and on
again.
MAl LBOX FULL Send mailbox full. Do not enteranv more data.
WRONG MODE Function not ~ossible in this mode. Change mode. I
WRONG SUBMODULE The submodule plugged in does not match ordering code entered. Enter correct ordering code.
PROGRAMMING ERROR An error has occurred in .aroarammina. Delete module and repeat function.
WRONG FIRMWARE The COM 530 submodule is tiucmed into the wrong unit I
WRONG CP There is an EPROM submodule plugged into the CP which cannot be programmed by the CP. Connect
SUBMODULE an EEPROM module.
ERROR IN EXTERNAL RAM The RAM chio In the oroarammer is defective. The ~roarammermust be re~aired.
ERROR INTERNAL RAM The internal RAM of the processors defective. The processor must be replaced. I
ERROR PROG. EEPROM An error has occurred when programming the EEPROM submodule. Replace EEPROM submodule. —

NO SUBMODULE There is no user submodule plugged into the programmer. Plug submodule in.
PLUGGED IN
NO LIST AVAILABLE There is no list available in the ~rogrammer, the CP 530 or the submodule.
=
LIST FULL The polling list already contains 64slave numbers ortheinterrupt list already 30.
LIST NOT AVAILABLE The desired list is not in the CP 530, the rxoarammer or the user submodule. If necessarv, enter list.
I LISTALREADYAVAILABLE The list is alreadv available in the user submodule. Delete list if necessary. I
LIST NO DELETED List in user submodule not deleted. Delete list if necessary.
ON-LINE ONLY The desired function is only permissible ON-LINE. If necessary, set programmer to ON-LINE status.
PERMISSIBLE
ONLY IN POSITION II Kevlock switch in ~osition 1, and all input functions are therefore disabled. Set switch to position Il.
ONLY PERMISSIBLE IN This function is only allowed if the CP 530 has been initialized as a master. If necessary, initialize the CP
CASE OF MASTER as a master.
EEPROM ONLY There is an EPROM submodule plugged in and its data is supposed to be erased. If necessary,
PERMISSIBLE plug an EEPROM submodule in since an EPROM can only be erased with UVlight.
INTERFACE NOT READY The CP 530isin a mode which does not allow this function, or there is an EPROM submodule plugged
into the CP 530 and an attempt is being made to transfer a list to the CP 530. Change mode or remove
EPROM.
—
SLAVE FAILURE Slave does not report to CP 530. Check slave.
SLAVE NUMBER A slave number appears more than once in the interrupt list. Delete the relevant slave number until it
ASSIGNED MORE THAN occurs once in the interrupt list.
ONCE
SLAVE NOT IN POLLING The send or receive mailbox of the slave cannot be observed in Status mode because the slave is not
LIST in the ~ollina list. If necessarv. enter slave in ~ollin~ list.
SLAVE ALREADY FORCED The slave is already being forced by the CPU, and therefore cannot be forced by the programmer.
Otherwise, programmer priority must be set.
INVALID LIST There is an invalid list in the user submodule. Delete list and re-enter it.
ILLEGAL INPUT This input exceeds its permitted parameter limit. Observe the parameter limits.
ILLEGAL KEY I This key is not permissible in this function. Use permitted keys only.
RECEIVE ERROR,
PROGRAMMER
Programmer has received character it cannot interpret. Repeat function.
I
RECEIVE ERROR, The CP 530 has received a character it cannot interpret. Repeat function.
COMMUNICATIONS
PROCESSOR —.
I
PRINTER NOT READY Printer not connected or not switched on.
DELETE LISTS A master is to be re-initialized as a slave by the SYSID and the CP already contains the polling list
and/or interru~t list. I
4-1
 4. C O M 530 E r r o r M e s s a g e s -

4.2 Errors displayed in CP MODE

Errors in connection with data traffic on SINEC LI and bet-

ween the CP and the programmable controller are entered in
the “Error” field and displayed in the “Mode” form. 1,

The error numbers make it possible to classify the errors

roughly and the appended digits provide more details on the
error, depending on the error number (“Error classes” table).

Detailing a group error. In Class 1, these details are the results

of a self-test and should be reported to the works in the event
of a replacement or repair, e. g. Error 10: “Hardware error 7“.

Error classes:

Breakdown into error classes:

– Compressed representation of error types possible
– The error class provides the user with information on how
to eliminate the error.

Besides the errors described below, there are also irreparable

— errors that cannot be reported via SYSTAT, e. g. because the
equipment for their transmission is faulted or does not exist.

Error classes

Class Error No. Description Operator response Person involved

I 1

1+
1 10–29 Hardware configuration Check hardware, and replace or repair it 1. Operator
of module suspect 2. Service engineer

2 30–49 Operator error Mode selector Operator

Check program submodule

3 50–69 Initializing/programming error Diagnostics with programmer necessary Programmer

S5 software modification

Status messages Note error Operator

4-2
4. COM 530 Error Messages

4.2 Errors displayed in CP MODE

Error Error Error

class No. supplement
—
decimal representation

I 10 xx ERROR 10: HARDWARE ERROR XX

11 xx ERROR 11: INTERNAL ERROR MESSAGE NO. XX

II 30 0 ERROR 30: WAIT FOR SYNCH RON

31 0 ERROR 31: WRONG CP S U B M O D U L E
32 0 ERROR 32: PROGRAMMER ACTIVE PRIORITY
33 0 ERROR 33: CP IN STOP STATUS; SLAVE CANNOT SEND
34 0 ERROR 34: CP NOT IN STOP STATUS
35 0 ERROR 35: CP RUN NOT POSSIBLE

Ill 50 0 ERROR 50: SYSID ERROR

51 0 ERROR 51: POLLING LIST ERROR
52 0 ERROR 52: INTERRUPT LIST ERROR
53 0 ERROR 53: UNSPECIFIED TASK
54 0 ERROR 54: UNKNOWN TASK
55 0 ERROR 55: UNSPECIFIED SEND
56 0 ERROR 56: UNSPECIFIED RECEIVE
57 0 ERROR 57: A-NO.: MASTER ONLY —
58 0 ERROR 58: A-NO.: SLAVE ONLY
59 0 ERROR 59: A-NO.: JOB TOO LONG
60 0 ERROR 60: SLAVE NOT IN POLLING LIST
61 0 ERROR 61: A-NO.: THE JOB NUMBER USES AN UNDEFINED LIST
62 0 ERROR 62: A-NO.: JOB NUMBER SBR NOT ALLOWED

Iv 70 0 ERROR 70: BUS ERROR

71 0 ERROR 71: CONNECTION TO SLAVE HAS AN INTERFERENCE
72 0 ERROR 72: WRONG SLAVE REPORTING
73 0 ERROR 73: SLAVE EXTRACTED

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft 4-3 Order No.: GWA 4NEB 8110521 .02c

Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
AG 4871.5 FI 30 En
 SIEMENS
SIMATIC S5 / SINEC LI
CP 530 Communications Processor
COM 530 with S5-DOS
(PG 635, PG 675, PG 685, PG 695)
Operating Instructions Order No.: GWA 4NEB 811 0730-02a

Contents Page Contents Page

1. Introduction 1-1 3.6 TRANSFER Form 3-19

2. Definitions 2-1 3.7 Test and Startup 3-22
3. Operator Input and Operation 3.7.1 TEST Form 3-22
of the COM 530 3-1 3.7.2 STAT/FORCE Form 3-23
3.1 COM 530 Basic Form 3-1 3.7.3 STATUS Form 3-25
3.2 CONFIGURATION Form 3-2 3.7.4 FORCE Form 3-28
- 3.3 Entering (Programming) User Data 3-6 3.7,5 STATUS BYTE Form 3-30
3.3.1 Programming the System Parameters 3.7.6 BUS TEST Function 3-33
(SYSID-INP Form) 3-7 BUS TEST Forms 1 to 3 3-34
3.3.2 Generation of a Polling List (PO LL-INP) 3-9 3,7.7 CYCLE TIME Form 3-41
3.3.3 Generation of an Interrupt list 3.8 INFO Form 3-42
(I NTERRUPT-INP Form) 3-11 3.9 DELETE Form 3-45
3,4 Output (Display) of the User Data 3-12 3.10 Setting the Operating Mode
3.4.1 SYSID-DISP Form 3-13 (MODES form) 3-47
3.4.2 POLL-DISP Form 3-14 3.10,1 Operating Modes 3-47
3.4.3 INTERRUPT-DISP Form 3-15 3.10.2 Error Messages 3-50
3.5 PRINT Form 3-16 4 APPENDIX 4-1
3.5,1 PRINTPAR Form 3-18 4.1 COM 530 Error List 4-1

.—
1. Introduction

The SINEC LI Local Area Network permits communication between up to 31 SIMATIC S5 programmable controllers of the U range
in master/slave mode.
The COM 530 software package for all programmers on which S5-DOS can execute (PG 635, PG 675, PG 685, PG 695) is used to
assign parameters to the SINEC LI CP 530 communications processor (generation of SYSID as well as polling list and interrupt
list), to select the LAN operating mode, to control data traffic and to document and archive the bus parameters on mini diskettes.

All operator inputs are made via interactive screen forms (entry fields) and function keys (or softkeys).
The significance of the function keys can be seen in the menu displayed in the bottom three lines of the screen

In addition, the familiar functions of the keys on the PG 675 programmer, such as acknowledgement ( d), Abort ( ~), etc. have
been retained.

See also the S5-DOS Operating Instructions in your programmer manual.

The S5-DOS version of the COM 530 is available in two diskette sizes.

3’/2 in. for the PG 635

FjI/4 in. for the PG 675, PG 685 and pG 695

Starting COM 530:

PG 635 and PG 675

1, Insert the PCP/M 86 diskette in drive A and switch the programmer on.
2. Insert the ZEFU diskette (PG 675: ZEFU 3/3).
3. Remove the PCP/M 86 diskette and insert the COM 530 diskette.
4. Start S5-DOS (by typing in S5).
5. The programmer displays a menu listing all the programs available on diskette. Select COM 530
6. Insert a formatted diskette in one of the drives.
..
PG 685 and PG 695
1. Copy the COM 530 diskette onto the hard disk.
Remove the diskette.
2. Start S5-DOS (by typing in S5)
3. The programmer displays a menu listing all the programms available on diskette. Select COM 530.
4. Insert a formatted diskette in one of the drives. The data may also be stored on the hard disk (drive C).

1-1
 m

2. Definitions

The following are described:

● Layout of the interactive screen forms

● Meaning of the entry and output fields in the interactive forms
● Meaning and effect of the softkeys and function keys.

Output fields in the interactive forms are marked XXXXX . In these fields COM 530 shows current statuses or data entered with the
previous operations.

Entry fields in the interactive forms are marked +++*+=+ and. appear on the programmer screen in inverse video. Entries can be
made in these fields by means of the alphanumeric keyboard and, in some cases, with the function keys (HELP func-
tion).

Error messages of COM 530 always appear in the last line on the screen before the menu

Bus parameter: All parameters necessary to operate the LAN and generated by the user with the aid of the COM 530 software
(polling list, interrupt list, SYSID identifiers, see SINEC LI Operating and Programming Instructions).

The bus parameters are generated when programming (see Section 3.3) and stored by means of function keys.
Where they are stored depends on the COM 530 mode set, i. e. ONLINE or OFFLINE.
—
In ONLINE mode, the user data are stored directly in the CP 530 communications processor. In OFFLINE mode, this is done on a
minidiskette, on a hard disk or on an EPROM/EEPROM submodule.

When changing over to programming bus parameters these are read from the CP 530 communications processor or minidiskette
or hard disk – that is, if user data are already stored there – and displayed on the respective forms where they can be modified and
re-stored.

Program name:A user-selectable name for identifying all user data assigned to a CP 530 interface and stored on diskette

The Significance of the Cursor Control Keys and Function Keys

a) Cursor Control Keys

In most of the interactive forms used, the significance of the control key functions is as follows:
Al
I The Cursor is positioned to the first entry field in the line above (below).
I v
= = > < = = The cursor is positioned to the previous (next) entry field.

--> <-- The cursor is positioned to the previous (next) character within an entry field.
If the left (or right) field limit is exceed, the cursor moves to the previous (next) field.

b) Function Keys

The COM 530 software package generally permits parallel input both by means of softkeys and functions keys. The operator there-
fore does not have to relearn programmer operations.

In most of the interactive forms used the significance of the keys is as follows:

J Jump to next entry field

Deletion of a character at the cursor position

x
~
Insertion of a character at the cursor position

+ This key always has the same meaning as function key F8 EXIT (parallel key).
This results in the next-highest level in the form hierarchy being entered without the input data in the current screen
form being evaluated.

This key means ,, Store” if softkey F6 STORE has been defined in the form.
@ These are also parallel keys and have the same function.

HELP The HELP key has the same function as function keyF7– HELP if it has been defined in the form.

2-1
 m

3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.1 COM 530 Basic Form

After COM 530 has been called, the following form appears:
—
OPERATING STATE: USER I

0000000 000000 00 00 00000000 000000 000000

00 00 00 000 000 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 000000 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 0000000 000 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0000000 000000 00 00 0000000 000000 000000

SOFTWARE SUPPORT FOR THE CP 530 SINEC L1 COMMUNICATIONS PROCESSOR

VERSION/RELEASE xxxxxx SERIAL NO.: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

— F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
F1

CONFIG HELP EXIT

Function keys:

F1 : Selection of the configuration form.

In ONLINE mode contact is established with the CP 530. If the event message “CP does not reply” appears (after
approx. 20 s), check the connecting cable.
—
F7: Set the OFFLINE or ONLINE mode with HELP key. Default is OFFLINE.

F8: Takes you back into the S5-DOS operating system.

3-1
I
3. Operator Input and Operation of COM 530

3.2 CONFIGURATION form

Either the CONFIGURATION (ONLINE) or CONFIGURATION (OFFLINE) form appears, depending on whether COM 530 is beina
used on-line of off-line. —
(1) ONLINE programming:

Node:: xx/xx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ONLINE

I CON F I G U RAT I O N

‘<==’Fl’ ’w===@<====m’m
c1PRINTER I
SINEC L1

CONFIGURATION (ONLINE) form

The softkey menu for the CONFIGURATION (ONLINE) form is in two parts:

Menu 1 a):

[ FI F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
TESTAND
INPUT DISPLAY PRINT TRANSFER START-UP PAGE EXIT

Menu 1 b):

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

INFO DELETE MODES PAGE EXIT

Meaning of the output fields in the CONFIGURATION (ONLINE) form:

The “Nodes” field in the header display a two-part node number, which is read out of the SYSI D area of the CP 530.
For the master the second part is /00; for a slave it is a number greater than O (1-30).

The next two fields show the version number and symbolic designation of the CP 530 (only if the programmer is connected directly
or indirectly to the CP 530, i, e. in ONLINE mode).

The identifier of the programmer on which COM 530 is currently running is displayed in the programmer symbol.

3-2
 3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.2 CONFIGURATION Form

Function keys:

Menu 1 a)

Fl: Entry of user data

The following are possible:
- Programming the system parameters (SYSID),
– Generation of a polling list,
— Generation of an interrupt (priority) list.
Selects the ENTRY form.

F 2: Display of user data

If available, SYSID identifiers, the polling list and the interrupt list can be displayed.
Selects the DISPLAY form.

F 3: Listing user data

The user data generated can be output for documentation purposes on a printer connected to the programmer.
Selects the PRINT form.

F 4: Transfer of SYSID identifiers, polling and interrupt lists

This function permits the transfer of bus parameters from the CP 530 onto mini-diskette. EPROMs and EEPROMS can
also be programmed with the bus parameters.
Selects the TRANSFER form.

F 5: Selects the testing of data traffic on the SINEC L1 (TEST form)

Note: A drive must be specified for a user diskette or a hard disk even in ONLINE mode.

F 6: Selects Menu 1 b

F 8: Initiates return to the COM 530 basic form

Menu lb)

F 1: Selects the “Information” mode

Information is given on whether SYSID identifiers and/or polling list and/or interrupt list are in the CP 530 or
EPROM/EEPROM submodule.
In addition, information is given on the programs stored on the user diskette (program names) and their contents
(INFO form).

F 2: Selects the “Delete” mode

Deletes SYSID indentifiers, polling or interrupt lists (DELETE form)

F 3: Selects mode setting (MODE form).

F 6: Selects menu la

F 8: Initiates return to the COM 530 basic form

3-3
I
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.2 CONFIGURATION Form

(2) OFFLINE programming:

,
Node: xx/xx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx OFFLINE

C O N F I G U RAT 10 N

~l<..>F[;:~l---->
——.——————.———
T
=q<===>m
m SINECL1

Drive: + Program name: xxxxxxxx

J
CONFIGURATION (OFFLINE) form

The softkey menu for the CO NFIGURATl ON (OFFLINE) form is also in two parts:

Menu 2 a):

FI F2 F3 F4 F5

INPUT DISPLAY PRINT TRANSFER

Menu 2 b):

FI F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

INFO DELETE PAGE HELP EXIT

Entry and output fields:

PROGRAM NAME:
In OFFLINE mode, the user must enter a name here which he can use to identify new or already existing bus parameters (lists and
SYSID). This specifies the file name under which the user data are read from, or written onto, the diskette. In addition, the drive con-
taining the diskette or hard disk should also be specified.

The HELP function can be used to enter all program names on the diskette.

For the meaning of the output fields, see the CONFIGURATION (ONLINE) form. The “Version no. ” and “Symbolic designation”
fields of the CP 530 are blank in OFFLINE mode.

The identifier of the programmer which is currently running COM 530 (e. g. PG 685) is displayed in the programmer symbol

3-4
 m

3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.2 CONFIGURATION Form

Function keys:
—.

Menu 2a)

F 1, F2 F3: see Menu 1 a.

F 4: Transfer of SYSID identifiers, polling and interrupt lists

This function permits bus parameters to be transferred from mini-diskette into the CP 530. EPROMs or EEPROMS can
also be programmed with the bus parameters.
Selects the TRANSFER form.

F 6: Selects menu 2 b

F 7: HELP function
With the aid of the HELP function, the names of all programs (i.e. bus parameters) on the user diskette can be entered
in the “PROGRAM NAME” field.

F 8: Initiates return to the COM 530 basic form

.—
Menu 2 b)

Fl: Selects the “Information” mode

Information is given on whether SYSID identifiers and/or polling list and/or interrupt list are available in the EPROM
or EEPROM. In addition, information is given on the programs stored on the user diskette (program names) and their
contents. (INFO form)

F 2: Selects the “Delete” mode

Deletion of SYSID identifiers, polling or interrupt list. (DELETE form)

F 6: Selects menu 2 a
—
F 7: HELP function
The HELP function can be used to enter the names of programs (i. e. bus parameters) on the selected drive in the
“PROGRAM NAME” field.

F 8: Initiates return to the COM 530 basic form

Possible error messages:

Error 2A: ,, WARNING No EPROM driver on the system diskette. No EPROM calls!!!”
-— The attempt to program data direct into an EPROM/EEPROM or to read data out of an EPROM/EEPROM causes the
program to crash ==> The “IN TERRUPTTRAP HALT” message appears.

Remedy: Load the original S5-DOS system diskette and restart program.

Error 46: “Incomplete entry”

A freely selectable program name and the drive identifier must be specified in OFFLINE mode.

3-5
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.3 Entering (Programming) User Data

INPUT form .

Node: xx/xx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Xxxxxxx

Drive: x Program name: Xxxxxx

I I N PUT

IA-k.!&
F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
INTERR.
LIST EXIT

The following applies o the header in this and all subsequent forms:

The node numbers and identifiers are taken from the SYSID area of the CP 530 communications processor in ONLINE mode. If
OFFLINE mode has been selected, these data are taken from the SYSID identifiers stored on the user diskette. If the SYSID
identifiers stored on the user diskette under the program names specified in OFFLINE programming are not (yet) available, the
fields in the header remain vacant.

The “Program name” field is only displayed when programming OFFLINE. It then contains the name specified in the CONFIGURA-
TION (ONLINE) form.

Assignment of the function keys: Softkeys F2 and F3 only appear if the CP 530 is master in the SINEC LI network.

Fl: Selects programming of the system parameters. (SYSID-ON form)

F2: Creation of the polling list (PO LL-INP form).

(Only possible when programming a master)

F3: Creation of the interrupt (priority) list (interrupt-lNP form).

(Only possible when programming a master)

F8: Initiates return to the CONFIGURATION form.

3-6
 -
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.3 Entering (Programming) User Data

3.3.1 Programming the System Parameters (SYSID-INP Form)

The SYSID data area is a memory area in the CP 530 used for identification purposes.

Purpose of the SYSID:

– To uniquely describe the role of an intelligent module (e. g. CP 530) in a programmable controller svstem
– To transfer parameters to an intelligent module, causing ~ertain reactions, -
– To give information on the firmware and software status of the module.

Nodes: Xxlxxx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Xxxxxxx

Drive: x Program name: Xxxxxxxx

SYSI D CP530

00 Submodule identifier: xxxx#+#–#+H##

01 Module identifier: Xxxxxxxx
02 Firmwareversion identifier: Xxxxxxxx
03 Plant designation: *## H##HHHl#*
—.. 04 Usersoftware generation date: ##+HHHH#
07 Slave No. on PG/SINEC Ll: H/#c# Master/Slave
12 ldent No. ###
13 Automat. restart: + (Y= Yes, N= No)
16 Transmission speed: 9600baud

FI F2 F3 F4 F5 I F6 I F7 I F8

STORE HELP EXIT

Description of the SYSID INP form:

(1) ONLINE programming:

When the CP 530 is started, the operating system transfers the “Submodule identifier”, “ Module identifier”, and “Firmware version
identifier” parameters to the SYS I D area reserved in the RAM. Then it transfers the other ~arameters to the SYSl D area from the
.
memory su”bmodule connected (EPROM/EEPROM).
In ONLINE programming, the SYSID identifiers of the CP 530 appear in this form and can be modified by overwriting them. In order
to do so, the CP 530 must be set to STOP (Section 3,10.1).

(2) OFFLINE programming:

The form also appears completed on the screen in OFFLINE programming if a SYSID file exists on the diskette under the program
name specified (see CONFIGURATION form).
Otherwise the entry fields are vacant or defaulted with possible alternatives.
The contents of the SYSID (except for the first three parameters) can be generated OFFLINE on the programmer and transferred
to an EPROM/EEPROM. This means that the EPROM s/EEPROMs can be identified at any time and can program the CP 530 on start-
up.

3-7
I
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.3 Entering (Programming) User Data

Entry fields in the SYSID-INP form:

PLANT DESIGNATION:

Name freely selectable with up to 19 alphanumeric characters e.g.: “SHEDI PLA4 PC7°

USER SOFTWARE GENERATION DATE:

The generation date of the user software can be specified in a freely selectable format (e. g.: “31. 01. 85”)

SLAVE-NO. ON PG/SINEC L1 :

Specification of the node number of the CP 530 on the PG or SINEC LI bus.

Examples: ,, / 1 0 ” o n l y n o d e n u m b e r f o r SINEC L1
,,–8/–4’( two-part node number
,r-7f—” . only node number for PG bus

(,,-” stands for a blank; the “/” is provided by the programmer)

Range: Slave no. on PG bus: 1...30

Slave no. on SINEC LI: 1...30

Page frame no.:

The page frame number defines the position of the dual-port RAM in the address area.

Range: 1...254

AUTOMAT. COLD RESTART:

The alternatives YES (Y) and NO (N) can be entered using the HELP function. In the SYSID area, YES is stored asAand NO as blank.

Default: “N”

TRANSMISSION SPEED:

The default transmission speed is 9,600 baud and cannot be altered.

Function keys:

F6: In ONLINE mode: Storing the SYSID identifiers in the CP 530

In OFFLINE mode: Storing the SYSID identifiers on the user diskette or hard disk under the program name
specified.
After storage – return to the INPUT form.

F7: Help functions by paging possible alternatives (only in the “Master/Slave identifier”, “Adressing mode” and “Auto-
matic cold restart” fields.) Depressing the HELP function key causes a description to be displayed in the other Entry
fields. This can be exited with F 8 (Exit), returning to this form.

F8: Return to the INPUT form without storing the SYSID identifiers.

3-8
 m
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.3 Entering (Programming) User Data

3.3.2 Generation of a Polling List (PO LL-INP Form)

For minimal operation of the SINEC Ll, only the polling list is required. This list contains 64 locations for entering slave numbers; the
sequence thus laid down defines the order in which the slaves are to be addressed in LAN operation. The simplest case is the natural
sequence; if all 64 places are used and certain slaves are specified several times, a certain priority can be achieved.

Simple case:

1 2 3 4
m n

Assigning priority to slave 3:

1 2 3 4 5 3 6 7 3
~~~Πx

—
POLL-INP form:

When entering a polling list for the first time, the following form appears:

ode: XXJXX CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Xxxxxxx

rive: x Program name: Xxxxxxxx

POLLING LIST

=> #+ ==>

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 FE

DELETE INSERT STORE EXIT

L---

The entry field between the arrows symbolizes the first location in the polling list. The number of the first node in the list can be
entered here. The first double arrow signifies the beginning of the list, the final double arrow the end of the list.

The Fl, F2 and F6 function keys have no significance at this time as the list does not contain any nodes yet.

3-9
I
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.3 Entering (Programming) User Data

After a node number (e. g. 10) has been typed into the entry field, the form changes as follows:

dode: Xxlxx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Xxxxxxx

)rive: x Program name: Xxxxxxxx

POLLING LIST

=>10 ––> ++ ==>

FI F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

DELETE INSERT STORE EXIT

It can be seen that, after a node has been entered in the list, a new entry field is offered for entering a further node and thus building
up the list.
The slave numbers (1 to 30) are keyed into the entry fields in the sequence in which they are to be addressed. The same slave can
appear several times, thus receiving higher priority than other slaves.

The polling list can have up to 64 entries.

After a certain number of slave numbers have been entered (e. g. 20) the form looks like this:

Node: Xxlxx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Xxxxxxx

Drive: x Program name: Xxxxxxxx

POLLING LIST

==> 10 ––> 11 ––> 12 ––> 1 ––> 2 ––> 3 ––> 10––>4 ––>

––> 5 ––> 10 ––> 6 ––> 7 ––> 8 ––> 10 ––> 9 ––> 2 ––>
––> 13 ––> 14 ––> 10 ––> 2 ––> ++ ==> ,

FI F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

DELETE INSERT STORE EXIT

The slave numbers can be changed once the respective field has been selected using the cursor control keys.

The function keys now have the following assignments:

Fl: Operation of this key deletes the slave entry in the field on which the cursor is presently positioned (current entry
field). All slaves following this entry field are than automatically moved one place forward. If the last field is deleted,
the cursor automatically jumps to the first field.

F 2: Operation of this key releases the current field, i. e. all slave numbers following this are moved one position to the
right.
The key has no effect if the cursor is in the last (free) entry field or if 64 entries have already been made.

3-1o
 m

3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.3 Entering (Programming) User Data

F 6: Storing the polling list in the CP 530 (ONLINE mode) or on the user diskette or hard disk (OFFLINE mode) and return
to the INPUT form.

F 8: Return to the INPUT form without storing the polling list.

Possible error messages:

Error Ol: “illegal input”!

– At least one slave number must be entered in the list,
– Possible slave numbers: 1 to 30.

Error 26: “Blank fields illegal”!

The polling list must not have blank fields. The cursor is in the first blank field that has been found.
Remedy: – Delete the field or
– Enter slave number in the respective field.

3.3.3 Generation of an Interrupt List (INTERRUPT-INPUT Form)

— The interrupt list is only required if slaves can interrupt bus traffic with an interrupt request. The bus master then searches for the
cause of interrupt in the sequence specified in the interrupt list.

Generation and display of the interrupt list is the same as for the polling list.

The following form therefore appears when an interrupt list is generated for the first time:

Node: XXIXX CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Xxxxxxx

Drive: x Program name: Xxxxxxxx

I NTE RRU PT L I ST

==> 10 ––> ##

FI F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

DELETE INSERT STORE EXIT

hurther operations and functions of the softkeys can be seen from the despriction of polling list generation (Section 3.3.2).

The numbers of the slaves (1 to 30) must be keyed into the entry fields in their order of priority in the event of a bus interrupt, The
slave entered in the first field has the highest priority, the second the second-highest priority, etc.

Note: Each slave number may only be specified once!

Possible error messages:

Error 27: ,,No double slave numbers in interrupt list!”

Each slave may only appear once in an interrupt list. The cursor is in the field in which the slave number appears for
the second time.
Remedy: – Delete the respective field or
– Enter another slave number in the respective field.

See the PO LLING-INP form for other error messages.

3-11
I
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.4 Output (Display) of the User Data

DISPLAY form

Node: Xxlxx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Xxxxxxx

D I S P LAY

Source: #*+###+##+

Program name: ##++#### (only if source = drive)

FI F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
POLLING INTERRUPT
SYSID LIST LIST HELP EXIT

Entry fields in the DISPLAY form:

SOURCE:
The source can be specified here without changing the mode. An EPROM (EEPROM)
can also be specified as source!

Possibilities:
Mode Source

OFFLINE FD*, EPROM, EEPROM * Depending on drives defined,

ONLINE FD*/ CP 530, EPROM, EEPROM e. g. A, B, C

These alternatives can be entered with the HELP function.

Default: ONLINE mode CP 530

OFFLINE mode FD

PROGRAM NAME:

If a diskette (FD) is specified as source, a program name must be entered under which the user data have been stored on the dis-
kette.
The HELP function can be used to enter all program names stored on the user diskette.

Function keys: (Softkeys F 2 and F 3 only appear if the CP 530 is master!)

Fl: Causes display of the system parameters (SYSID-DISP form)

F 2: Displays polling list (PO LL-DISP form)

(Only for display of master data)

F 3: Display of interrupt (priority) list (I NTERRUPT-DISP form)

(Only for display of master data)

F 7: HELP function for entering source and programm name

(if source = floppy disk)

F 8: Return to CONFIGURATION FORM

3-12
 m

3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.4 Output (Display) of the User Data

Possible error messages:

—
Error Ol: “illegal Input!”
Source must be specified. The following possibilities exist:

Mode Source

OFFLINE FD*, EPROM, EEPROM * Depending on drives defined,

ONLINE FD*, CP530, EPROM, EEPROM e. g. A, B, C

Error 31: “No polling list!”

Error 32: “No interrupt list!”

Error 33: “No SYSID identifier!”

One of these three error messages appears if the respective data type does not exist in the CP 530, the EPROM or in the
programs specified on the user diskette.
.
Error 46: “Incomplete input”
A program nam”e must be specified if the diskette (FD) is the source.

3.4.1 SYSID-DISP form

Node: Xxlxx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Xxxxxxx

Drive: x Program name: Xxxxxxxx

SYSI D CP 530
—
Submodule identifier: Xxxxxxxxxxxx
Module identifier: Xxxxxxxx
Firmware version identifier: Xxxxxxxx
Plant designation: Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
User software generation date: Xxxxxxxx
Slave No. on PG/SINEC Ll: xx / xx Master/Slave
Page frame No.: xxx
Automatic cold restart: x (Y= Yes, N = No)
Transmission speed: 9600baud

FI F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

INPUT EXIT

The significance of the data in the output fields can be seen from the SYSID-DISP form.
In output field 5 (ONLINE or OFFLINE) EPROM is specified as source if an EPROM is used.

Function keys: (Softkey F 1 remains unassigned if display is from an EPROM!)

Fl: This key initiates display of the form for SYSID identifier input (see Section 3.3.1)

F8: causes return to the DISPLAY form

3-13
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.4 Output (Display) of the User Data

3.4.2 PO LL-DISP Form

Jode: Xxlxx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Xxxxxxx

)rive:x Program name: Xxxxxxxx

POLLING LIST

==> xx––> xx––> xx––> xx––> xx––> xx––> xx––> xx––>

––> xx––> xx––> xx––> xx––> xx––> xx––> xx––> xx––>
––> xx––> xx––> xx––> xx––> xx==>

FI F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

INPUT EXIT

lnoutput field 50ftheheader (ONLINEorOFFLINE) “EPROM’’a ppearsassource ifan EPROM isused.

The polling list stored is displayed as generated (see Section 3.3.2) with the following differences:

— There are no entry fields.

— There is no vacant field at the end of the list.

The slave numbers appear in the output fields as generated.

Assignment of the function keys: (Softkeys does not appear if display is from an EPROM or EEPROM!)

Fl: This key permits entries to be made in the polling list (see Section 3.3.2) for modification, etc.

F 8: Causes return to the DISPLAY form

3-14
 -
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.4 Output (Display) of the User Data

3.4.3 INTERRUPT-DISP Form

—
Node: Xxlxx CP530 Xxxxxxxtixxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Xxxxxxx
Drive:x Program name: Xxxxxxxx

INTERRUPT LIST

==> xx ––> xx ––> xx ––> xx ––> xx ––> xx ––> xx ––> xx ––>

––> xx––> xx––> xx––> xx––> xx––> xx––> xx––> xx––>
––> xx––> xx––> xx––> xx––> xx

FI F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F? F8

INPUT EXIT

In output field 5 of the header (ONLINE or OFFLINE) “EPROM” appears as source if an EPROM is used!

The interrupt list stored is displayed as generated (see Section 3.3.3), with the following differences:
—
— There are no entry fields.
— There is no vacant field at the end of the list.

The slave numbers appear in the output field as entered.

Assignment of the function keys: (Softkey F 1 does not appear if display is from an EPROM or EEPROM!)

Fl: This key permits entries to be made in the interrupt list (see Section 3.3.3) for modifications etc.

. F 8: Causes return to the DISPLAY form

3-15
1
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.5 PRINT Form

Node: Xxlxx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Xxxxxxx

PRINT

Source: #4F*#+?+#+*#

Program name: +H+++## (only ifsource= drive)

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
PRINTER TOTAL
PARAMETERS PRINTOUT HELP EXIT

Entry fields in the PRINT form:

SOURCE:

Here it is possible to specify the source without changing the mode. An EPROM can also be given as source!
Possibilities:
Mode Source

OFFLINE FD*, EPROM, EEPROM * Depending on drives defined,

ONLINE FD*, CP530, EPROM, EEPROM e. g. A, B, C . . .

These alternatives can be entered using the HELP function.

Default: ONLINE mode . . . . . . CP 530

OFFLINE mode FD

PROGRAM NAME:

If a diskette (FD) is specified as source, a programm name must be entered here under which the bus parameters have been stored
on diskette. The HELP function can be used to review all program names from the user diskette.

3-16
 m
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.5 PRINT Form

Function keys:

Fl: Causes transfer to the PRINTPAR form for assignment of parameters to the PG printer output.
(PRINT-PAR)

The following menu appears:

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

YES NO HELP EXIT

Fl: Print parameters are read from the user diskette before printer.

F2: No parameters are read and printing is started.

F7: HELP function for entering the source.

— F8: Return to the CONFIGURATION form.

Printing of all user data from the CP 530 (in ONLINE mode) or user data from the EPROM or the user data in the user drive under the
program name specified (in OFFLINE mode). The printed pages are provided with headers and footers (user texts as in F 1) and
numbered.

Possible error messages:

Error Ol: ,,lllegal input!”

Mode Source

OFFLINE FD*, EPROM, EEPROM * Depending on drives defined,

-— ONLINE FD*, CP530, EPROM, EEPROM e. g. A, B, C

Error 46: “incomplete input”

If the diskette (FD) is stated as source, a program name must be specified.

3-17
I
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.5 PRINT Form

3.5.1 PRINTPAR Form

Number of lines per page: #+

Header:

Node: Xxlxx I cP530xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Xxxxxxx

#+F#+HF+HHHHH+HH#+ Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Footer:

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

STORE EXIT

This form is also used todefine the format ofprintouts.

The print parameters can only be stored once on diskette or hard disk. They then apply for all records.

Entry fields in the PRINTPAR form:

NUMBER OF LINES PER PAGE: Specification of number of lines per page for the programmer printer connected.
Range: 40...65

DATE: The current date can be entered herein any format.

The other entry fields can be filled with user text as required.

In this case, the output fields only indicate that dynamic texts appear in the printout here.
(’SYSID’, ‘Polling list’, ‘Page number’ etc.)

The entries in the ONLINE and OFFLINE printouts refer to the state of COM 530 when storing the print parameters.

Function keys:

F 6: Operation of this function key causes the parameters generated for printout to be stored on the user diskette. They
are not assigned to any program name.
The next time parameters are assigned to the printer, this form already has these parameters as defaults.

F 8: Return to the PRINT form

Possible error messages:

Error Ol: “illegal input”

Permissible number of lines 40 to 65

3-18
 -

3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.6 TRANSFER Form

Node: Xxlxx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Xxxxxxx

I Transfer from
TRANSFER

+#41+k#*+##+to #++#4+#+Wk+k
SYSID:
Polling list
Interruptkk

Programname: ++##*#H# +H#**#H

Entryfields intheTRANSFERfrom:

TRANSFERFROM/TO:

In these two fields, the source and destination of the transfer are to be specified
(This is also possible using the HELP key).
—
Possibilities:

Mode Source Destination

OFFLINE FD, EPROM, EEPROM FD, EPROM, EEPROM

ONLINE FD, CP530, EPROM, EEPROM FD, CP530, EPROM, EEPROM

Default: Source: ‘DISKETTE’ (’FD’)

Destination: ‘EPROM’

PROGRAM NAME:

If the diskette is specified as either destination or source, a program name must be entered under which the user data is stored on
the diskette or are to be stored on it.
The HELP key can be used to review all program names on the user diskette.

Function keys:

Fl: The entry fields are converted into output fields. The data involved in each case also appear under the source and
destination identifiers.

F 7: HELP function (paging through the alternatives) in the first five fields. In addition, the names of all programs on the
user diskette can be reviewed in the “PROGRAM NAME” field.

F 8: Return to the CONFIGURATION form.

3-19
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.6 TRANSFER Form

On pressing F1: (TRANSFER) —

tode: Xxtxx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Xxxxxxx

TRANSFER

Transfer from XXXXXXXXXX TO XXXXXXXXXX

SYSID: Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

POLLING LIST: Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
INTERRUPT LIST: Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

ONLYWITH DISKETTE:
PROGRAM NAMES: Xxxxxxxx Xxxxxxxx

FI F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

“RANSFERI EXIT

Function keys:

Fl: Initiation oftransfer.

The messages ’’Actives”, n Ended’’ or ’’Error messages” appear in thedisplayline.

F8: Return toTRANSFERfrom.

Possible error messages:

Error Ol: “illegal input!”

Source and destination must be specified. The following possibilities are available:

Mode Source Destination

OFFLINE FD, EPROM, EEPROM FD, EPROM, EEPROM

ONLINE FD, CP530, EPROM, EEPROM FD, CP530, EPROM, EEPROM

3-20
 m

3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.6 TRANSFER Form

Error 21: Source = Destination?

In “Transfer” mode, source and destination must not be identical. If FLOPPY is specified, it is sufficient to distinguish
between the program names or drive designations. Possibilities:

ET=
33
CP530 (E) EPROM

I FLOPPY
I + + +
I CP530 I + — +
I (E) EPROM I + + —

+ permissible – illegal

Error 36: “No SYSID identifier! Nothing transferred. ”

This error message appears when FI is pressed, although there are no data available in the source

.
Error 54: Illegal EPROM submodule type

.-.

3-21
I
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.7 Test and Startup

3.7.1 TEST Form

.
(Refer also to instructions GWA 4N5EB 8110545-02 for the LI network, Section 3.3)

Node: Xxlxx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Xxxxxxx

TEST AND STARTUP

READ DISKETTE FOR FORMATS AND STORE DATA: #~

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
READ
FORMATS HELP EXIT

Note: The data diskette is required for storing or reading mailbox data (KH, KF etc)

Function keys:
After entering a drive which contains a diskette or a hard disk (possible with the F7 HELP key), the formats (KH, KC, ...) are stored,

F5: The following menu appears on the screen:

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
SiiT/ BUS CYCLE
FORCE BUSTEST TIME EXIT

Function keys: (Softkeys F 2 and F 3 appear if the CP 530 is Master!)

F 1: Selects display of contents of mailboxes (STAT/FORCE form)

F 2: Selects bus test. The bus is stopped and further processing can then take place step by step in accordance with the
polling list, (BUS TEST form)

F 3: Selects display of the bus cycle time.

(CYCLE TIME form)

F 8: Return to the CONFIGURATION form

Possible error messages:

Error 35: “illegal return message from CP!”
Error 36: “CP USARTerror!”
Error 37: “No message from CP!”
Error 38: “US ARTerror PG side!”
Error 39: “USARTerror PC side!”
Error 3A: “Interface not ready!”
Error3B: “Abort by CP!”

Note: In the following screen forms and their descriptions, the send and receive mailbox for a slave is always the same as
the send and receive mailbox for the master CPS.

3-22
 m
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.7 Test and Startup

3.7.2 STAT/FORCE Form

-.
Node: Xxlxx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ONLINE
Slave No.: ++ +*#+ Mailbox I Slave No. #+ ##++ Mailbox

TEST AND STA RTU P

Specify the number of the slaves you wish to monitor on the left and right
half of the screen.

-. FI F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

ACTIVATE HELP EXIT

Entry fields in the STAT/FORCE form:

SLAVE No. :

Specifies the numbers of the slaves to be tested

Range: 1...30

MAl LBOX:

Specifies which of the mailboxes (send or receive mailbox) is to be updated in the left or right half of the screen.
SEND can be specified for the send mailbox or REC for the receive mailbox of the slave.

. Default: SEND in both fields

Function keys:

F 1: The input data are transferred and the CP test function activated. The mailboxes specified are read
(selects STATUS form).

F 7: SEND or REC can be entered in entry fields 2 and 4.

F 8: Return to the TEST form.

3-23
I
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.7 Test and Startup

Possible error messages:

Error 01: “Illegal input” !

If a number outside the upper or lower limits is displayed in fields 1 and 3 or if there are blanks in these fields.
If something other than SEND, REC or blank appears in fields 2 and 4.

Error 37: “CP does not report!”

Error 38: “US ARTerror PG side!”

Error 39: “USARTerror PC side!”

Error 3A: “Interface not ready!”

Error3B: “Abort by CP!”

Error 58: “Slavexxfailed!”

Error 59: “Slavexx not on bus!”

In these last two error messages the number of the respective slaves is entered in the output fields.

If the CP 530 is configured as a slave, only its send and receive mailboxes can be monitored and the STAT/FORCE form appears as
follows:

Node: Xxlxx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ONLINE

Slave No.: xx xxxx Mailbox ! Slave No. xx xxxx Mailbox

TEST AND STARTUP

FI F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

ACTIVATE HELP EXIT

Output fields:

SLAVE No.:

The SINEC L1 mode number from the SYSID appears here.

Range: 1...30

Function keys:
Same assignment as for the master

Possible error messages:

as for the master

3-24
 m

3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.7 Test and Startup

3.7.3 STATUS Form

Node: Xxlxx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ONLINE

Slavexx xxxx Mailbox SB:xxxxxxxx!Slavexx xxxx Mailbox sBxxxxxxxx
Length: xx bytes Slave cycle: xxxms!Length: xx bytes Slave cycle: xxxms
Destination: xx !Destination: xx

* STATUS *

Consec. xxxx,xxxx,xxxx, ! Consec. xxxx,xxxx,

! Xxxx,xxxx,
N F !NF
Uo !U o
m r !mr
bm !b m
e a !e a
r t !r t
I
!
!
—
F1 F2 F3 F5 F6 F7 F8
FORCE FORCE FIXING ST[#US PRINT STORE
LEFT RIGHT ON BYTE MAILBOX FORMATS EXIT

The following possibilities are available for menu Iabelling:

I Modeleft I Moderight I Possiblesoftkeys I

SEND SEND F 1–F6, F8

SEND REC F 1, F3-F6, F8
— REC SEND F2– F6, F8
REC REC F3– F6, F8
—
I SEND orREC I SEND orREC
—
I F2-F6, F8
F2– F6, F8 I
If the CP 530 is configured as a slave, the “FORCE LEFT” and “FORCE RIGHT” functions cannot be implemented

3-25
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.7 Test and Startup

Output fields:
—
SLAVE: In the case of a receive mailbox, the number of the slave selected is entered. In the case of a send mailbox, 00 is
entered as identifier for the master.

MAl LBOX: The data selected are taken from the previous form.

SB: The status byte of the respective slave is displayed in binary code. It can be examined in more detail with function
key 4 (magnifier function).

LENGTH: The length of the mailbox in bytes.

SLAVE CYCLE: The response time of a slave until its mailbox is received (in milliseconds).

Destination: In the case of a receive mailbox, 00 is entered for the master in this field; in a send mailbox, this number is identi-
cal with that of the slave selected.

*: The appearance or disappearance of an asterisk in this field whenever a mailbox arrives indicates data traffic
between the PG 675 and the CP 530.
The blinking frequency of the asterisk thus permits a rough estimate of the bus cycle time.

The part of the form between header and menu shows the contents of the mailboxes in the usual S 5 form divided into left and right
mailboxes. The contents are constantly updated.

N. B.: When displaying a mailbox with a odd byte length, the irrelevant positions are omitted.
Example Mailbox with (byte) length of 9:
o: KH = AAAA
1: KF = +00255
2: KY = 010,011
3: KT = 100.3
4: KH = FF
With the KH, KY, KC and KM formats, the last 2, 3, 1 or 9 positions are omitted. With the other formats, the data
field is deleted.

Function keys F 1 to F 3 can be used to modify display formats or enter new contents in the send mailboxes.

Function keys:

Fl: Forcing the left mailbox. Both mailboxes are fixed, i. e. the display is frozen (not updated). The contents of the left
mailbox can be modified.
Selects the FORCE form.

F 2: Forcing the right mailbox. Both mailboxes are fixed, i. e. the display is frozen (not updated). The contents of the right
mailbox can be modified.
Selects the FORCE form.

F 3: Both mailboxes are fixed. The cursor is in the first format field of the left mailbox. Now the formats for the display can
be modified (for both mailboxes).
The menu Iabelling for F 3 is changed to “FIXING OFF”. In addition, softkey F 4 enables the cursor to be positioned
in the desired mailbox (see menu, next page).
Actuating F 3 once more causes a return to updating of the mailbox contents in the new formats. The form appears
as shown in the diagram above.

3-26
 -

3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.7 Test and Startup

F 4: This function enables the slave status byte, which appears as a binary pattern at the top right of each mailbox display,
to be more closely examined. However, the status byte cannot be modified.
Causes the STATUS BYTE form to appear. (Section 3.7.5).

F 5: Listing of the contents of both mailboxes on the printer connected to the programmer. The display is frozen during
printing.

F 6: The formats for the respective mailbox are stored in the user diskette. The display is frozen during the storage proce-
dure. For each slave only one list of formats can be stored for the send mailbox and for the receive mailbox.

F 8: Return to the STAT/FORCE form

Menu after actuation of the “FIXING ON” key:

FI F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
FORCE FORCE FIXING FORMAT PRINT STORE
LEFT RIGHT OFF RIGHT MAIL80X FORMATS EXIT
—
F 4 is Iabelled “right” or “left”, depending on whether the cursor is in the left or right mailbox.

Possible error messages:

Error 13: “Unknown data identifier!”

The formats can be modified in the mailboxes. This error occurs if formats other than KH, KF, KS, KT, KC, KM, KY or
KG are entered.

Error 16: “Data cannot be interpreted!”

Possible in conversion from all formats to the formats KT, KC, KS or KG.

Error 17: “Beginning – no further!”

If the mailbox is paged upwards but the first line has already been displayed.

Error 18: “End – no further!”

If the mailbox is paged downwards and the last line has already been displayed.

Error 2C: “Left mailbox empty!”

If the interface module brings a left mailbox with length zero, this message is displayed.

Error 2D: “Right mailbox empty!”

If the interface module brings a right mailbox with the length zero, this error message is displayed.

Message 01: “Active”

If the F 6 function key, the Enter key or the F 5 function key or hardcopy key are actuated, this message appears.

.—

3-27
I
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.7 Test and Startup

3.7.4 FORCE Form

Node: Xxlxx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ONLINE

Slavexx xxxx Mailbox SB:xxxxxxxx!Slavexx xxxx Mailbox SB : XXXXXXXX
Lenath: xx bvtes Slave CvcIe: xxxms!Length: xx bvtes Slave Cycle :xxxms
Des~ination:xx ‘ ID&inatiorl:xx
* FORCE *

Consec. xxxx,xxxx,xxxx, ! Consec. xxxx,xxxx,

!
N F !N F
Uo !U o
m r !m r
b m !b m
e a !e a
r t !r t
1

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
EXECUTE
FORCING
ABORT
FORCING
CHANGE
DESTINAT.
STATUS
BYTE
PRINT
MAlLBOX
STORE
FORMATS I EXIT

Output fields:
See STATUS form, Section 3.7.3

Function keys:

F 1: Forcing is executed, i. e. the modified send mailbox is sent to the destination node and the bus cycle continues. A
return is made to the STATUS form and any newly entered formats taken over.

F 2: Forcing is not executed. The bus cycle continues.

Return to the STATUS form. New formats are not taken over.

F 3: The cursor jumps to the “Destination: xx” field which now becomes an entry field and permits a new destination slave
to be entered.
Range: 1...30

F 4: This function permits the status byte of the slave which appears as a binary pattern at the top right of each mailbox
display and can be more closely examined and modified.
Causes the STATUS BYTE form to appear.

F 5: Printout of the contents of both mailboxes on the printer connected to the programmer.

F 6: The formats for the respective mailbox are stored on the user diskette.

F 8: Return to the STAT/FORCE form without forcing being executed.

3-28
 m
3. Operator Input and Operation Bof the COM 530

3.7 Test and Sartup

Possible error messages:

Error 08: “Inhibited key!”

Error 12: “INSERT/ERASE” not possible here!”

The cursor is in the last line and an attempt has been made to erase or insert in the mailbox.

Error 13: “Unknown data identifier!”

The formats can be changed in the mailboxes. This error occurs if formats other than KH, KF, KS, KT, KC, KM, KY or
KG are entered.

Error 16: “Data cannot be interpreted!”

Possible on conversion from all formats to the KT, KC, KS or KG formats.

Error 17: “Beginning – No further!”

If the first line in the mailbox is displayed and an attempt is made to scroll upwards.

Error 18: “End – No further!”

If the last line in the mailbox is displayed and an attempt is made to scroll downwards.

Error 19: “Do not press function key!”

If the cursor is in the first field, i. e. where the editor is expecting an initial word address, it is not permitted to actuate
a function key.

Error 1A: “Repetition factor to high!”

A repetition factor can be specified when editing a mailbox. If the total length of the mailbox, taking the repetition
factors into consideration, is more than 32 words, the editor outputs this error message.

Error 2C: “Left mailbox empty!”

If the CP 530 supplies a left mailbox with the length zero, this message is displayed.

Error 2D: “Right mailbox empty!”

. If the CP 530 supplies a right mailbox with the length zero, this error message is displayed.

Error 35: “illegal return message from PC!”

Error 36: “PC – USART error!”

Error 37: “CP does not report!”

Error 38: “US ART error, PG side!”

Error 39: “US ART error, PC side!”

Error 3A: “Interface not ready!”

Error 3B: “Abort by CP!”

Error 4A: “Slave already receiving data!”

Error 57: “Error in slave cycle”

Slave 1) gives negative acknowledgement
2) supplies wrong data
3) has frame errors

Error 58: “Slave xx failed!”

Slave is in polling list on the bus, but does not reply to the master call.

Error 59: “Slave xx not on bus!”

In these last two error messages the number of the respective slave is entered in the output fields.

Message 01: “Active!”

If the F 6 function key, the transmit key or the F 5 function key or hardcopy key are actuated, this message appears.
—

3-29
I
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.7 Test and Startup

3.7.5 STATUS BYTE Form

—

Node: Xxlxx CP530 Xxxxxxxxlxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ONLINE

Slavexx xxxx Mailbox S6 :xxxxxxxx!Slavexx xxxx Mailbox S6 :XXXXXXXX
Length: xx bytesSIaveCycle : xxxms!Length: xx bytesSlaveCycle : x x x m s

I PCinSTOPstatus: +
STATUS BYTE

! PCinSTOPstatus +
PCinRUNstatus : + ! PCinRUNstatus #
Destination slave: # ! Destination slave +
Interrupt # I Interrupt #
Programmerbit : + ! Programmer bit +
Busin RUNstatus: + ! Bus in RUN status #
Slave failed : + ! Slave failed #

I
FI F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
TRANSFER
STAT.BYTE EXIT

Output fields:

See STATUS form, Section 3.7.3

Entry fields:

The status byte is displayed for both slaves. By changing the bit statuses (in the entry fields), the status bytes are transmitted to the
slaves. This, however, is only possible when changing from the FORCE form and actuating the F 6 key.

Function keys:

F6: Transmitting the status bytes as displayed on the form to the slaves.
Return to the FORCE form.

F8: Return to the FORCE form without changing the status bytes.

Possible error messages:

Error 01: “illegal input!”

If a digit other than O or 1 or a blank appears in the entry fields.
If the first two bits have the same status, i. e. if both are set or reset, this message also appears.

3-30
 m

3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.7 Test and Startup

Example of STATUS FORCING:

—
I
Node: 23/00 CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ONLINE
Slave No. 5 REC Mailbox ! Slave No, 16 SEND Mailbox

I TEST AND STARTUP

Specify the number of the slaves you wish to observe on the left and right
halves of the screen,

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

ACTIVATE HELP EXIT

Actuating F 1 causes the STATUS form to appear.

The CP 530 then supplies, for example, the right mailbox first, displays it on the screen and then displays the left mailbox.
Function key 3 is pressed while the CP 530 accesses the data of the slave.

The following display appears on the screen:

Node: 23/00 CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ONLINE

Slave5 REC M a i l b o x SB:O1OOIIOO ISlavel)(l SEND MailboxSB : 10001110
Length: 48 bytes Slave Cycle : 159ms !Length: 10 bytes Slave Cycle : 234ms
Destination: 00 !Destination: 16

STATUS
o: KH = ABCD O: KT= 735.2
1: KM= 0100110001110000 ! 1: KY= 234,189
2: KH = 12CF ! 2: KS= “;
3: 5 KH = 3E6A ! 3: KM= 1011100010101001
8: KG= +1423148-05 ! 3: KF= -21555
9:11 KS= ~Q \ 5:
20: KM= 1110000111010110 f
21: KC= 391 !
22: KM= 0101101001011010 !
23: KY= 24, 1 !
24: !

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
FORCE FIXING FORMAT PRINT STORE
RIGHT OFF LEFT MAILBOX FORMATS EXIT

3-31
I
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.7 Test and Startup

,-
The cursor is ~ositioned in the left mailbox. The formats can now be chanaed in the mailboxes. The followina formats are Per-
missible: KH, KF, KS, KM, KT, KC, KG and KY. —
A “?” appears for characters which cannot be converted to the format specified.

The next function selected is “FORCE RIGHT”.

The following appears on the screen:

I Node: 23/00 CP530 Xxxxxxxdxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ONLINE

S l a v e 5 R E C M a i l b o x SB:OIOOIIOO !Slaveoo SEND MailboxSB 10001110
Length: 24 bytes Slave Cycle : 159ms !Length: 10 bytes Slave Cycle: 234ms
Destination: 00 !Destination: 16

FORCING
O: KH = ABCD ! O : KT= 7:5,2
1: KM = 0100110001110000 ! 1: KY= 234,189
2: KH = 12CF ! 2: KS= “;
3: KH = 3E6A ! 3: KM= 1011100010101001
4: KH = 3E6A ! 4: KF= -21555
5: KH = 3E6A ! 5:
6: KH = 3E6A
7: KH = 3E6A
8: KG = +1423148-05
9: KS = $Q
10: KS = ‘$C1
11: KS = $Q I

F1 F2 F5 F7 F8
EXECUTE ABORT CH[:GE ST;;US PRINT S;~RE
FORCING FORCING DESTINAT. BYTE MAILBOX FORMATS EXIT

The contents of the right mailbox can now be edited. Using the F 4 key, the status byte can be examined more closely and edited.
Each bit has a certain function and can be set or reset.

For a description of the function keys, see Section 3.7.4.

3-32
 3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.7 Test and Startup

3.7.6 BUS TEST Function

The BUS TEST function of the COM 530 enables bus traffic to be executed step by step, whereby the data exchanged between
CP 530 and the nodes can be observed in the form of mailboxes and, in certain cases, modified. When the bus test is called, the
SINEC LI cycle is stopped at the end of the polling list.

Note: This function is only possible if the CP is configured as master

Operator procedure depends on whether or not interrupts triggered by slaves occur during bus processing.

1. Procedure without interrupts (master-slave traffic)

Each step in the bus test consists of two parts:

A) In the first part, the operator can examine and also modify the send mailbox of the CP 530 to the current slave (the slave cur-
rently being processed). This first part is completed by actuating the F 1 “SEND MAl LBOX” softkey.

The following reaction is displayed on the programmer screen:

— Acknowledgement by the slave of the send mailbox of the CP 530
— The receive mailbox received by the slave and its acknowledgement.
– The cycle time for the entire traffic:
Send-receive in master-slave traffic
Send-receive-send . in slave-slave traffic
– Softkey F 1 now has the inscription “NEXT STEP”, enabling the second part.

B) The second part, which is also initiated by softkey F 1 (now “NEXT STEP”), enables the minibus to poll the next slave in the pol-
ling list.

The following reaction is displayed on the screen of the programmer:

— The send mailbox of the CP 530 to the next slave in the polling list.
— Softkey F 1 has the label “SEND MAl LBOX” once more, i.e. the first part is active again (see I.A.).

2. If an interrupt occurs

In this case, after the first part has been executed, an operator input must now be made:

A) The following reactions appear on the screen:

- The slave causing the interrupt is acknowledged:
– The send mailbox of the CP 530 to the interrupting slave appears.
— The send mailbox from the interrupting slave to another node appears.
– The “INTERRUPT CYCLE” message appears.
..— – Softkey F 1 (“NEXT STEP”) permits the execution of the next step.

B) After this intermediate step, the previous procedure is followed as under I.B. as long as no further interrupt occurs.
If a further interrupt occurs, the screen reaction is as in 2.A.

In the BUS TEST forms, send mailboxes of the CP 530 appear on the left half of the screen. Only these mailboxes can be modified.
On the right half of the screen, the mailbox which is sent back to the CP 530 by the respective slave (direct traffic) appears
or
the mailbox which is sent from the current slave to another node (cross traffic) appears.

As the SINEC-LI traffic is executed step by step in the BUS TEST, the occurence of frequent interrupts could prevent normal pro-
cessing of the polling list. For this reason, a softkey function permits interrupts to be enabled or disabled.

3-33
I
3. Operator Input and Operation of theCOM 530

3.7 Test and Startup

The forms for the two parts of the operation for master-slave and slave-slave traffic follow:
—

BUS TEST forms 1-3

This form appears in the first step:

Node: Xxlxx CP530 Xxxxxxxtixxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ONLINE

SEND CP530tosIavexx SB: XXXXXXXX !
Destination: xx Length: xx!

BUS TEST
Consec. xxxx,xxxx,xxxx, !
N F I
U o !
m r f
b m f
e a f
rt !
!
I
!
!

FI F2 F3 F4 F5
SEND DISABLE STATUS PRINT
MAlLBOX INTERRUPT BYTE MAlLBOX

The left half of the screen shows the send mailbox of the CP 530 which is to be sent to the current slave.
Modifications can be made with the usual S5 operator input procedures.

Assignments of the function keys:

Fl: Sending the send mailbox to the current slave. Causes the BUS TEST 2 form to appear for the second step.

F 3: The inscription of the key is alternately “DISABLE INTERRUPT” or “ENABLE INTERRUPT”. This key makes it possible
to service the slaves in accordance with the polling list even if an interrupt occurs.

F 4: Function as in FORCING (Section 3.7.4)

F 5: Function as in FORCING (Section 3.7.4)

F 6: Function as in FORCING (Section 3.7.4)

F 8: Exit BUS TEST function.

The bus remains in the STOP mode, and must be set again to the RUN mode with the MODES function.

3-34
 3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.7 Test and Startup

BUS TEST 2 Form

—
This form is displayed in the second step:

dode: Xxlxx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ONLINE

;END CP 530to slave xx SB:XXXXXXXX !REC from slavexx
.ength: xx bytes Slave Cycle : xxxms !Length: xx bytes

B U ST E S T

Consec. xxxx,xxxx,xxxx, !Consec. xxxx,xxxx,xxxx

N F !N F
Uo !U o
m r !M r
bm ~ !b m
e a !e a
r t ! r t
!
!
\

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
NEXT DISABLE STATUS PRINT STORE
STEP INTERRUPT BYTE MAlLBOX FORMATS EXIT

The send mailbox from the previous form remains displayed. It can no longer be edited, however. The receive mailbox for the current
slave appears on the right of the screen. The formats can be modified here.

Assignment of the function keys:

Fl: Polling the next slave. Return to the BUS TEST 1 form.

For all other function key assignments, see BUS TEST 1 form.

On the right of the screen, the mailbox from the slave to the master appears or the mailbox of the slave to another slave appears
(slave-slave traffic).

In the case of cross traffic, the following form header appears:

.— Node: xx/xx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ONLINE

SEND CP530to Slave xxSB: XXXXXXXX!CROSS TRAFFIC Slavexx to Slavexx
Length: xx bytes Slave Cycle: xxxms!Length: xx bytes

3-35
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.7 Test and Startup

BUS TEST3 Form

This form appears (in the second step) if an interrupt occurs:

1
Node: Xxlxx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ONLINE
SEND CP530to Slavexx SB: XXXXXXXX !REC from slavexx
Length: xx bytes Slave Cycle : xxxms !Length: xx bytes

BUS TEST
INTERRUPT CYCLE

Consec. xxxx,xxxx,xxxx, !Consec. xxxx,xxxx,xxxx

N F !N F
U o !U o
m r !m r
b m !b m
e a !e a
r t !r t

FI F2 F8
NEXT FORMATS
STEP RIGHT EXIT

The left half of the screen displays the send mailbox from the CP 530 to the slave sending the interrupt. On the right, the send
mailbox from the current slave to the master or another slave appears.
Editing is not possible in either mailbox, but the formats can be changed.
Whether or not slave-slave traffic is taking place is indicated in the header.

Function keys:

Fl: Bus traffic continues. If no further interrupt occurs, the BUS TEST 2 form appears once more. The original send mail-
box for the slave whose turn it should have been is displayed on the left and on the right the respective receive mail-
box appears.
If a further interrupt occurs, however, the BUS TEST 3 form reappears with the mailboxes to and/or from the slave
sending the interrupt.

F 2: This key must be actuated to position the cursor for changing the formats in the required mailbox. The inscription is ..
alternately “FORMATS RIGHT” and “FORMATS LEFT”.

For further function keys, see the BUS TEST 1 form.

3-36
 m
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.7 Test and Startup

Possible error messages:

Error OB: “Inhibited key!”

Error 12: “lNSERT/ERASE not possible here!”

The cursor is in the last line and an attempt has been made to insert or erase in the mailbox.

Error 13: ,,’’Unknown data identifier!”

The formats can be changed in the mailboxes. This error occurs if formats other than KH, KF, KS, KT, KC, KM, KY or
KG are entered.

Error 16: “Data cannot be interpreted”

In connection with conversion from all formats to the formats KT, KC, KS or KG.

Error 17: “Beginning – no further!”

If the mailbox is paged upwards but the first line is already displayed.

Error 18: “End – no further!”

If the mailbox is paged downwards and the last line is already displayed.

— Error 19: “Do not press function key!”

If the cursor is in the first field, i. e. where the editor is expecting an initial word address, it is not permitted to press a
function key.

Error 1A: “Repetition factor too high!”

A repetition factor can be specified when editing a mailbox. If the total length of the mailbox, taking the repetition
factor into account, is greater than 32 words, the editor outputs this error message.

Example of BUS TEST:

The bus test function has been selected. The mailbox of the master to the slave, e. g. slave 5, is displayed.

Node: 8/00 CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ONLINE

SEND CP530toslave5 S8:OIOOI1OO !
Destination: 5 Length: 21 bytes !

BU ST EST

o: KH = ABCD !
1: KM = 1011001110001111 !
2: KH = 2345 !
3: KH = 2345 I
4: KH = 2345 !
5: KH = 2345 !
6: KH = 2345 !
7: KH = 9876 !
8: KG = +1423148-05 ;
9: KF = +32767 !
10: KY = 17,30 !
11: KC = 789 I

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
SEND DISABLE STATUS PRINT STORE
MAILBOX INTERRUPT BYTE MAILBOX FORMATS EXIT

3-37
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.7 Test and Startup

The mailbox can be edited. If function kev F 1 is actuated, the mailbox is sent to the slave and the receive mailbox is read.
Three different cases can now occur:

a) Slave sends mailbox to master

b) Slave sends to another slave

c) Interrupt

If case a) occurs, the form has the following appearance:

Node: 8/00 CP530 Xxxxxxxxkxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ONLINE

SEND CP530toslave5 SB:1OI1II1O !RECfrom slave5
Length: 21 bytes Slave Cycle : 320ms !Length: 6 bytes

BUS TEST
O: KH= ABCD ! 0: KT= 735.2
1: KM= 1011001110001111 ! 1: KY= 234,189
2: KH= 2345 ! 2: KS= “;
3: KH= 2345 ! 3:
4: KH = 2345 !
5: KH= 2345 !
6: KH= 2345 [
7: KH= 9876 I
8: KG= +1423148-05
9: KF = +32767
10: KY= 17,30
11: KC= 789

FI F2 F3 F4 F5 F7 F8
NEXT DISABLE STATUS PRINT S;;RE
STEP INTERRUPT BYTE MAlLBOX FORMATS EXIT

3-38
 m
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.7 Test and Startup

If case b) occurs, the form appears as follows:

1Node: 8/00 CP530 Xxxxxxxdxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ONLINE

SEND CP530toslave5 SB:10111IIO !CROSSTRAFFIC Slave 5to slave 9
Length: 21 bytes Slave Cycle : 320ms !Length: 2 bytes

BUS TEST
O: KH= ABCD I O: KT= 735.2
1: KM= 1011001110001111 ! 1:
2: KH= 2345 !
3: KH= 2345 !
4: KH= 2345 !
5: KH= 2345 I
6: KH = 2345
7: KH= 9 8 7 6
8: KG= +1423148-05
9: KF = +32767 I
10: KY= 17,30
11: KC= 789
. FI F2 F3 F5 F7 F8
NEXT DISABLE STi%S PRINT S;~RE
STEP INTERRUPT BYTE MAILBOX FORMATS EXIT

In both cases, function key F 1 “NEXT STEP” can be used to display the send mailbox of the master to the next slave in the polling
list. However, only the formats can be changed here.

3-39
I
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.7 Test and Startup

Case c) Interrupt

—
An interrupt has occurred, i. e. the send mailbox of the masterto the slave sending the interrupt and the mailbox of theslavesending
the interrupt to the master or to another slave (slave-slave traffic) are displayed.

Node: 8/00 CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ONLINE

SEND GP530toslave7 SB:OIOOOOOO !REC from slave 7
Length: 10 bytes Slave Cycle : 20ms !Length: 4 bytes

BU ST EST
* I NTERU P T C Y C L E *

O: KH= ABCD ! O: XT= 735.2

1: KM= 1011001110001111 [ 1: KG= 1208537+14
2: KH= 2345 !
3: KH= 2345 !
4: KH= 2345 !
5: !

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
NEXT DISABLE STATUS PRINT STORE
STEP INTERRUPT BYTE MAILBOX FORMATS EXIT

Now the left or right formats can be changed.

Actuation of the F 1 key causes a return to case a) orb) if no further interrupt occurs.

3-40
 m
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.7 Test and Startup

3.7.7 CYCLE TIME Form

—
Node: Xxlxx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ONLINE

BUS CYCLE TIM E

Bus cycle time for all slaves in the polling list:

Actual : xxxx ms
Minimum : xxxx ms
Maximum : xxxx ms

-. FI F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

DELETE EXIT

Output fields:

ACTUAL: In this field the current bus cycle time is displayed. It is updated approximately every half second.

MINIMUM: A non-return pointer shows the lowest value.

MAXIMUM: A non-return pointer shows the highest value.

Function keys:

F2: The interface module receives the command to delete the bus cycle times.

F8: Return to the TEST form.

Note: This function is only possible if the CP is configured as master

3-41
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.8 INFO Form

~ode: Xxlxx CP530 Xxxxxxxdxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Xxxxxxxx

INFO

SOURCE : +##x##+#

Program name:#4Hl##### (only if source= drive)

FI F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
INDIV. ALL
‘ROGRAM PROGRAMS HELP EXIT

Entry fields in the INFO form:

SOURCE:

Here it is possible to specify the source without changing the mode. An EPROM can also be given as source!

Possibilities:
I Mode I Source I
I OFFLINE
ONLINE I FD*, EPROM, EEPROM
FD*, CP530, EPROM, EEPROM I * Depending on drives defined,
e. g. A, B, C,

These alternatives can be entered using the HELP function.

Default: ONLINE mode . CP 530

OFFLINE mode FD

PROGRAM NAME:

If a drive (FD) is specified as source, the program name under which the user data are stored on the minidiskette or hard disk must
be entered here. All program names on the disketteldisk can be entered with the aid of the HELP function.

3-42
 3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.8 INFO Form

Function keys:

Fl: Information is given on whether a SYSID identifier and/or polling list and/or interrupt list is available either in the
memory submodule of the CP 530 or in the memory submodule of the CPU or whether these have been stored on
the user diskette under the program name specified. Selects the INFO 1 form.

F 2: All program names on the user diskette are listed. Selects the INFO 2 form to appear.
(Only possible for “FD” source!)

F 7: HELP function for entering the source and available program names.

F 8: Return to the CONFIGURATION form.

Possible error messages:

Error Ol: “illegal input!”

Source must be specified. The following are possible:

Mode Source

OFFLINE FD*, EPROM, EEPROM * Depending on the drives defined,

ONLINE FD*, CP530, EPROM, EEPROM e. g. A, B, C, . . .

Error 29: “No program name for EPROM and EEPROM!”

If the EPROM and CP 530 is designated as source, no information can be received on “all programs” (i.e. all program
names on the user diskette) as only~ user program can be stored in the EpROM or Cp 530.

Error 46: “Incomplete input”

If a diskette (FD) is given as source, a program name must be specified.

— INFO 1 Form

Node: Xxlxx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Xxxxxxx

)rive:x Program name: Xxxxxxxx

INFO

SYSID: Xxxxxxxxxxxxxx
POLLING LIST: XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
INTERRUPT LIST: XXXXXXXXXXXXXX

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

“AVAILABLE” or” NOT AVAILABLE” appear in the output fields.

F8: Return to the CONFIGURATION form.

3-43
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.8 INFO Form

INFO 2 Form
—

Jode: Xxlxx CP530 Xxxxxxxdxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx OFFLINE

INFO

Available programs:

Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx

Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx
Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx
Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx
Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx
Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx
Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx
Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx Xxxxxx

r F3 F4 F5

All available CP 530 programs on the selected disk/diskette are listed.

F6 F7 F8

EXIT

Function keys:

FI : Listing on the printer and return to the INFO form

F8: Return to the INFO form -.

3-44
 m
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.9 DELETE Form

In “Delete” mode, user data stored in the CP 530 or on diskette, hard disk or EEPROM under a certain program name can be dele-
ted.

The following possibilities are available:

. Individual deletion (i. e.: Deletion of SYSID, polling or interrupt lists)

– Total deletion (i. e.: Deletion of SYSID, polling and interrupt lists)

Node: Xxlxx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Xxxxxxx

DELETE

SOURCE ++#4F$#4!+k

Program name : ++##+IF=ll# (only if source= drive)

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
POLLING INTERRUPT TOTAL
SYSID LIST LIST DELETION HELP EXIT

—- Entry fields in the DELETE form:

SOURCE:

It is possilbe to specify the source here without changing the mode.

Possibilities:
Mode Source

OFFLINE FD
ONLINE FD, CP530

The alternatives can be entered using the HELP function.

Default: ONLINE mode . . . . . CP 530

OFFLINE mode FD

PROGRAM NAME:

If diskette (FD) is specified as source, a program name under which the bus parameters are stored on the minidiskette or hard disk
must be entered here.

All program names on the user diskette can be entered with the aid of the HELP function.

3-45
I
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.9 DELETE Form

Function keys:

Fl: Deletion of the SYSID identifier in the source specified:

Deletion is indicated with the “Active!” and “SYSID deleted!” displays.

F 2: Deletion of the polling list in the source specified:

Deletion is indicated by the “Active!” and “Polling list deleted!” messages.

F 3: Deletion of the interrupt list in the source specified:

Deletion is indicated by the “Active!” and “Interrupt list deleted!” messages.

F 4: Delete all user data:

The SYSID, polling list and interrupt list in the source specified (i. e. in the CP 530 or on diskette under the name sta-
ted) are deleted.
In the error message line the message “Delete all?” appears. The user is prompted to acknowledge.

Menu for acknowledgement:

FI F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

YES NO EXIT

The deletion is indicated by the “Active!” and “SYSIS deleted!” or “Polling list deleted!” or “Interrupt list deleted!”
messages.

F 7: HELP function for entering the source and the program names on the floppy diskette

F 8: Return to the CONFIGURATION form.

Possible error messages:

Error 01: “Illegal input!”

w
Source must be specified. The following are possible:

Error 31: “Polling list does not exist!”

Error 32: “Interrupt list does not exist!”

Error 33: “SYSID identifier does not exist!”

One of these three error messages appears if the respective data type is not available on the CP 530 or on the user
diskette under the program name specified.

Error 46: “Incomplete input”

If minidiskette or hard disk (FD) is given as source, a program name must be specified.

3-46
 m

3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.10 Setting the Operating Mode (MODES Form)

3.10.1 Operating Modes

The following operating modes can be set:

- Starting the CP 530 (CP RUN),

- Stopping the CP 530 (CP-STOP),
- PG priority (ON and OFF),

PG priority ON means that the programmer connected directly or indirectly to the PG (programmer) interface has absolute priority.

After selecting the form, the status information is constantly requested by the CP in the “Status” function and updated in the dis-

Node: Xxlxx CP530 xxxxxxxx/xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ONLINE

MODES
.— CPmode: Xxxx
PGpriority: Xxxx

Errors: 1 Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
2 Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
3 Xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
CP PGPRIOR- PGPRIOR- ERROR
S%P RUN ITYYES ITYNO ACK HELP EXIT

Output fields in the MODES form:

CP MODE:

Here the current mode of the CP 530 is displayed: The possibilities are “STOP” or “RUN”. The “STOP” or “RUN” modes can be
forced with function keys F 1 or F 2.

PG PRIORITY:

The “PG PRIORITY” field also shows the current CP mode (possibilities: YES and NO).
These settings can be changed with the F 3 and F 5 function keys.

ERRORS:

The error messages collected in the CP 530 are displayed in the “ERROR” fields and updated approximately every half second.

After function key F 1 to F 4 have been actuated, the “CAUTION: DANGEROUS STATE – Operate keys again” message is output
and only the relevant function keys appear in the menu.

3-47
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.10 Setting the Operating Mode (MODE Form)

Function keys:

Fl: The CP 530 is brought to the STOP mode at the end of the current cycle through the polling list.
As a dangerous system status can occur, the user is prompted to acknowledge with the following menu:

FI F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
CP CP
STOP RUN EXIT

Fl: After positive acknowledgement, the CP 530 is brought to STOP:

This is indicated as follows:
- The “Executed!” message is output and
— in the “ CP MODE” field the word “STOP” appears.

F 2: The operating mode is not changed as the CP 530 is already in the RUN mode. The “CP IN RUN MODE” mes-
sage appears.
Only
a) Positive acknowledgement with F 1 or
b) Negative acknowledgement with F 8 are meaningful.

F 8: Negative acknowledgement means that the operating mode is not changed. Return to main menu. —

F2: The CP 530 is brought to the RUN mode. As a dangerous system status can occur, the operator is promted to ack-
nowledge with the following menu:

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
CP CP
STOP RUN EXIT

Fl: The operating mode is not changed as the CP 530 is already in the STOP mode. The “CP IN STOP MODE”
message appears.
Only
a) positive acknowledgement with F 2 or
b) negative acknowledgement with F 8 are meaningful.

F2: After this positive acknowledgement, the CP 530 is set to RUN.

This is indicated as follows:
— The “Executed!” message is displayed and
— in the CP mode field the word RUN appears.

F 8: A negative acknowledgement means that the operating mode is not executed. Return to main menu.

3-48
 m
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.10 Setting the Operating Mode (MODES Form)

F3: The CP 530 is brought to the “PG check YES” mode.

As a dangerous system status can occur, the operator is prompted to acknowledge with the following menu:

FI F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
PGPRIORITY PGPRIORITY
YES NO EXIT

F 3: After this positive acknowledgement the CP 530 is brought to the “PG check YES” mode.
This is indicated as follows:
— The “Executed!” message is displayed
— “YES” appears in the “PG PRIORITY” field

F4: The mode is not changed as the CP 530 is already in the “PG check NO” mode. The “PG PRIORITY OFF” mes-
sage appears.
Only
a) Positive acknowledgement with F 3 or
b) Negative acknowledgement with F 8 are meaningful.

F8: Negative acknowledgement means that the operating mode is not changed. Return to main menu.

— F4: The CP 530 is brought to the “PG check NO” mode. As a dangerous system status can occur, the operator is promp-
ted to acknowledge with the following menu:

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
PGPRIORIN PGPRIORITY
YES NO EXIT

F 3: The operating mode is not changed as the CP 530 is already in the “PG check YES” mode. The “ PG PRIORITY
ON” message appears.
Only
a) Positive acknowledgement with F 4
—. b) Negative acknowledgement with F 8 are meaningful.

F4: After this positive acknowledgement, the CP 530 is brought to the “PG check NO” mode.
This is indicated as follwos:
— The “Executed!” message is displayed
— “NO” appears in the “PG PRIORITY” field.

F8: Negative acknowledgement means that the operating mode is not changed. Return to main menu.

F 7: The HELP function causes a description of the operating modes which can be set with F 1 to F 4 to be displayed on
the screen. This description can be exited with function key F 8 (EXIT).

F8: Return to the CONFIGURATION form

3-49
I
3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.10 Setting the Operating Mode (MODES Form)

3.10.2 Error Messages

—
Errors occurring in data traffic on the SINEC LI LAN and bet- r E .Tpu– 7
ween the CP and the programmable controller are entered in
I
the “Error” field and displayed in the “MODES” form.
I
I
I
CP 530
I
I
— -1
SYSTAT
.
.
FNo.: r)n
FNo.: nn

‘No” nn

The error number permits a breakdown of the errors into clas- Error Classes:
ses; the appended text provides more detailed information on
Advantages of error classes
the particular error or fault (see table of Error Classes). — more efficient error messaaes
— the user can define a gene~al reaction to a failure class.
a) Description of a group error number in more detail, e. g.
the result of the self text produces class 1 errors and these There are also other errors but these are not shown in this way
can only be reported to the works if the module is replaced since the failure relates to those parts of the system neces-
or repaired. Example: Error 7: “Hardware error 7“. sary to transmit the error number.

b) Description relating to number of job containing error,

e. g. Error 54: “lob 177 not defined”.

F
I General

T
c) Description of a slave in connection with which the error
Class Error Operator Level of
occurred, No. Description reaction service
e. g. Error 60: “Slave 3 not in polling list”.
1 10–29 Possible hardware Check/replace/ 1. Operator
fault repair: Hardware 2. Service

E
2 30–49 Operational Check/replace Operator
errors Switches
Submodule

3 50–69 Parameter assign- Diagnostics Programmer,

ment byPG Configuring
programming error necessary Engineer
S5-SWchanges

4 Record Operator

3-50
 9

3. Operator Input and Operation of the COM 530

3.10 Setting the Operating Mode (MODES Form)

Error List SYSTAT

Class Error I
No. Ext.

decimal representation

I 10 xx ERROR 10: HARDWARE ERROR NO. XX

11 xx ERROR 11: INTERNAL ERROR MESSAGE NO. XX

II 30 0 ERROR 30: WAITING FOR SYNCHRC)N

31 0 ERROR31 : WRONG CP MODULE
32 0 ERROR 32: PG FUNCTION OPERATIVE
33 0 ERROR 33: CP IS IN STOP: NO SLAVE SEND IS POSSIBLE
34 0 ERROR 34: CP IS NOT IN THE STOP MODE
35 0 ERROR 35: THE CP MAY NOT RUN: SWITCH IS SET TO STOP

Ill 50 0 ERROR 50: SYSID ERROR

51 0 ERROR51 : POLLING LIST ERROR
52 0 ERROR 52: INTERRUPT LIST ERROR
— 53 xxx ERROR 53: JOB XXX NOT DEFINED
54 xxx ERROR 54: JOB DESCRIPTION XXX NOT RECOGNIZED
55 xxx ERROR 55: JOB NO, XXX ONLY FOR RECEIVE
56 xxx ERROR 56: JOB NO. XXX ONLY FOR SEND
57 xxx ERROR 57: JOB NO. XXX ONLY COMPATIBLE WITH THE MASTER
58 xxx ERROR 58: JOB NO. XXX ONLY COMPATIBLE WITH THE SLAVE
59 xxx ERROR 59: JOB TOO LONG
60 xxx ERROR 60: SLAVE XXX NOT IN POLLING LIST
61 xxx ERROR61 :THE JOB NUMBER XXX USES AN UNDEFINED LIST
62 xxx ERROR 62: JOB NUMBER XXX SBR NOT ALLOWED

Iv 70 0 ERROR 70: BUS ERROR

— 71 xxx ERROR71 : CONNECTION TO SLAVE HAS AN INTERFERENCE
72 xxx ERROR 72: THE WRONG SLAVE (NO. XXX) HAS REPLIED
73 xxx ERROR 73: SLAVE NO. XXX HAS FAl LED

3-51
I
4. Appendix

4.1 COM 530 Error List

The following message texts appear in the message line; the numbers are internal references only and should not appear.

Error Ol: Illegal input

The COM 530 executes validity checks for the data entered: The cursor blinks in the field in which an illegal entry has
been made.
- In the field only certain Iimitvalues are permissible
— In the field only certain alternatives are permissible
— For further details, see Operating Manual.

Error 02: Illegal key!

The key which has just been actuated is illegal in the field in which the cursor is blinking. The following are possible:
– Only digits and letters
– Only letters
– Only digits
– Only special characters
— Only digits and “+” and “-”
— Only digits and “+” and “-” and “.”
— Only hexadecimal characters
— Only digits between O and 3
– Only digits O and 1
are permissible.

Error OB: Inhibited key!

Error OD: Programmer memory overflow!

Action: The programmer must be switched off with the power switch and switched on again and the COM 530 must
be reloaded. If this error occurs frequently, the manufacturer must be contacted.

Error OE: System file not in drive O!

A system file required for correct execution of COM 530 is not in drive O. Action: Insert system diskette in drive O.

Error OF: Program load error!

A system file required for correct execution of COM 530 cannot be loaded. Action: Use original system diskette.

Error 10: Starting address Length of mailbox!

Error 11: Mailbox empty!

Error 12: INSERT/ERASE not possible here!

The cursor is in the last line and an attempt has been made to erase or insert data in the mailbox.

Error 13: Unknown data identifier!

–
The formats can be changed in the mailboxes. This error occurs if formats other than KH, KF, KS, KT, KC, KM, KY or
KG are entered.

Error 15: Input missing!

Error 16: Data cannot be interpreted!

Possible in conversions from all formats to formats KT, KC, KS or KG.

Error 17: Beginning – No further!

If the mailbox is paged upwards and the first line is already displayed.

Error 18: End – No further

If the mailbox is paged downwards and the last line is already displayed.

Error 19: Do not press function key!

If the cursor is in the first field, i. e. where the editor is expecting an initial word address, no function key maybe pres-
sed.

4-1
 m
4. A p p e n d i x

4.1 COM 530 Error List

Error 1A: Repetition factor too high!

When a mailbox is edited, a repetition factor can be specified. If the entire length of the mailbox taking the repetition
factor into account, is greater than 32 words, the editor outputs this error message.

Error 21: Source = Destination?

In “Transfer” mode, source and destination devices must not be identical. Under FLOPPY it is sufficient to distinguish
by specifying the program name or drive labels.
Possibilities:

Destination DISKETTE CP530 EPROM

Source

DISKETTE + + +
CP530 + - +
EPROM + + —

— + permissible
– iillegal
DISKETTE User diskette or hard disk
CP530 SINEC L1 communications processor
EPROM Plug-in EPROM-/EEPROM submodule

Error 23: Transmission error

This error message indicates an error in all transmission types:
TRANSMIT PG ==> CP 530
– No transmission cable plugged in
– Transmission cable incorrectly plugged in
– Wrong transmission cable
– An EPROM submodule is inserted in the CP530, all accesses forwriting ordeletion are not possible
– CP 530 not in operation
– Transmission time exceeded
PG ==> FD
Please contact manufacturer
– Hardware fault
– COM 530 system error

Error 24: Read SYSID identifier!

Error 25: SYSID, polling and interrupt lists non-existent!

In “Print all” mode, no data can be listed as no user data are stored in
— the CP 530 memory (ONLINE mode) or
– on the diskette under the program name specified (OFFLINE mode),

Error 26: No blank fields permitted!

Blank fields are not permitted in polling lists or interrupt lists.
The cursor is in the first vacant field found.
Action:
– Delete the respective field or
– Enter a slave number in the respective field.

Error 27: No double slave number in interrupt list!

Each slave may only appear once in an interrupt list.

4-2
4. Appendix

4.1 COM 530 Error List

Error 28: No EPROM/EEPROM submodule plugged in!

An EPROM/EEPROM submodule must be plugged into the receptacle for it on the programmer. —

See SINEC LI Operating Instructions.

Error 29: No program names for EPROM and CP 530!

“info” mode:
Where EPROM or CP 530 is specified as source, no information can be given for “All programs” (= all program
names on diskette), as only one user program can be stored in the CP 530 or EPROM.
Source = CP 530 or EPROM:
Only “ Individual program” mode is possible in which information is given on whether the SYSID identifier and/or
polling list and/or interrupt list exist or not.

Error 2A: WARNING: No EPROM driver on the system diskette. No EPROM calls!!!
The COM 530 draws the user’s attention to the fact that there is no EPROM driver on the system diskette being used.
WARNING: An attempt to program data into an EPROM or to read data from an EPROM causes a program crash.
The “IN TERRUPTTRAP HALT” message appears in the form.
Action: Put original S5-DOS system diskette into a drive and start program once more.

Error2C: Left mailbox empty!

If the interface supplies a mailbox (left) with length O, this error message appears.

Error2D: Right mailbox empty!

If the interface supplies a mailbox (right) with length O, this error message appears.

Error 31: Polling list does not exist!

Error 32: Interrupt list does not exist!

Error 33: SYSID identifier does not exist!

These three error messages appear in
– output
– Delete
– Transmit
modes if the respective data type does not exist in the CP 530 or in the EPROM or on the user diskette under the pro-
gram name specified.

Error 35: Illegal return message from PC!

Error 36: PC-Usart error!

Error 37: CP does not report!

Error 38: USART error on programmer side!

Error 39: USART error on CP side

Error 3A: Interface not ready!

Error3B: Abort by CP!

Error3C: List non-existent!

Error3D: Diskette directory full!

The diskette directory of the user diskette or hard disk is full. A new file cannot be initialized.
Action: Use new diskette
Delete files not required

Error3E: User diskette full!

The space available on the diskette or hard disk being used is insufficient for storing the file.
Action: Use another diskette
Delete files not required

Error 41: EPROM not erased!

The EPROM must be completely erased before it is programmed.

4-3
 m
4. A p p e n d i x

4.1 COM 530 Error List

Error 42: VPP error!

The supply voltage level (for the EPROM) is not within the permissible range. This suggests a hardware fault on the
EPROM or at the PG interface.
Action: Service or repair

Error 43: Comparison error!

After bus parameters have been programmed into an EPROM from diskette or the CP 530, the contents of the
EPROM are compared with the data on the diskette or CP 530.
if the data are not identical, this error message is output.
Action: Erase EPROM and reprogram

Error 45: Address out of range!

Error 46: Incomplete input!

In the
– output
– Transmit
– Print
– Info
– Delete
modes, a program name and drive identifier must be given for the source diskette (the cursor is in the PROGRAM
NAME field).

Error 47: Slave failed!

Error 48: Wrong mode!

Error 49: Slave not in polling list!

Error 4A: Slave already receiving data!

—. Error 54: EPROM/EEPROM submodule type illegal!

The wrong EPROM/EEPROM submodule is being used.
See SINEC LI Operating Instructions

Error 56: Mode change, CP stopped

Error 57: Error in slave cycle

Error 58: Slave xx failed!

Error 59: Slave xx not on bus!

— In both of these error messages, the number of the respective slave is entered in the output fields.

Error 60: Only hexadecimal characters permitted!

Error 61: –32.768 fixed-point +32.767!

Error 62: FORMAT: aaa, bbb; aaa, bbb only up to 255!

Error 63: ASCII characters only!

Error 64: FORMAT: aaa, b; b ...0 to 3!

Error 65: Wrong counter word!

Error 66: Only keys O and 1 permissible!

Error 67: FLOATING-POINT SYNTAX: + 1234567–89!

Error 70: Incorrect CP module!

—
Error 71: Error when programming the EEPROM on the CP!

4-4
4. Appendix

4.1 COM 530 Error List

Error 72: It is not possible to set the CP to RUN since the Stop/Run switch is at STOP!
—.
Error 73: CP 530 is a slave

Error 75: Slave failed

Error 77: Programmer data has been overwritten.

Error 78: Slave not in polling list

The following error messages may appear after accessing a drive (diskette or hard disk):

Drive not defined

Is there a diskette in the drive selected?

Defective external memory

Defective drive or diskette. Is the diskette correctly formatted?

External memory write-protected

Read-only access to selected drive.

File write-protected
Read-only access to the selected program

External memory full

No free memory space available on the selected diskette or hard disk. This message is also displayed when the directory is full.

List does not exist

The selected list (SYSID, polling list, interrupt list) is not available in the selected program.

Bestell-Nr.: GWA4NEB 811 0730-02a

SIEMENS AKTIENGESELLScHAFT Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
AG 07871.0 FL 60 en
 iender ( Please fill out)

Siemens AG Name
Geratewerk Amberg, TDI
Postfach 1954
Werner-von-Siemens-Stra8e 48-52 :ompany/Department

D-8450 Amberg
kddress
Federal Republic of Germany

Suggestions: Corrections: relephone

Manual SINEC Ll, 5th Edition (6ES5998-7LA21) /

Have you found any typographical errors while reading this manual? Please use this form to
tell us about them.
We would also welcome any ideas and suggestions you may have.
.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... .......... .....

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..............................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..............................

! ......,,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,0, ...,..... . . . . . . . . . . ,,, ,, .,.., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,, .,!..... .,..,.,.,, ,,...,.0.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..............................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..............................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..............................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..............................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..............................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..............................

.,..,,,,.,., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , .,..0..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..............................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..............................

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..............................